Panasonic KX-NCP 500, 1000 IP-PBX Feature Manual

3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV
www.voicesonic.com
Phone 877-289-2829
KX-NCP500
KX-NCP1000
Model No.
Feature Manual
Pure IP-PBX
Panasonic KX-NCP500, KXNCP500, NCP500, KX-NCP1000, KXNCP1000, NCP1000
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Pure IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000: PBMPR Software File Version 2.0200 or later
Document Version: 2009-12
Introduction
Introduction
About the Feature Manual
The Feature Manual is designed to serve as an overall reference describing the features of the Panasonic
Pure IP-PBX. It explains what the PBX can do, as well as how to obtain the most of its many features and
facilities.
The Feature Manual is divided into the following sections:
Sections 1 to 20, Features and Configurations
Describes the call handling, system configuration and administration features of the PBX.
Section 21, Appendix
Provides tables listing capacity of system resources, exclusive features for each PBX model, tone and ring
tone tables, and the revision history of this Feature Manual.
Index
An alphabetical listing of features and terms, as well as the page numbers of related sections.
References Found in the Feature Manual
Installation Manual References
The PBX Installation Manual provides instructions detailing the installation and maintenance of the PBX.
Sections from the Installation Manual are listed throughout the Feature Manual for your reference.
PC Programming Manual References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using the Maintenance Console (® 13.1.6 PC Programming).
These PC programming items are noted throughout the Feature Manual for your reference by title and System
Menu number.
PT Programming Manual References
Commonly used settings can be programmed using a display PT (® 13.1.30 PT Programming). These PT
programming items are noted throughout the Feature Manual for your reference by title and program number.
Feature Manual References
Related sections of the Feature Manual are listed for your reference.
Operating Manual References
The Operating Manual describes how users can access commonly used PBX features and functions with their
proprietary telephones (PTs), single line telephones (SLTs), portable stations (PSs), and DSS Consoles.
Sections from the Operating Manual are listed throughout the Feature Manual for your reference.
Links to Other Pages and Manuals
If viewing this Feature Manual with a PC, certain items are linked to different sections of the Feature Manual
and other manuals. Click on a link to jump to that section.
Linked items include:
• Installation Manual References
• Feature Manual References
• Operating Manual References
• PT Programming References
• PC Programming References
2
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Introduction
Abbreviations
There are many abbreviations used in this manual (e.g., "PT", for proprietary telephone). Please refer to the
list in the next section for the meaning of each abbreviation.
Note
•
•
•
•
The contents of this manual apply to PBXs with a certain software version, as indicated on the cover
of this manual. To confirm the software version of your PBX, see 2.7.1 Frequently Asked Questions
(FAQ) in the FAQ of the PC Programming Manual, or [190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version
Reference in the PT Programming Manual.
Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Please consult your
certified Panasonic dealer for more information.
Product specifications are subject to change without notice. In some cases, additional information,
including updates to this and other manuals, is included in the Maintenance Console’s Information
before programming. Install the latest version of Maintenance Console to view this information.
All system programming can be performed through PC programming (® 13.1.6 PC Programming).
However, only a subset can be performed through PT programming (® 13.1.30 PT Programming).
Throughout this manual, programming references are included as follows:
PC Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the System Menu number for the Maintenance Console.
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
PT Programming
The number within the brackets indicates the programming number that is entered when performing
PT programming.
® [001] System Speed Dialing Number
For further details, please refer to the PC Programming Manual and PT Programming Manual.
Safety Notices
Please observe the safety notices in this manual in order to avoid danger to users or other people, and prevent
damage to property.
The notices are classified as follows, according to the severity of injury or damage:
WARNING
This notice means that misuse could result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
This notice means that misuse could result in injury or damage to property.
WARNING
Unplug the PBX from the AC outlet if it emits smoke, an abnormal smell or makes unusual noise.
These conditions can cause fire or electric shock. Confirm that smoke has stopped and contact an
authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
Trademarks
• Microsoft and Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
•
•
States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Panasonic Corporation is under license.
All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
3
List of Abbreviations
List of Abbreviations
A
CONR
Connected Name Identification Restriction
AA
Automated Attendant
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
APT
Analog Proprietary Telephone
ARS
Automatic Route Selection
B
COS
Class of Service
CPC
Calling Party Control
CS
Cell Station
CT
Call Transfer—QSIG
CTI
Computer Telephony Integration
D
BGM
Background Music
C
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
CA
Communication Assistant
CCBS
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber
CDPG
DIL
Direct In Line
DISA
Direct Inward System Access
Call Distribution Port Group
DND
Call Forwarding—QSIG
DPT
CF
CLI
Calling Line Identification
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Do Not Disturb
Digital Proprietary Telephone
DSS
Direct Station Selection
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
CLIR
Calling Line Identification Restriction
CNIP
Calling Name Identification Presentation
E
EFA
External Feature Access
CNIR
Calling Name Identification Restriction
COLP
Connected Line Identification Presentation
COLR
F
FWD
Call Forwarding
Connected Line Identification Restriction
CONP
Connected Name Identification Presentation
4
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
List of Abbreviations
G
PRI
G-CO
Group-CO
I
Primary Rate Interface
PS
Portable Station
PT
Proprietary Telephone
ICD
Incoming Call Distribution
ICMP
Internet Control Message Protocol
IP-PT
IP Proprietary Telephone
IRNA
Intercept Routing—No Answer
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
L
S
S-CO
Single-CO
SDN
Secondary Directory Number
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
SLT
Single Line Telephone
SMDR
L-CO
Loop-CO
LCS
Live Call Screening
LED
Light Emitting Diode
N
NDSS
Network Direct Station Selection
O
Station Message Detail Recording
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SVM
Simplified Voice Message
T
TAFAS
Trunk Answer from Any Station
TEI
OGM
Outgoing Message
OHCA
Off-hook Call Announcement
Terminal Endpoint Identifier
TRG
Trunk Group
TRS
Toll Restriction
OPX
Off Premise Extension
P
U
UCD
Uniform Call Distribution
PDN
Primary Directory Number
PIN
Personal Identification Number
PING
Packet Internet Grouper
Document Version 2009-12
V
VM
Voice Mail
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
Feature Manual
5
List of Abbreviations
VPS
Voice Processing System
X
XDP
EXtra Device Port
6
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Features and Configurations—A ..........................................................13
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
A ........................................................................................................................................14
Absent Message .............................................................................................................14
Account Code Entry .......................................................................................................15
ARS (Automatic Route Selection) ..................................................................................16
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) .............................................................................22
Automatic Extension Release ........................................................................................23
Automatic Fax Transfer ..................................................................................................23
Automatic Time Adjustment ...........................................................................................24
2 Features and Configurations—B ..........................................................27
2.1
2.1.1
B ........................................................................................................................................28
BGM (Background Music) ..............................................................................................28
3 Features and Configurations—C ..........................................................29
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.1.5
3.1.6
3.1.7
3.1.8
3.1.9
3.1.10
3.1.11
3.1.12
3.1.13
3.1.14
3.1.15
3.1.16
3.1.17
3.1.18
3.1.19
3.1.20
3.1.21
3.1.22
3.1.23
C ........................................................................................................................................30
CA (Communication Assistant) ......................................................................................30
Call Distribution Port Group ............................................................................................30
Caller ID .........................................................................................................................32
Call Hold .........................................................................................................................36
Call Log, Incoming ..........................................................................................................38
Call Monitor ....................................................................................................................41
Call Park .........................................................................................................................42
Call Pickup .....................................................................................................................43
Call Splitting ...................................................................................................................44
Call Transfer ...................................................................................................................45
CALL WAITING FEATURES ..........................................................................................48
Call Waiting Tone ...........................................................................................................50
CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES ...................................................................................51
CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution ...................................................................51
CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) ...............................................................53
CO Line Access ..............................................................................................................55
CO Line Call Limitation ...................................................................................................57
Conference .....................................................................................................................58
Confirmation Tone ..........................................................................................................59
Consultation Hold ...........................................................................................................60
COS (Class of Service) ..................................................................................................61
CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection ................................................................62
CTI (Computer Telephony Integration) ...........................................................................62
4 Features and Configurations—D ..........................................................65
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.1.8
4.1.9
4.1.10
D ........................................................................................................................................66
Data Line Security ..........................................................................................................66
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment ...........................................66
Dial Mode Selection .......................................................................................................66
Dial Tone ........................................................................................................................67
Dial Tone Transfer ..........................................................................................................69
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) .............................................................................................70
DIL (Direct In Line) .........................................................................................................72
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) .............................................................................74
Display Information .........................................................................................................84
DND (Do Not Disturb) .....................................................................................................85
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
7
Table of Contents
4.1.11
4.1.12
Door Open ......................................................................................................................86
Doorphone Call ..............................................................................................................87
5 Features and Configurations—E ..........................................................89
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
E ........................................................................................................................................90
EFA (External Feature Access) ......................................................................................90
Emergency Call ..............................................................................................................91
Executive Busy Override ................................................................................................91
Extension Dial Lock ........................................................................................................92
Extension Feature Clear .................................................................................................93
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) ............................................................94
Extension Port Configuration ..........................................................................................95
External Relay ................................................................................................................96
External Sensor ..............................................................................................................97
6 Features and Configurations—F ........................................................101
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
F ......................................................................................................................................102
Fixed Buttons ...............................................................................................................102
Flash/Recall/Terminate ................................................................................................104
Flexible Buttons ............................................................................................................105
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering ..........................................................................107
Floating Extension ........................................................................................................113
FWD (Call Forwarding) .................................................................................................114
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button ........................................................................118
7 Features and Configurations—G ........................................................121
7.1
7.1.1
G .....................................................................................................................................122
GROUP FEATURES ....................................................................................................122
8 Features and Configurations—H ........................................................127
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
H ......................................................................................................................................128
Hands-free Answerback ...............................................................................................128
Hands-free Operation ...................................................................................................129
Headset Operation .......................................................................................................129
HOSPITALITY FEATURES ..........................................................................................130
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host
PBX) .............................................................................................................................130
Hot Line ........................................................................................................................132
9 Features and Configurations—I ..........................................................135
9.1
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
9.1.6
9.1.7
9.1.8
9.1.9
9.1.10
9.1.11
9.1.12
9.1.13
9.1.14
8
I .......................................................................................................................................136
ICD GROUP FEATURES .............................................................................................136
ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution .............................................................139
ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out ..........................................................................142
ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations ................................................................145
ICD Group Features—Overflow ...................................................................................147
ICD Group Features—Queuing ....................................................................................149
ICD Group Features—Supervisory ..............................................................................151
ICD Group Features—VIP Call ....................................................................................153
Idle Extension Hunting .................................................................................................154
INCOMING CALL FEATURES .....................................................................................155
Intercept Routing ..........................................................................................................158
Intercept Routing—No Destination ...............................................................................162
Intercom Call ................................................................................................................163
Internal Call Block ........................................................................................................164
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Table of Contents
9.1.15
9.1.16
IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) .................................................................................165
ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES ........................167
10 Features and Configurations—L ........................................................169
10.1
10.1.1
10.1.2
10.1.3
10.1.4
L ......................................................................................................................................170
LED Indication ..............................................................................................................170
Line Preference—Incoming ..........................................................................................172
Line Preference—Outgoing ..........................................................................................173
Local Alarm Information ...............................................................................................174
11 Features and Configurations—M ........................................................177
11.1
11.1.1
11.1.2
11.1.3
11.1.4
11.1.5
M .....................................................................................................................................178
Manager Features ........................................................................................................178
MEMORY DIALING FEATURES ..................................................................................179
Message Waiting ..........................................................................................................181
Music on Hold ...............................................................................................................183
Mute .............................................................................................................................185
12 Features and Configurations—O ........................................................187
12.1
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
12.1.5
O .....................................................................................................................................188
Off-hook Monitor ...........................................................................................................188
OGM (Outgoing Message) ...........................................................................................188
OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement) .........................................................................191
One-touch Dialing .........................................................................................................192
Operator Features ........................................................................................................192
13 Features and Configurations—P ........................................................195
13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6
13.1.7
13.1.8
13.1.9
13.1.10
13.1.11
13.1.12
13.1.13
13.1.14
13.1.15
13.1.16
13.1.17
13.1.18
13.1.19
13.1.20
13.1.21
13.1.22
13.1.23
P ......................................................................................................................................196
Paging ..........................................................................................................................196
Paralleled Telephone ...................................................................................................198
Password Security ........................................................................................................200
Pause Insertion ............................................................................................................201
PC Console/PC Phone .................................................................................................202
PC Programming ..........................................................................................................204
PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number)
Extension ......................................................................................................................206
Peer-to-Peer Connection ..............................................................................................212
PING (Packet Internet Groper) Confirmation ...............................................................212
Power Failure Restart ...................................................................................................213
Power Failure Transfer .................................................................................................213
Predialing .....................................................................................................................214
Printing Message ..........................................................................................................214
Privacy Release ...........................................................................................................215
PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES ..............................................................................215
Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail .....................................................237
Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) ........................241
Private Network Features—Network ICD Group ..........................................................246
Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group ................................248
PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG ..................................................................249
Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber) ...................................................................................................................251
Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding) ...........................................252
Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification
Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification
Presentation) ................................................................................................................253
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
9
Table of Contents
13.1.24
13.1.25
13.1.26
13.1.27
13.1.28
13.1.29
13.1.30
Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer) ................................................255
Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) ..................................256
PS Connection .............................................................................................................259
PS Directory .................................................................................................................261
PS Feature Buttons ......................................................................................................262
PS Ring Group .............................................................................................................262
PT Programming ..........................................................................................................266
14 Features and Configurations—Q ........................................................269
14.1
14.1.1
14.1.2
Q .....................................................................................................................................270
Quick Dialing ................................................................................................................270
Quick Setup ..................................................................................................................270
15 Features and Configurations—R ........................................................273
15.1
15.1.1
15.1.2
15.1.3
R ......................................................................................................................................274
Redial, Last Number .....................................................................................................274
Ring Tone Pattern Selection ........................................................................................275
Room Status Control ....................................................................................................276
16 Features and Configurations—S ........................................................279
16.1
16.1.1
16.1.2
16.1.3
16.1.4
16.1.5
16.1.6
16.1.7
16.1.8
16.1.9
S ......................................................................................................................................280
Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only) .....................................................................................280
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension ..................................................................281
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording) .................................................................282
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor ................................290
Special Carrier Access Code .......................................................................................292
Speed Dialing, Personal ...............................................................................................292
Speed Dialing, System .................................................................................................293
SVM (Simplified Voice Message) .................................................................................294
Syslog Record Management ........................................................................................300
17 Features and Configurations—T ........................................................301
17.1
17.1.1
17.1.2
17.1.3
17.1.4
17.1.5
17.1.6
T ......................................................................................................................................302
T1 Line Service ............................................................................................................302
TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station) ...................................................................303
Tenant Service .............................................................................................................304
Timed Reminder ...........................................................................................................308
Time Service ................................................................................................................309
TRS (Toll Restriction) ...................................................................................................313
18 Features and Configurations—U ........................................................321
18.1
18.1.1
U ......................................................................................................................................322
Upgrading the Software ................................................................................................322
19 Features and Configurations—V ........................................................323
19.1
19.1.1
19.1.2
19.1.3
19.1.4
19.1.5
V ......................................................................................................................................324
Verification Code Entry .................................................................................................324
Virtual PS .....................................................................................................................325
Voice Mail (VM) Group .................................................................................................327
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration .............................................................................330
Voice Mail DTMF Integration ........................................................................................337
20 Features and Configurations—W .......................................................345
20.1
20.1.1
10
W .....................................................................................................................................346
Walking COS ................................................................................................................346
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Table of Contents
20.1.2
20.1.3
20.1.4
20.1.5
Walking Extension ........................................................................................................347
Walking Extension, Enhanced ......................................................................................348
Whisper OHCA .............................................................................................................349
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode ........................................................................................350
21 Appendix ...............................................................................................355
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.4.1
21.4.2
Capacity of System Resources ....................................................................................356
Tones/Ring Tones .........................................................................................................360
Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table ............................................362
Revision History ............................................................................................................367
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 1.01xx ...............................367
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.02xx ...............................367
Index............................................................................................................369
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
11
Table of Contents
12
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 1
Features and Configurations—A
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
13
1.1.1 Absent Message
1.1 A
1.1.1 Absent Message
Description
Extension users can prepare a brief text message (Absent Message) that will be displayed to other extension
users when they are called. These messages can explain the reason for their absence, and may be edited
through system programming and personal programming.
The following Absent Messages may be programmed:
Type
System
message
Message
No.
Message (Example)
1
Will Return Soon
2
Gone Home
3
At Ext %%%% (Extension
Number)
4
Back at %%:%% (Hour:Minute)
5
Out until %%/%% (Month/Day)
6
In a Meeting
Description
Messages may be edited
through system programming.
They can be used by any
extension user.
7
8
Personal
message
9
A message is programmable by
each extension through personal
programming (Personal Absent
Message), which can only be
used by that extension user.
Note
The "%" shown above indicates a parameter to be entered when assigning a message at an individual
extension.
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
Conditions
•
•
An extension user can select only one Absent Message at a time. The selected message is displayed at
the extension while on-hook.
The caller must use a display proprietary telephone (PT) to see the Absent Message.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Absent Message Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Absent Message
8.5 [6-5] Absent Message
14
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
PT Programming Manual References
[008] Absent Message
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.1 Absent Message
3.1.2 Personal Programming
1.1.2 Account Code Entry
Description
An account code is used to identify outgoing CO line calls for accounting and billing purposes. The account
code is appended to the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record. For example, a firm can use
an account code for each client to determine which calls were made for which client, and can submit a bill to
the client according to the client’s account code as shown on the SMDR call record.
There are two methods of entering account codes explained below.
One of the methods is selected for each extension based on Class of Service (COS) programming.
Mode
Description
Option
An extension user can enter an account code, but is not required to.
Forced
An extension user must always enter an account code before seizing
a CO line.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
An account code can be stored in Memory Dialing (One-touch Dialing, for example).
Account Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Account button. The Account button is used in place of the
feature number for entering an account code. This button is useful because it can be used at any time,
while feature number entry is allowed only when hearing a dial tone before seizing a CO line.
Extension users can enter an account code at any time during a call, including after the call has been
disconnected and a reorder tone is heard. However, if an account code is entered after there is no longer
a reorder tone, the call will not be stored in the SMDR record.
If an account code is entered more than once, the code entered last is logged in the SMDR.
Even in Forced mode, emergency numbers can be dialed without an account code. (® 5.1.2 Emergency
Call)
Proprietary telephone (PT) users can also enter an account code for incoming CO line calls during a
conversation.
Verification Code Entry
To identify who made a CO line call for accounting and billing purposes, a verification code can be used.
This code can be used at any extension. (® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
15
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Account Code Entry
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Account Code Mode
PT Programming Manual References
[508] Account Code Mode
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Description
Different telephone carriers charge different rates for calls placed to different areas. Your PBX may use different
telephone carriers to make calls to different areas in an effort to reduce costs.
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a feature which automatically selects different carriers each time a CO
line call is made. In order to use ARS effectively, various ARS-related tables must be preprogrammed to tell
the PBX which calls should be placed using which carriers, during which time of day.
If you do not activate ARS, if ARS is bypassed, or if you do not use multiple carriers, CO line calls will be
connected via the carrier contracted for each line (default carrier).
16
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
[Carrier Selection Procedure Flowchart]
The numbers in parentheses indicate the corresponding items found under [Programming Procedures] on the
following pages.
An extension user accesses a CO
line and dials a telephone number.
Is the ARS mode (1) enabled?
No (Normal CO Line Access)
Sends the telephone
number as dialed.
Yes
Is the dialed number found in the
Leading Number Exception Table (2)?
Yes
No
Is the dialed number found in
the Leading Number Table (3)?
No
Yes
Checks the Routing Plan (4) to
determine which carrier to use.
Is the carrier found in the
appropriate time block (4)?
No
Yes
Is there an available
trunk group (5)?
Yes
Modifies the dialed number by
removing the digits and following
the modify commands (5).
No
Because all CO
lines are busy?
Yes
No
Is normal
CO Line Access
allowed?
Yes
(default)
No
Sends the modified number
to the CO line.
Sends a
busy tone.
Sends a
reorder tone.
Sends the telephone
number by the Idle
Line Access.
[Programming Procedures]
1. ARS Mode
ARS is turned on by selecting under which circumstances it operates – either when an extension user
makes a call using the Idle Line Access method, or when any CO Line Access method is used (® 3.1.16 CO
Line Access). ARS can also be turned off for the entire system.
® 10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode
® [320] ARS Mode
2. Leading Number Exception Table
Once ARS is activated, store the telephone numbers that will bypass ARS in the Leading Number Exception
Table.
Note that the first few digits (leading number) of a telephone number, such as an area code or local
exchange, can also be stored, so that all calls to those areas or exchanges are exempted from ARS. Also
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
17
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
note that the CO Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed
here.
Calls that are exempt from ARS are connected to the user-selected line, via the default carrier for that line.
[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Exception Table]
Leading No.
Exception *1
Location
No.
1
2
3
*1
555
556
567
® 10.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception
® [325] ARS Exception Number
In this example:
555, 556, and 567 are local exchanges. (555-XXXX, 556-XXXX, 567-XXXX)
These calls can be made using any carrier, and are therefore exempt from ARS.
3. Leading Number Table
Next, store the leading numbers of telephone numbers that should be routed by ARS, and assign a Routing
Plan to each leading number that will control how calls containing these leading numbers are routed.
When an extension user dials a number which contains a leading number stored in the ARS Leading
Number Table, the call will be routed the corresponding Routing Plan assigned here. Note that the CO
Line Access number is always ignored by ARS and does not need to be programmed here.
Before programming the details of each Routing Plan (explained below), you can simply assign here the
same Routing Plan number to all the different leading numbers which will be routed the same way.
If a dialed number matches two or more leading numbers stored in the ARS Leading Number Table, the
lowest numbered location will have priority.
[Programming Example: ARS Leading Number Table]
*1
*2
*3
Location
No.
Leading
No.*1
Additional
No. of Digits*2
Routing Plan
No.*3
1
2
3
1212
01181
01144
7
0
0
1
5
12
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Leading Number
® [321] ARS Leading Number
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Additional Number of Digits
® 10.2 [8-2] Leading Number— Routing Plan Number
® [322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
Additional Number of Digits
In order for calls to be made using the desired carrier, telephone numbers dialed by extension users must
be modified to meet the criteria required by the carrier. (Refer to 5. Carrier Table.) This modification usually
involves removing digits and adding access codes to the beginning of the dialed number.
In situations where a preprogrammed number (such as an Itemized Billing Code) must be added
automatically after the telephone number that was dialed by the extension user, set the Additional Number
of Digits to a value greater than 0.
4. Routing Plan
18
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Since the preferred carrier may vary depending on the time of day, you can create an ARS-specific time
table and break each day of the week into different time blocks. A different carrier can then be assigned
to each time block.
Routing Plan Time Table: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned for each time of day
and each day of the week. Each day can have up to four programmable time blocks.
Routing Plan Priority: For each Routing Plan, a different carrier can be assigned a different priority for
each time of day. Generally, the carrier assigned to priority 1 will be used, however, if the CO lines assigned
to this carrier are busy, a different available carrier will be used according to priority level.
ARS Leading Number Table
Location
No.
1
2
3
Leading
No.
1212
01181
01144
Additional No.
of Digits
7
0
0
Routing Plan
No.
1
5
12
ARS Routing Plan No. 1
Time Table*1
Monday
*1
*2
Time Block A
Time Block B
Time Block C
Time Block D
9:00
12:00
17:00
23:00
Priority 1
Carrier A
Carrier A
Carrier C
Carrier J
Carrier*2
Priority 2
Carrier M
Carrier M
Carrier M
Carrier M
® 10.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting
® [330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
® 10.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority
® [331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16)
5. Carrier Table
Each carrier must be programmed in the Carrier Table. Here each carrier is assigned a carrier number,
name, the CO lines it is used with, etc.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier
Carrier Name: Assign a name for the carrier. Used only as a reference.
Trunk Group: Assign the trunk groups which can be used when making calls via this carrier.
Carrier Access Code: Enter the carrier’s access code. Consult carrier for details.
Removed Number of Digits: There may be circumstances where the user-dialed number must be
modified in order for the carrier to connect the call. In this case, enter here the number of digits to be
removed automatically from the beginning of the dialed number.
Modify Command: When a call is made using this carrier, the telephone number must be modified to meet
the criteria required by the carrier in order to connect the call. Program here the commands needed to
modify the user-dialed number as necessary.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
19
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
[Command Explanation]
Description
Command
C
Inserts the Carrier Access Code
H
Inserts the user-dialed number minus any removed digits
P
Analog Line: Inserts a pause
ISDN/T1 Line: Inserts a pause and changes dialing mode to tone (DTMF)
A
Inserts the Authorization Code for Tenant
G
Inserts the Authorization Code for Trunk Group
I
Inserts the Itemized Billing Code
[0-9,
, #] You can enter any of these digits in a modify command
[Programming Example: Carrier Table]
Carrier 1
Carrier Name*1
Carrier A
*2
Trunk Group
1, 2, 3
Carrier Access Code*3
0880
Removed No. of Digits*4
1
*5
Modify Command
CH
Carrier 2
Carrier J
4
0700
3
CPH
In this example
Dialed number: 9-1-212-555-5555
Modification:
9
1
2125555555
Remove 1 digit
CO Line Access no. is ignored
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
0880
2125555555
Add the Carrier Access Code
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Carrier Name
® [350] ARS Carrier Name
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—TRG 01–TRG 64
® [351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Carrier Access Code
® [353] ARS Carrier Access Code
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Removed Number of Digits
® [352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Carrier— Modify Command
6. ARS Options
Authorization Code for Tenant
A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each tenant.
® 10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
Authorization Code for Trunk Group
A Carrier Authorization Code can be assigned to each trunk group.
® 10.8 [8-7] Authorization Code for TRG
20
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Itemized Billing Code
An Itemized Billing Code can be assigned for each extension and for each verification code.
If a call is not made from an extension, such as via Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or TIE line, and
no verification code is used, the Itemized Billing Code assigned to location 1 in the Verification Code Table
will be used.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS
Conditions
CAUTION
The software contained in the ARS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the premises PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are
established will restrict the customer and the customer’s employees from gaining access to the network
and to these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP-TO-DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
•
•
•
Logging Outgoing Calls by SMDR
Whether SMDR logs the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified number is determined through system
programming. (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording))
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
ARS Data Import/Export
ARS tables and data can be copied to and from the PBX and a PC using the Maintenance Console software.
Files are saved in CSV (Comma Separated Value) format. Because of the large amounts of programming
that may be necessary to use ARS effectively, you may choose to export ARS tables and data to a PC,
edit them using the software of your choosing, then import the new data to the PBX. This is particularly
convenient if you need to update your ARS tables for new area codes or telephone rates, or when you’d
like to copy ARS tables from one PBX to another.
® 2.5.8 Tool—Import
® 2.5.9 Tool—Export
TRS
Toll Restriction (TRS) checks are performed before ARS number modification, so program TRS Denied
Code Tables and Exception Code Tables accordingly. (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))
When ARS Routing Takes Place
ARS routing takes place after the preprogrammed number of digits (leading number + additional number
of digits) have been dialed.
PC Programming Manual References
2.5.8 Tool—Import
→ARS - Leading Digit
→ARS - Except Code
→ARS - Routing Plan
2.5.9 Tool—Export
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS
Section 10 [8] ARS
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
21
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
PT Programming Manual References
[320] ARS Mode
[321] ARS Leading Number
[322] ARS Routing Plan Table Number
[325] ARS Exception Number
[330] ARS Routing Plan Time Table
[331–346] ARS Routing Plan Table (1–16)
[350] ARS Carrier Name
[351] ARS Trunk Group for Carrier Access
[352] ARS Removed Number of Digits for Carrier Access
[353] ARS Carrier Access Code
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
Description
If the line is busy when a call is made, a callback ring can inform the caller when the line becomes free.
If the called party was another extension, or if the dialed number is handled by Automatic Route Selection
(ARS), the number is automatically redialed after the extension user answers the callback ring.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
If the callback ring is not answered within 10 seconds, callback is canceled.
If the extension hears a busy tone before dialing the telephone number, only the CO line or trunk group is
reserved. After answering the callback ring, the extension should dial the telephone number.
An extension can set only one Automatic Callback Busy. The last setting is effective.
Multiple extension users can set this feature for the same CO line at the same time.
However, a maximum of four extension users can set this feature to one extension.
Callback ringing will be sent to extensions in the order that the feature was set. In other words, the extension
that set the feature first will receive a callback ringing first.
This feature cannot be used for calls to a Voice Processing System (VPS).
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Automatic Callback Busy Cancel
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Automatic Callback Busy
Operating Manual References
1.3.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on)
22
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
1.1.5 Automatic Extension Release
Description
After going off-hook, if an extension user fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period, the user
will hear a reorder tone. This operation applies to intercom calls only.
This feature is also known as Automatic Station Release.
Conditions
•
•
A proprietary telephone (PT)/portable station (PS) user hears a reorder tone for a preprogrammed time
period, and then the PT/PS returns to idle status automatically. A single line telephone (SLT) user will hear
a reorder tone until he or she goes on-hook.
This feature works in one of the following cases:
When making an intercom call
a. The first digit is not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.
b. A digit is dialed, but subsequent digits are not dialed within a preprogrammed time period.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Dial—Extension First Digit
→ Dial—Extension Inter-digit
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset
→ Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
Description
The PBX can distinguish between fax calls and other types of calls arriving on DISA lines, and automatically
transfer fax calls to preprogrammed destinations. When a call arrives on a DISA line, an OGM is played (®
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)). At the same time, the PBX begins fax signal detection. If a fax signal is
detected, the PBX recognizes that the call is a fax call, and transfers the call to the fax destination assigned
to that OGM through system programming. This allows a single CO line to be used seamlessly for both voice
and fax calls, with only voice calls arriving at user extensions.
[Available Automatic Fax Transfer Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü*1
ICD Group
ü
SIP Extension
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
23
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Destination
Availability
DISA
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
*1
A PS destination can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at another PBX connected by TIE line.
A virtual PS can be specified as the destination of fax calls. Then, the extension number of the fax machine at the other PBX can be
specified as the FWD—ALL Calls destination for calls to that virtual PS. (® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
An OPB card and ESVM4 card
When using this feature, it is necessary to disable the MSG Feature setting of the IPCMPR card.
This feature is only effective for calls arriving on DISA lines.
If a fax signal is not detected before the DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial timer expires, the call is redirected
to the operator extension, and fax detection ends.
It is not recommended to use the CNG feature when an MSG card is installed in the PBX.
Installation Manual References
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)
PC Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Fax Extension
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Description
The PBX clock can be adjusted automatically in the following two ways:
1. Daylight Saving Time Setting
The start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time can be programmed. The PBX clock will automatically
adjust itself one hour forward or backward at 2:00 A.M. on the programmed date, if enabled through system
programming. At 2:00 A.M. on the start date, the clock will change to 3:00 A.M., and at 2:00 A.M. on the
end date, the clock will change to 1:00 A.M.
24
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
Note
If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set:
– On the Daylight Saving Time start date, a reminder set for between 2:00 A.M. and 3:00 A.M. will
not ring.
– On the Daylight Saving Time end date, a reminder set for between 1:00 A.M. and 2:00 A.M. will
ring twice.
2. Time Information from Telephone Company
Time information can be received when
– An incoming or outgoing call through an ISDN line is received/made.
– An incoming call through an analog line with Caller ID which includes time information is received.
The PBX clock will be adjusted everyday with the first call after 3:05 AM, if enabled through system
programming.
Note
If a Timed Reminder (Remote Wake-up call) is set, the setting will not ring or will ring twice depending
on the adjustment.
3. Time Information through Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
By connecting the PBX to an SNTP server, it is possible to receive and update the time setting. The PBX
clock will be adjusted everyday at 3:05 AM, if enabled through system programming.
Conditions
[General]
• Through system programming, it is possible to specify SNTP, ISDN, or neither method as the selected
method of automatic time adjustment.
•
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) will log call information using the PBX clock so that the logging
time will be overlapped at the end of Daylight Saving Time. (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording))
[SNTP Time Information]
• The time set through SNTP will apply the same to all PTs and IP-PTs connected to the PBX, regardless if
an IP extension is located in another time zone.
PC Programming Manual References
4.2 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving— Automatic Time Adjustment
4.3 [2-1-2] Date & Time—SNTP / Daylight Saving—Daylight Saving
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
25
1.1.7 Automatic Time Adjustment
26
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 2
Features and Configurations—B
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
27
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
2.1 B
2.1.1 BGM (Background Music)
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can listen to background music (BGM) through the built-in speaker while
on-hook and idle. The following audio sources are available:
a. External music source
b. Internal music source
c. Outgoing Message (OGM)
BGM—External:
BGM can also be broadcast in the office through an external pager (loudspeaker) and can be turned on and
off by an extension assigned as a manager.
Conditions
[BGM]
• Hardware requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned).
• The music heard through the PT is interrupted when going off-hook.
• Each extension user can select the audio source.
• Through system programming, it is possible to specify the maximum number of IP-PTs connected to a
V-IPEXT card that can simultaneously perform the BGM feature. Changing this setting may affect the
number of simultaneous IP extension and IP CO line calls available on the IPCMPR card.
[BGM—External]
• Hardware requirement: A user-supplied external pager
• The external pager can be used with the following priorities:
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ® Paging ® BGM
(® 13.1.1 Paging, ® 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station))
Installation Manual References
3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
PC Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
→ External BGM On / Off
→ BGM Set / Cancel
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH— MOH—MOH (Music On Hold)
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
Operating Manual References
1.3.5 BGM (Background Music)
2.1.2 External BGM (Background Music)
28
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 3
Features and Configurations—C
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
29
3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group
3.1 C
3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)
Description
Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA) is a CTI application usable with any telephone (except SIP
extensions). A CTI server is not required to use CA. CA Client has 4 operating modes: Basic, Pro,
Supervisor, and Operator Console.
• Basic Mode:
Only basic features are available, such as call control.
• Pro Mode:
A pro user can see the presence (phone status and absent message) of other extensions.
• ICD Group Supervisor Mode:
A supervisor can use this feature to monitor users within an ICD group from a PC.
• Operator Console Mode:
An operator or secretary can manage and redirect multiple calls simultaneously with a graphical interface.
Conditions
•
•
Activation keys are required to enable the application, some of which are preinstalled on the IPCMPR card.
For details, refer to the documentation for CA.
Installation Manual References
3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
PC Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—Port Number— Built-in Communication Assistant Server
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— Built-in Communication Assistant
Feature Manual References
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group
Description
It is possible to set which virtual port receives each call depending on the telephone number of the called party.
By assigning each port to a Call Distribution Port Group (CDPG), it is possible to select which group receives
each call. CDPG settings cover all V-IPGW cards in the PBX, which allows for ports on different cards to be
assigned to the same CDPG. In other words, two 8-port cards can be used as one 16-port card.
Programming Example:
To enable this feature, it is necessary to program the following 2 tables through system programming:
• CDPG Table
- in order to assign ports to Call Distribution Port Groups.
30
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.2 Call Distribution Port Group
•
Hunt Pattern Table
- in order to program a priority list of CDPG destinations for each leading number.
[Programming Example of the CDPG Table]
V-IPGW Card Number
Port Number
Call Distribution Port Group*1
1
1
CDPG 1
1
2
CDPG 2
1
:
:
1
8
CDPG 2
2
1
CDPG 1
2
:
:
2
8
CDPG 3
® 3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port—
*1
Call Distribution Port Group
[Programming Example of the Hunt Pattern Table]
*1
*2
N
o.
Leading
Number*1
Call Distribution Port
Group (1st)*2
Call Distribution Port
Group (2nd)*2
…
Call Distribution Port
Group (16th)*2
1
10
CDPG 1
CDPG 4
…
-
2
20
CDPG 1
CDPG 2
…
CDPG 3
:
:
:
:
…
:
32
300
CDPG 8
CDPG 11
…
-
® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16—
® 3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern—Hunt Pattern 1–16—
16th
Leading Number
Call Distribution Port Group—1st–
Note
The same CDPG can be set for several leading numbers.
Explanation:
As shown in the CDPG table above, CDPG 1 consists of Port 1 of the first card and Port 1 of the second card.
When "1023-456-7890" (leading number: 10) is dialed:
The leading number (10) is
searched for in the Hunt Pattern
Table.
CDPG 1 is the 1st priority
CDPG.
The call is routed to
Port 1 of the first card.
The call is rerouted to
Port 1 of the second
card.
Port 1 of the first card
is busy.
Port 1 of the second
card is available.
The call is
answered.
If all the ports belonging to CDPG 1 are busy, the call is rerouted to the lowest-numbered available port
belonging to CDPG 4, which is set as the second priority for this leading number.
Installation Manual References
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
31
3.1.3 Caller ID
PC Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
3.13 [1-1] Slot—Shelf Property - Virtual IP Gateway—Hunt Pattern
Feature Manual References
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
3.1.3 Caller ID
Description
The PBX can receive Caller ID information (a caller’s name and telephone number) from calls received on CO
lines. This information can be shown on a proprietary telephone (PT) display when receiving a call and can be
used to direct calls from specific callers to specific destinations automatically. Additionally, Caller ID information
is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension which received the call, allowing the caller to view a record
of incoming calls or make a call to a person in the call log later.
The PBX can be programmed to modify a caller’s telephone number when it is received and, for example, add
a CO Line Access number or add/delete certain digits of incoming telephone numbers automatically. This
allows an extension user to be able to make a call later to a telephone number logged in his or her call log
without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Note
•
The term "Caller ID" used in this Feature Manual refers to features that can receive caller information
sent from the telephone company and received on analog, ISDN, and T1 lines. Your network provider
may use a different name for this type of service.
• To receive Caller ID information, you must subscribe to the telephone company’s Caller ID service and
enable Caller ID for the appropriate CO line through system programming.
Caller ID to SLT Port:
Caller ID information can also be shown on a single line telephone (SLT) display. This feature is available only
for SLTs compatible with FSK-type Caller ID.
1. Caller ID Features
There are three features which can receive Caller ID information. The available feature depends on the
type of CO line receiving the call.
Feature
32
Description
Details in
Caller ID
Receives caller information sent from the
telephone company over analog CO lines.
–
Calling Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Receives caller information sent from the
telephone company over ISDN lines.
–
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)
Receives caller information sent from the
telephone company over T1 lines.
® 17.1.1 T1
Line Service
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.3 Caller ID
2. Caller ID-Related Features
Feature
Description
Details in
Calling Line Identification
(CLI) Distribution
Caller ID information received by the PBX is used
to direct calls from specific callers to specific
destinations. The caller’s telephone number and a
destination must be assigned in the System Speed
Dialing Table.
® 3.1.14 CLI
(Calling Line
Identification)
Distribution
Incoming Call Log
Caller information is automatically recorded in the
call log of the extension which received the call.
This information can be used to view a record of
incoming calls or make calls to any number in the
call log.
® 3.1.5 Call
Log, Incoming
3. Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
When a call is received, the PBX can automatically modify the caller’s telephone number according to a
preprogrammed set of rules (Caller ID Modification Table). This modified number will be automatically
stored in the extension’s Incoming Call Log, allowing the extension user to make a call to this number later
without worrying about CO Line Access numbers, area codes, etc.
Each trunk group can be assigned a modification table. Each table has ten formulas for modifying local/
international numbers, and one formula for modifying long distance numbers. When a call is received, the
PBX compares the received telephone number to the area codes programmed under "Local/International
Call Data" first. If a match is not found, the telephone number will be modified according to the method
programmed under "Long Distance Code".
[Programming Example: Caller ID Modification]
<Table Selection>
Trunk
Modification
Table
Group No.
1
1
3
2
<Modification Table>
Modification Table 1
Area Code
Local/International
212
Call Data 1
Local/International
011
Call Data 2
Local/International
Call Data 10
[Not
Long Distance
programmable]
Code Data
Removed No. of Digits Added No.
3
0
3
001
0
0
Note
When Caller ID information is received from a call on an ISDN line and the call type is International,
National, or Subscriber, the following modification table is used instead of the above table:
<Modification Table>
Removed No. of Digits Added No.
International Call Data
0
011
National Call Data
0
1
Subscriber Call Data
0
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
33
3.1.3 Caller ID
Data entered under "Removed No. of Digits" and "Added No." for International, National, and Subscriber
call data will be applied respectively to international, long distance, and local calls.
<Modification Flowchart>
A CO line call containing
Caller ID information is received.
Checks the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to the Trunk Group.
Yes
Is the caller's area code stored in
the Caller ID Modification Table?
No
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the corresponding
"Local/International Call Data" field.
Modifies the number according to the
method programmed in the "Long Distance
Code" field.
Example:
Removed number of digits: 3
Added number: 9
Example:
Removed number of digits: 0
Added number: 91
Example:
Received number: 212 555 1234
Example:
Received number: 313 555 1234
Modified number:
Modified number:
9 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
91 313 555 1234
Modification is complete.
Modified number is logged.
4. System Speed Dialing Table
The System Speed Dialing Table can store telephone numbers, names, and CLI destinations for hundreds
of callers.
a. Telephone Number: Contains a CO Line Access number and the caller’s telephone number. If
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification is used, telephone numbers should be stored in the System
Speed Dialing Table in their modified format in order for CLI distribution to function.
b. Caller’s Name: Shown on the display and logged (Incoming Call Log, Station Message Detail
Recording [SMDR]) when a call from this telephone number is received.
c. CLI Destination: The destination to which an incoming call from the stored telephone number is
directed via the CLI distribution feature.
34
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.3 Caller ID
[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]
*1
*2
*3
Location
(System Speed
Dialing No.)
System Speed
Dialing Name*1
Telephone No.*2
CLI Destination*3
000
ABC Company
912125551234
200
001
XYZ Company
913135551234
300
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
® [001] System Speed Dialing Number
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— Name
® [002] System Speed Dialing Name
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CLI Destination
5. Displaying the Caller’s Name
In addition to the System Speed Dialing Table, each extension can store names and numbers in Personal
Speed Dialing. Therefore, it is entirely possible for the same telephone number to be stored under a
different name in different locations within the PBX.
When a call containing Caller ID information is received, the PBX will search for the caller’s name in the
following order, then show that name on the display and log it via SMDR.
1. Personal Speed Dialing data of the extension which received the call
2. System Speed Dialing Table
3. The Caller ID information received from the telephone company
If a caller’s name is not stored in the PBX or sent from the telephone company, it will not be displayed or
logged.
Conditions
[General]
• Caller ID signaling type can be selected through system programming.
[Caller ID to SLT Port]
• Hardware Requirement:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A DHLC4 card, SLC8 card, or SLC16 card
When the caller’s number is sent to an SLT, a CO Line Access number can be automatically added to the
telephone number through system programming for calling back.
When the caller’s number exceeds 16 digits, the SLT receives only the first 16 digits, not counting the
preceding CO Line Access number (if it is programmed to be added).
If a call is transferred to an SLT, the transferring extension’s information will be shown on the SLT. If the
transferring extension goes on-hook before the call is answered, the original caller’s information will be
shown.
When Caller ID information such as "Private", "Out of Area", or "Long Distance" is received, this information
will be shown instead of the caller’s number and name.
Even if the caller’s name is sent, the name may not be shown depending on the type of SLT.
Incoming Call Log information is not shown on the SLT.
Caller ID shows whether the call is an intercom or CO line call by default. This setting can be disabled
through system programming.
A caller ID name received from the network via a PRI23 card will not be displayed on an SLT. However, if
the received caller ID matches a System Speed Dialing entry, and a name is registered for that entry, it
will be displayed.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
35
3.1.4 Call Hold
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ Caller ID—Waiting to receive
→ Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum
Public Caller ID Digits
4.19 [2-10] Extension CID Settings
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Caller ID Modification Table
5.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8
→ Extension Caller ID
→ Incoming Call Wait Timer for Extension Caller ID
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
PT Programming Manual References
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[490] Caller ID Signal Type
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
3.1.4 Call Hold
Description
An extension user can put a call on hold. The following Hold features are available:
Feature
Description
Regular Hold
Any extension can retrieve a held call.
Exclusive Call Hold
Only the extension user who held the call can retrieve it.
The result of the holding operation can be determined through system programming. Pressing the HOLD button
again just after the first time alternates the mode between Regular and Exclusive Call Hold.
Conditions
•
•
•
36
Call Hold Limitation
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can hold one intercom call and/or multiple CO line calls at a time. A
single line telephone (SLT) user can hold either one intercom call or one CO line call at a time. By using
the Call Park feature, PT and SLT users can hold multiple CO line calls and intercom calls simultaneously.
(® 3.1.7 Call Park)
Music on Hold
Music, if available, is sent to the held party. (® 11.1.4 Music on Hold)
Hold Recall
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.4 Call Hold
•
•
•
•
If a call on hold is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Hold Recall tone is heard at the
extension which put the call on hold. If the extension is engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
If an outside party is placed on hold and the call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period after
the Hold Recall time expires, the call is automatically disconnected.
Automatic Call Hold
A PT can be configured through system programming to place the current call on hold when the PT user
presses a CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM or PDN button to make or answer another call. If this feature is not
enabled, the current call will be disconnected.
[Example of Automatic Call Hold]
It is possible to receive an incoming CO line call by pressing the flashing ICD Group button. The current
intercom call (on the INTERCOM button) is placed on hold. To return to the held call, press the INTERCOM
button.
Call Hold Retrieve Deny
Internal Call Block (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions’ calls an extension
user can retrieve, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot retrieve extension 201’s
held calls either.
SLT Hold Mode
It is possible to choose how to hold and transfer a call with an SLT through system programming. The
following methods are available:
Hold
(to be Retrieved from
Another Extension)*1
Transfer to CO
Line
Transfer to
Extension
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
CO Line Access
No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
CO Line Access
No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
CO Line Access
No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Extension No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Going on-hook
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
CO Line Access
No.
Flashing the
hookswitch
+
Hold Feature No.
+
Extension No.
Hold
Mode 1
Mode 2
(Default)
Mode 3
Mode 4
*1
These operations must be performed when the held call is intended to be retrieved from another extension using the holding
extension number.
If one of the following occurs frequently with an SLT, choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4":
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
37
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
a. When an SLT user answers a call, a reorder tone is heard or no one is heard on the other end.
b. When an SLT user goes off-hook, a reorder tone is heard instead of a dial tone.
•
If a call is not terminated after going on-hook, the above cases occur. To avoid these problems,
choose "Mode 2", "Mode 3", or "Mode 4". Every call will be terminated unless the Hold feature number
is entered after flashing the hookswitch in Mode 2, Mode 3, and Mode 4.
Hold Alarm tone pattern has a default. (® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones)
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Recall—Hold Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve
→ Call Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Holding Extension Number
→ Hold Retrieve : Specified with a Held CO Line Number
4.18 [2-9] System Options
→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Hold by ICM / CO / ICD Group key
→Option 1— PT Operation—Hold Key Mode
→Option 5— SLT—SLT Hold Mode
PT Programming Manual References
[200] Hold Recall Time
Operating Manual References
1.3.6 Call Hold
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
Description
When a call containing Caller ID information is received by an extension, the information is shown on the
telephone display, notifying the extension user of the caller’s identity. This information is also automatically
logged in the Incoming Call Log of the extension, and can be viewed later or used to call that caller back.
Each extension and incoming call distribution (ICD) group has its own Incoming Call Log.
Call Log Button
The Call Log button will alert an extension user to any missed (unanswered) calls. A flexible button can be
customized as the Call Log button, and will indicate the status of the Incoming Call Log for the extension or
corresponding ICD group, as shown below.
Light pattern
38
Status of the corresponding call log
Red on
There are call records in the log which have not been viewed.
Off
There are no new call records in the log.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
John White
DEC.12 10:00AM MON
NEW: Not Answered
123456789
--- Caller's name (20 digits max.)
--- Date and time of a call received
--- Answering Status*
--- Caller's number (16 digits max.)
Call Log buttons
This extension
Incoming call distribution group
*: "NEW" is displayed for call records which have not previously been viewed;
"OLD" is displayed for call records which have previously been viewed.
Conditions
•
The following information is logged.
Telephone
KX-T7636/KX-T7633/
KX-T7630/KX-T7433
KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series
(except KX-NT321)/KX-DT300
series (except KX-DT321)
Information
KX-TD7695/KX-TD7685/
KX-TD7694/KX-TD7684/
KX-TD7690/KX-TD7680
1-line or 2-line display PT
3-line display PT except
KX-T7633/KX-T7630/
KX-T7433
KX-NT321/KX-NT265/
KX-DT321
Wireless phone
(KX-TD7895/KX-T7885)
6-line display PT
Caller's Name
Date/Time call
received
Answered or
Not Answered
Confirmed or
Not Confirmed
Caller's Phone
Number
*1
•
•
*1
*1
If the caller’s name is not logged, the caller’s phone number is displayed.
If the caller’s name is logged, the caller’s phone number is not displayed.
If the answering destination is not the original extension (e.g., Call Pickup or FWD—No Answer), the call
is logged in the Incoming Call Logs of both the original and the answering destination. If a call is forwarded
to multiple extensions before being answered, the call is logged in the call logs of all the extensions it was
forwarded to. If a call is forwarded to an ICD group and is not answered, the call is not logged in the call
log for the ICD group.
Incoming Call Log for Calls to a PS
Each portable station (PS) also has an Incoming Call Log. When a call is directed to a PS, the call will be
logged in the call log of the PS even when:
a. The PS is out of range.
b. The PS is turned off.
c. The Cell Station (CS) is busy.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
39
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
•
•
•
•
Display Lock
The Incoming Call Log of an extension can be locked through personal programming (Directory and Call
Log Lock) to prevent other users from viewing its contents. In this case, the Outgoing Call Log display, the
Personal Speed Dialing number display and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages
in the user’s message box cannot be played back.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number))
Incoming Call Log Memory
The total number of incoming calls that can be logged by the PBX is limited. The maximum number of calls
that can be logged in the Incoming Call Log of each extension and ICD group can be specified through
system programming. When a call log is full, the oldest call will be replaced each time a call is received.
Automatic Caller ID Number Modification
If the PBX is programmed to automatically modify incoming telephone numbers, the modified numbers will
be logged in the Incoming Call Log.
Incoming Call Log for Calls to an ICD Group
If a call directed to an ICD group is not answered, the call is logged in the Incoming Call Log of the ICD
group. If the call is answered, it is logged in the call log of the answering extension only.
Through system programming, it is possible to select which Incoming Call Logs record call information
when a member of an ICD group answers a call to the group:
– Only the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call.
– Both the Incoming Call Log of the extension that answered the call and that of the ICD group.
PC Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD— Incoming Call
Log Memory
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Call Log to ICD Group for
Answered Call
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 5— Incoming Call Display
→Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Option 5— Incoming Call Display
→Option 7— Incoming Call Log Memory
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log)
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
3.1.2 Personal Programming
40
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.6 Call Monitor
3.1.6 Call Monitor
Description
Allows an extension user to listen to a busy extension user’s existing conversation. The user can hear the
conversation but will not be heard. If desired, the monitoring user can interrupt the call to establish a three-party
conference call.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines extension users who can use this feature.
This feature is available only when the busy extension is in a conversation with another extension or outside
party.
This feature will not function when the busy extension:
a. Has set Executive Busy Override Deny (® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override) or Data Line Security (®
4.1.1 Data Line Security).
b. Is receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).
c. Is on a conference call (® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ® 13.1.14 Privacy
Release).
d. Is on a doorphone call (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call).
e. Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
f. Has a call on Consultation Hold (® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold).
This feature stops when the busy extension user presses the following buttons during a conversation (®
6.1.1 Fixed Buttons, ® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons):
– FLASH/RECALL button
– HOLD button
– TRANSFER button
– CONF (Conference) button
– DSS button
– EFA button
– Two-way Record button
– Two-way Transfer button
– One-touch Two-way Transfer button
– Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button
PC Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Call Monitor
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Monitor
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 2— Data Mode
→Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
41
3.1.7 Call Park
Operating Manual References
1.3.7 Call Monitor
3.1.7 Call Park
Description
An extension user can place a call into a common parking zone of the PBX. The Call Park feature can be used
as a transferring feature; this releases the user from the parked call to perform other operations. A parked call
can be retrieved by any extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Call Park
It is possible to select an idle parking zone automatically.
Retry
If the specified parking zone is occupied or there is no vacant zone for Automatic Call Park, the originator
will hear a busy tone. Retrying is possible while hearing a busy tone by selecting another parking zone or
a vacant zone.
Call Park Recall
If a parked call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period, the Call Park Recall tone will be heard
at the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which parked the call. If the destination is
engaged in a call, the Hold Alarm will be heard.
If a parked CO line call is not retrieved within a preprogrammed time period (Default: 30 minutes), it is
automatically disconnected.
Call Park Button
Pressing the Call Park button parks or retrieves a call in a preset parking zone.
Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park button. It shows the current status of the preset
parking zone as follows:
Light pattern
•
•
Status
Slow red flashing
A call is parked in the preset parking zone
Off
There are no parked calls
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) Button
Pressing the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button parks a call in an idle parking zone automatically.
Any flexible button can be customized as the Call Park (Automatic Park Zone) button.
Call Park Retrieve Deny
Internal Call Block (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also determines which extensions’ calls an extension
user can retrieve from a parking zone, i.e., if extension 101 cannot call extension 201, then it cannot retrieve
extension 201’s parked calls either.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Recall—Call Park Recall
→ Recall—Disconnect after Recall
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
42
Feature Manual
Call Park / Call Park Retrieve
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.8 Call Pickup
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Call Park)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park)
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.6 Call Hold
3.1.8 Call Pickup
Description
An extension user can answer a call ringing at any other extension.
The following types of Call Pickup are available:
Type
Description
Directed
A specified extension’s call is answered.
Group
A call within a specified call pickup group is answered.
Call Pickup Deny
An extension user can prevent other extensions from picking up calls ringing at his or her own extension.
Conditions
•
•
Call Pickup applies to:
Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls
Internal Call Block
An extension which cannot call certain extensions based on Class of Service (COS) programming (®
9.1.14 Internal Call Block) also cannot pick up calls ringing at those extensions.
[Directed Call Pickup]
• A user can also pick up a call to a specified extension by pressing the corresponding DSS button. This
feature is only available when (1) the user’s extension is allowed to use this feature through COS
programming, (2) DSS buttons for extensions or incoming call distribution (ICD) groups have this feature
enabled through system programming, and (3) the light pattern of DSS buttons for incoming calls to
extensions or ICD groups is set to "On or Flash" through system programming.
The light pattern of a DSS button for an incoming call to an extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)
group can be programmed through system programming. Call Pickup is available only when the DSS button
is red flashing.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
43
3.1.9 Call Splitting
[Group Call Pickup]
• A specified number of call pickup groups can be created, each of which consists of extension user groups.
One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (® 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES)
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1
Call Pickup Group 2
Call Pickup Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Group Call Pickup
→ Directed Call Pickup
→ Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Call Pickup by DSS
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
→ DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call
→ DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for ICD Group Call
5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Call Pickup Deny
PT Programming Manual References
[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.9 Call Pickup
3.1.9 Call Splitting
Description
During a conversation, an extension user can call another extension while putting the original party on
Consultation Hold. The extension user can then alternate between the two parties and/or connect the original
party with the third party.
44
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Conditions
•
When the extension user is having a conversation with one party, the other party is in consultation hold.
(® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold)
Operating Manual References
1.3.10 Call Splitting
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Description
An extension user can transfer a call to another extension or an outside party. The following features are
available:
Feature
With Announcement
Without Announcement
Transferring method
Transfer is completed after announcing the transfer to the destination
party.
Transfer is completed without an announcement.
After dialing the transfer destination, the originator can replace the
handset once a ringback tone is heard.
Call Transfer with Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Screened.
Call Transfer without Announcement is also known as Call Transfer—Unscreened.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
45
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Transfer Recall for Call Transfer without Announcement
If the transfer destination does not answer within the preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the call will be
redirected to the Transfer Recall destination assigned to the extension which transferred the call. If the transfer
destination has a destination set as Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call will be routed to that destination.
A call is transferred without announcement.
Does the transferrer
have a Transfer Recall
destination assigned?
Yes
No
No
Is the first transfer
destination an extension?
Yes
Does the first transfer
destination have a destination set as
Intercept Routing No Answer?
No
Yes
Is the intercept destination
an extension, ICD group, or VM
group?
No
No
Yes
Yes
The set extension, ICD group, or
VM group is memorized as the
Transfer Recall destination.
Is the recall destination an
extension, ICD group, or VM
group?
The transferrer is
memorized as the
Transfer Recall destination.
The set extension, ICD group, or
VM group is memorized as the
Transfer Recall destination.
The Transfer Recall timer is started.
[Available destination]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü (DPT only)*1
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
46
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.10 Call Transfer
Destination
Availability
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
*1
If the transfer destination does not answer, the call is sent to Voice Mail and a message can be recorded in the mailbox of the transfer
destination.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
When an extension is transferring a party to another destination, the party will be in consultation hold until
they reach the transfer destination. (® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold)
If Music on Hold is enabled, music can be sent to the held party while the call is being transferred (®
11.1.4 Music on Hold). It is programmable whether a ringback tone or music is sent to the caller.
If the transfer destination extension has set FWD to an outside party, the call will be transferred to the
outside party. (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extensions that are able to transfer a call to an outside
party. COS can also prohibit transferring to an extension of another PBX via the TIE line service using the
PBX code method (Access with PBX Code). (® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)
One-touch Transfer
One-touch Transfer can be performed by pressing a One-touch Dialing button that has been assigned the
TRANSFER command and the telephone number of the transfer destination. This is useful for transferring
calls to an outside destination. (® 11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES)
Automatic Transfer by SDN Button or DSS Button
Pressing an SDN button or DSS button during a conversation with an extension or outside party can
automatically transfer the call to the specified destination (® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/
SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension). It is possible through system programming to prevent this
feature from operating for extension to extension calls.
PC Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— BGM and Music on Hold—Sound on Transfer
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4
→ DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call
→ Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Transfer Recall Destination
PT Programming Manual References
[201] Transfer Recall Time
[503] Call Transfer to CO Line
[712] Music for Transfer
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
47
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.11 Call Transfer
1.3.49 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
Description
Used to inform a busy extension that another incoming call is waiting. The busy extension user can answer
the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold.
The following notification method can be assigned for each extension depending on the call waiting and the
telephone type:
a. Call Waiting Tone: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker
b. OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker
c. Whisper OHCA: Voice from the handset
d. Off: No notification.
Notification Method
Call Type
DPT
*1
Intercom Call
Call Waiting tone/
OHCA/Whisper
OHCA/Off
CO Line Call*1
Call Waiting tone/Off
IP-PT
Call Waiting tone/
Whisper OHCA/Off
Other Telephone
Call Waiting tone/Off
Including a doorphone call, call via an incoming call distribution group, and a CO line call transferred from another extension.
Call Waiting is also known as Busy Station Signaling (BSS).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
48
Automatic Call Waiting
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether a call waiting tone is automatically sent to
the extension when receiving CO line calls, doorphone calls, external sensor calls and hold-recall calls.
Through system programming, it is also possible to select whether extensions will receive Automatic Call
Waiting from intercom calls.
Call Waiting call for an extension in a VM group (DPT/DTMF) is not available.
Data Line Security
Setting Data Line Security cancels the Call Waiting setting. (® 4.1.1 Data Line Security)
Caller Information
With the Call Waiting tone, the caller’s information flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a
10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
Call Waiting from the Telephone Company
Besides the Call Waiting service within the PBX, the Call Waiting tone offered by an analog line from the
telephone company informs the extension user of another incoming CO line call that is waiting. He can
answer the second call by disconnecting the current call or placing it on hold using EFA. For details, consult
your telephone company.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES
•
•
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID):
When using the call waiting tone supplied by the telephone company over analog lines, the caller’s
telephone number and name can be received. Either the name or the number will flash on the display for
five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flash again for five seconds.
Note that the received caller information will not be displayed on telephones or wireless phones connected
to SLT ports.
OHCA and Whisper OHCA are enabled or disabled by the Class of Service (COS) of the calling extension.
OHCA and Whisper OHCA are not compatible with some telephone types. In such cases, a Call Waiting
tone will be sent to the called extension.
Called Extension’s Call Waiting Mode
OHCA Mode of
Calling
Extension’s COS
•
•
ON
OFF
Call Waiting
Tone
OHCA
Whisper OHCA
Disable
Call Waiting
disabled
Call Waiting tone
Call Waiting tone
Call Waiting tone
Enable
Call Waiting
disabled
Call Waiting tone
OHCA (or Call
Waiting tone)
Whisper OHCA (or
Call Waiting tone)
The notification receiving methods (call waiting tone, OHCA, and Whisper OHCA) are available when the
called extension is having a conversation with another party. If the extension is not having a conversation
but is unavailable to receive the notification (dialing a number, for example), the calling extension will be
kept waiting until the called extension becomes available. Even while waiting, the calling extension will
hear a ringback tone.
If none of these methods of receiving notification (call waiting tone, OHCA, or Whisper OHCA) are set at
the called party, the caller will hear a reorder tone after trying to send a call waiting notification.
PC Programming Manual References
3.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type— Caller ID—Caller ID Signaling
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call
→ Automatic Call Waiting
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— Call Waiting—Automatic Call Waiting for Extension Call
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
Feature Manual References
3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
49
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
Operating Manual References
1.3.12 CALL WAITING FEATURES
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone
Description
When an extension user attempts to call a busy extension (i.e., an extension that is ringing or having a
conversation), a call waiting tone can be sent to the called extension to indicate another call is waiting.
Conditions
•
•
•
This feature functions only if the called extension has activated call waiting. If it is activated, the calling
extension will hear a ringback tone.
One of two call waiting tones can be selected (Tone 1 or Tone 2) through personal programming (Call
Waiting Tone Type Selection).
A PT user can hear different Call Waiting tones for CO line calls and intercom calls if "Tone 2" has been
selected through personal programming (Call Waiting Tone Type Selection). If "Tone 1" has been
selected, the same Call Waiting tone will be heard for both CO line calls and intercom calls.
All Call Waiting tone patterns have a default (® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Option 2— Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call
→Option 2— Automatic C. Waiting
→Option 4— Call Waiting Tone Type
Operating Manual References
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
3.1.2 Personal Programming
50
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
3.1.13 CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES
Description
This PBX provides features to support the use of cellular phones and other outside destinations with the PBX.
Calls can be forwarded from virtual PSs to outside destinations such as cellular phones, and then answered
as if the user was at an extension within the PBX.
The following features can be used with cellular phones and other outside extensions:
Feature
Outside Destinations in
Incoming Call Distribution
Group
Description & Reference
Up to 4 cellular phones can be assigned as members of an
Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group, and receive calls to the
group.
® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Cellular Phone XDP Parallel
Mode
A PT user can set up to 4 cellular phones to ring in parallel for
incoming calls.
® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
DISA Automatic Walking COS
Registered cellular phones are automatically recognized as PBX
extensions when calling through DISA.
® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Call Transfer From
Outside Destination
A cellular phone user who answers a CO line call forwarded from
the PBX using DISA can transfer that call to an extension within
the PBX. It is also possible to establish a Conference call, perform
Call Splitting, and page with a call on hold to transfer the call.
® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Conditions
•
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this
feature.
Feature Manual References
19.1.2 Virtual PS
3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
Description
Directs an incoming CO line call to a specific destination when the caller’s telephone number matches a number
in the System Speed Dialing Table. Each telephone number in this table can be assigned its own Calling Line
Identification (CLI) destination.
CLI distribution allows you to direct calls from specific people to specific destinations, and has many
applications. For example, you can program the PBX to automatically connect calls from priority clients to their
sales representatives, or automatically connect mobile phone calls from an executive to his or her assistant.
In order for CLI distribution to function, the PBX must receive Caller ID information from the telephone company.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
51
3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
CLI distribution works in conjunction with both Direct In Line (DIL) and Direct Inward Dialing (DID) distribution;
it can be enabled or disabled for each CO line (for DIL) and for each DID number, for each time mode.
When a call has Caller ID information and CLI distribution is enabled for the current time mode, CLI distribution
will direct the call to its destination, ignoring preprogrammed DIL or DID destinations.
[Programming Example: System Speed Dialing Table]
*1
*2
*3
Location
(System Speed
Dialing No.)
System Speed
Dialing Name*1
Telephone No.*2
CLI Destination*3
000
ABC Company
912125551234
200
001
XYZ Company
913135551234
300
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— Name
® [001] System Speed Dialing Number
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
® [002] System Speed Dialing Name
® 8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial— CLI Destination
In this example:
If the caller’s telephone number is "1-212-555-1234":
1. The PBX looks for the number in the System Speed Dialing Table. (The CO Line Access number, "9", is
disregarded.) The number is found in location 000.
2. If CLI distribution is enabled in the current time mode for the DID number or for the CO line carrying the
call (for DIL distribution), the call is routed to its CLI destination, extension 200.
Conditions
•
If Automatic Caller ID Modification is used:
Store the modified number in the System Speed Dialing Table.
PC Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ Name
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ CLI Destination
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
12.3 [10-3] DID Table— CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
PT Programming Manual References
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
Feature Manual References
3.1.3 Caller ID
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
52
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Description
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when an extension user makes a call.
The called party can see the number on his telephone display before answering the call.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP):
The PBX sends a preprogrammed telephone number to the network when the extension user answers an
incoming call. The caller can see the number of the answering party on his telephone display when the call is
answered.
[CLIP Example]
1) Dials
"87654321".
2) "12345678"
is displayed.
PBX
ISDN
Caller
CLIP No.: 12345678
Called party
CLIP No.: 87654321
[COLP Example]
1) Dials
"111222333".
PBX
ISDN
Caller
3) "111222444"
is displayed.
Called party
(CLIP/COLP No.:
111222333)
FWD, IRNA, etc.
Answering party
(CLIP/COLP No.:
111222444)
2) Answers the call.
CLIP/COLP Number:
The telephone numbers sent to the network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned as follows:
• CLIP/COLP number for each ISDN port (subscriber’s number).
• CLIP/COLP number for each extension.
• CLIP/COLP number for each incoming call distribution group.
Each extension can select either the CLIP/COLP number for the ISDN port or the extension to be used. The
CLIP/COLP number for the ICD group is used when making a call by pressing the ICD Group button or receiving
a call which arrives at the ICD Group button.
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) and Connected Line Identification Restriction
(COLR)
It is possible for each extension to prevent the sending of its telephone number to the network by pressing the
CLIR button, COLR button or entering the feature number.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
53
3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
The availability of this feature is dependent on the contract with the telephone company.
The CLIP/COLP number for the connected ISDN port can be used for the ISDN terminal devices which
cannot be assigned their own CLIP/COLP number, such as a doorphone.
COLP/CLIR/COLR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN port of the PBX.
CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by
pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customized as the CLIR or COLR button.
The CLIP/COLP number must match the telephone number provided by the telephone company.
Otherwise it will be ignored or replaced by another number.
When using a private network, the extension number assigned for each extension through system
programming is sent for CLIP/COLP. (® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification
Presentation))
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
→CO Setting— Subscriber Number
→Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,
CCBS, E911
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Subscriber Number
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ COLR Set / Cancel
→ CLIR Set / Cancel
→ Switch CLIP of CO Line / Extension
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held
Party)
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— CLIP on G-DN Button
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Main— Extension Number
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
→ISDN CLIP— CLIR
→ISDN CLIP— COLR
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP ID
→ISDN CLIP— CLIP on Extension/CO
→ISDN CLIP— CLIR
→ISDN CLIP— COLR
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
PT Programming Manual References
[003] Extension Number
[606] CLIP Number
54
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.52 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
1.3.53 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction)
1.3.55 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction)
3.1.16 CO Line Access
Description
There are three methods of accessing a CO line.
Method
Description
Operation
Idle Line Access (Local
Access)
Selects an idle CO line
automatically from the assigned
trunk groups.
Dial the Idle Line Access number or
press a L-CO button.
Trunk Group Access
Selects an idle CO line from the
corresponding trunk group.
Dial the Trunk Group Access number
and a trunk group number, or press a
G-CO button.
S-CO Line Access
Selects the desired CO line
directly.
Dial the S-CO Line Access number
and the CO line number, or press the
S-CO button.
Conditions
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the trunk groups available for making calls.
CO Line numbers can be referred on a CO line port basis.
Button Assignment
A flexible button can be customized as a G-CO, L-CO, or S-CO button as follows:
Type
Assignable parameter
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Any trunk group that is made available for Idle Line Access through
system programming is applied.
Group-CO (G-CO)
A trunk group is assigned.
Single-CO (S-CO)
A specified CO line is assigned.
It is possible to assign:
– the same CO line to the S-CO button and to a G-CO button.
– the same trunk group to more than one G-CO button.
– more than one L-CO button.
•
Dialing the CO Line Access number selects a CO button according to the following priority: S-CO ® G-CO
® L-CO
Direct CO Line Access
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
55
3.1.16 CO Line Access
•
•
•
•
If an extension user is on-hook when pressing an idle CO button, the proprietary telephone (PT)
automatically enables hands-free operation mode. The user can dial without lifting the handset or pressing
the SP-PHONE button or MONITOR button.
Group Hunting Order for Idle Line Access
An idle CO line is selected from the trunk groups assigned for Idle Line Access. If multiple trunk groups
are available, the trunk group hunting sequence can be determined through system programming.
CO Line Hunting Order for Idle Line Access and Trunk Group Access
The CO line hunting sequence in a trunk group (from lowest numbered CO line, from highest numbered
CO line or rotation) can be determined through system programming.
A company name or customer name can be assigned on a CO line port basis so that the operator or
extension user who is answering the call can view the destination which the caller is trying to reach before
answering. This is useful, for example, when multiple companies share the same operator.
It is possible to identify the CO line port that has a CO line connected to it. This prevents extension users
from originating a call to a CO line which is not connected.
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Connection
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Connection
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port— Connection
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Connection
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)
→ Trunk Group Access
→ Single CO Line Access
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Single CO)
→ Parameter Selection (for Group CO)
10.1 [8-1] System Setting— ARS Mode
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name
PT Programming Manual References
[400] LCOT CO Line Connection
[401] LCOT CO Line Name
[409] LCOT CO Line Number Reference
[500] Trunk Group Number
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
56
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
Description
CO line calls are limited by the following features:
Feature
Description
Extension-to-CO Line Call
Duration
If a call between an extension user and an outside party is
established, the call duration can be restricted by the system timer
selected for each trunk group. Both parties will hear warning tones at
five-second intervals starting 15 seconds before the time limit. When
the time limit expires, the line will be disconnected. COS
programming determines whether this feature is enabled or disabled.
Whether this feature applies to outgoing calls only, or to both outgoing
and incoming calls is determined through system programming.
CO-to-CO Line Call (except
Unattended Conference Call)
Duration
If a call between two outside parties is established, the call duration
can be restricted by the system timer selected for each trunk group.
Both parties will hear warning tones at five-second intervals starting
15 seconds before the time limit. When the time limit expires, the line
will be disconnected.
If both parties involved in the CO-to-CO line call were established by
an extension (e.g., an extension makes a CO line call, then transfers
the call to an outside party), the time limit applied to the CO line call
that was made first will be used.
Dialing Digit Restriction
during Conversation
While engaged in an incoming CO line call, the dialing of digits can
be restricted. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limitation, the
line will be disconnected.
Conditions
•
•
During an Unattended Conference Call, the Unattended Conference Recall time is applied. (®
3.1.18 Conference)
When using LCO lines that do not support Calling Party Control (CPC) signal detection (® 3.1.22 CPC
(Calling Party Control) Signal Detection), the CO-to-CO Line Call Duration timer should not be disabled,
as automatic end of call detection cannot be performed.
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
57
3.1.18 Conference
PT Programming Manual References
[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration
[502] CO Line Call Duration Limitation
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
3.1.18 Conference
Description
An extension user can establish a conference call by adding additional parties to an already existing two-party
conversation. This PBX supports three-party through eight-party conference calls. Conferences with more than
four parties are only possible when a PT or PS user originates the conference.
Unattended Conference:
The conference originator can leave the conference and allow other parties to continue. Establishing an
Unattended Conference allows the originator to return to the conference. Unattended Conferences can only
be established by PT and PS users.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
When an extension is establishing a conference call the original party is put on hold.
CONF (Conference) Button
For a PT/PS which does not have the CONF button, a flexible button can be customized as the Conference
button.
Unattended Conference Call Duration
The length of time that a conference call can remain unattended is restricted by the following timers:
– Callback Start Timer
– Warning Tone Start Timer
– Disconnect Timer
These timers behave and operate according to the following chain of events:
1. When the unattended conference is established, the Callback Start Timer will begin.
2. When the Callback Start timer expires, the Unattended Conference originator’s extension will start to
receive a callback ringing from the PBX and the Warning Tone Start Timer begins.
3. When the Warning Tone Start Timer expires, the remaining parties of the conference will start to hear
a warning tone, the callback ringing will continue to be heard at the Unattended Conference
originator’s extension, and the Disconnect Timer begins.
4. When the disconnect Timer expires, the conference is disconnected.
If the Unattended Conference originator returns to the conference before the line is disconnected, all timers
are cleared.
For a Conference With Six or More Parties
The ECHO card is required. Also the echo canceling function should be enabled through system
programming.
Installation Manual References
3.7.4 ECHO16 Card (KX-TDA0166)
58
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ Unattended Conference—Recall Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Warning Tone Start Timer
→ Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Transfer to CO
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Echo Cancel—Conference
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.15 Conference
3.1.19 Confirmation Tone
Description
At the end of feature operations, the PBX confirms the success of the operation by sending a confirmation tone
to extension users.
Type
Tone 1
Description
a. Sent when the setting is accepted.
b. Sent when a call is received in voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—
Ring/Voice). The caller’s voice will be heard after the tone.
Tone 2
a. Sent from an external paging device or an extension before being paged.
b. Sent when a call is received while an extension is in Hands-free
Answerback mode.
Tone 3-1
a. Sent before a conversation is established when using the Paging feature.
b. Sent to the caller when a conversation is established with an extension in
one of the following modes:
• Hands-free Answerback mode
• Voice-calling mode (Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice)
c. Sent when making a call to or from a doorphone.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
59
3.1.20 Consultation Hold
Type
Description
Tone 3-2
Sent before a conversation is established when accessing the following
features by the feature numbers:
• Call Park Retrieve
• Call Pickup
• Hold Retrieve
• Paging Answer
• Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
Tone 4-1
Sent when a call changes from a two-party call to a three-party call (e.g.,
Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Record).
Tone 4-2
Sent when a call changes from a three-party call to a two-party call (e.g.,
Executive Busy Override, Conference, Privacy Release, Two-way Record).
Tone 5
Sent when a call is placed on hold (including a consultation hold).
Conditions
•
•
Confirmation Tone Patterns
All confirmation tone patterns have a default (® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
It is possible to eliminate each tone.
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-1 : Start Talking after Making Call / Call from Doorphone
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after Answering Call
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-1 : Start Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 4-2 : Finish Conference
→ Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold
3.1.20 Consultation Hold
Description
Consultation Hold is a condition that a party is in, when an extension is calling other parties in order to perform
Call Transfer, Conference, or Call Splitting. When the operation is completed or canceled, the consultation
hold is released.
In Consultation Hold, the original call is treated as if it is on hold, allowing the extension to call a third party all
on one line. In Call Hold, the party on hold and the third party are connected to the extension using separate
lines.
Feature Manual References
3.1.9 Call Splitting
3.1.10 Call Transfer
3.1.18 Conference
60
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Description
Each extension must belong to a Class of Service (COS). By assigning certain extensions to a COS, it is
possible to control the behavior and privileges of extension users (allowing or denying certain extensions
access to various features, extensions, and CO lines) depending on the duties appointed to them.
Many extensions can belong to the same COS by assigning each extension the same COS number, allowing
the same restrictions and privileges to apply to a group of extensions.
The following features are controlled on a COS basis:
a. ® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block
b. ® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
c. ® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)—DND Override
d. ® 3.1.8 Call Pickup
e. ® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry
f. ® 3.1.16 CO Line Access
g. ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
h. ® 3.1.6 Call Monitor
i. ® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
j. ® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
k. ® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
l. ® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
m. ® 20.1.1 Walking COS
n. ® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation
o. ® 3.1.10 Call Transfer
p. ® 4.1.11 Door Open
q. ® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
r. ® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
s. ® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)—SMDR for Outgoing CO Line Calls
t. ® 17.1.5 Time Service—Time Service Switching
u. ® 11.1.1 Manager Features
v. ® 13.1.30 PT Programming
w. ® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension—SDN Key
mode, SDN Walking COS, and assigning SDN buttons through PT programming
Conditions
•
Walking COS
Extension users can make a call from extensions of a less-privileged COS by using their own COS
temporarily. (® 20.1.1 Walking COS)
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
PT Programming Manual References
2.1.8 COS Programming
[602] Class of Service
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
61
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
3.1.22 CPC (Calling Party Control) Signal Detection
Description
The Calling Party Control (CPC) signal is an on-hook indication (disconnect signal) sent from an analog CO
line when the other party hangs up. To maintain efficient utilization of CO lines, the PBX monitors each line’s
status and when CPC signal is detected on a line, the PBX disconnects the line and alerts the extension with
a reorder tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
CPC signal detection is programmable for incoming CO line calls, and for outgoing CO line calls.
If your telephone company sends signals similar to CPC, it is recommended not to enable CPC signal
detection on outgoing CO line calls.
If CPC signal is detected during a conference call (® 3.1.18 Conference), the line is disconnected. The
remaining parties stay connected.
If CPC signal is detected during a call between a caller using the Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
feature (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)) and an extension or an outside party, the line is
disconnected.
PC Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
→ CPC Signal Detection (DID)—Outgoing, Incoming
→ CPC Signal Detection (LCO/GCO)—Outgoing, Incoming
PT Programming Manual References
[413] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing
[414] LCOT CPC Signal Detection Time—Incoming
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
Description
The PBX supports a CTI interface using the LAN port of the IPCMPR card. The CTI interface allows extension
users to make or receive calls with advanced features:
– Extension users can make calls easily from a phone book in their PC.
– When an extension user receives an incoming call, detailed caller information can be displayed on the PC
automatically.
62
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
A PC and CTI server application software, such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA), are required to
use CTI features. The PC running the application monitors the status of the PBX and controls the PBX via the
CTI Server.
PBX
CTI Server
LAN
IPCMPR
Card
PC
PC
LAN
Conditions
•
•
•
CTI application software must be installed on the connected PC. In addition, some features may require a
KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version).
CTI Call control is not supported for SIP extensions. For example, a SIP extension user cannot make or
transfer a call using a CTI application.
Application Programming Interface (API)/Protocol
Type
Third Party Call Control
•
•
API/Protocol
•
•
ECMA CSTA Phase 3
TAPI 2.1
A KX-NCP Series PBX can connect to one CTI server only.
For details about specific CTI features, refer to the manual for your CTI application software.
Installation Manual References
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 6 (CTI)
Document Version 2009-12
Dial Information (CTI)
Feature Manual
63
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
64
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 4
Features and Configurations—D
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
65
4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection
4.1 D
4.1.1 Data Line Security
Description
Once Data Line Security is set on an extension, communication between the extension and the other party is
protected from signals such as Call Waiting, Hold Recall and Executive Busy Override. Extensions which have
devices connected to them such as modems or fax machines may set this feature to maintain secure data
transmission, by blocking tones or other interruptions during communication.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Data Line Security Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2— Data Mode
Operating Manual References
1.3.17 Data Line Security
4.1.2 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) Assignment
Description
It is possible to assign this PBX as a DHCP client, allowing IP addresses to be received from a DHCP server
over a LAN.
Conditions
•
It is possible to enable this feature through system programming.
Notice
It is important to set your DHCP server to not change the IP addresses of the IPCMPR and DSP cards
once IP telephones are registered to the PBX. The IP telephones will not operate properly if these IP
addresses are changed.
PC Programming Manual References
3.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IPCMPR—LAN Setting
→ DHCP Client
→ IP Address for IPCMPR Card
→ IP Address for VoIP-DSP
4.1.3 Dial Mode Selection
Description
The dialing mode (rotary or tone) can be selected for each analog CO line through system programming
regardless of the originating extension (under contract with the telephone company).
66
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Mode
Description
DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi-Frequency)
Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line
using analog tones.
Pulse Dial (Rotary)
Numbers dialed by an extension user are transmitted to the CO line
using analog pulses.
Conditions
•
•
•
Pulse to Tone Conversion
It is possible for an extension user to temporarily switch from Pulse mode to DTMF mode in order to access
special services such as computer-accessed long distance calling or voice mail services. To switch to
DTMF mode, wait for a preprogrammed time period (Default: 5 seconds) after the CO line is connected,
or press . This feature works only on CO lines set to Pulse mode. DTMF mode cannot be changed to
Pulse mode.
It is possible to select a pulse rate for the CO line port which has been set to Pulse mode. There are two
pulse rates: Low (10 pps) and High (20 pps).
It is possible to assign the minimum duration of the DTMF signal sent to the CO line port which has been
set to DTMF mode.
PC Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port
→ Dialing Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ Pulse Speed
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
→ CO Dial Mode
→ DTMF Width
→ CO Pulse Speed
PT Programming Manual References
[410] LCOT Dialing Mode
[411] LCOT Pulse Rate
[412] LCOT DTMF Minimum Duration
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Description
The following dial tones inform extension users about features activated on their extensions:
Each dial tone type has two frequencies, such as dial tone 1A and dial tone 1B.
Type
Tone 1A/1B
Document Version 2009-12
Description
A normal dial tone is heard when:
a. No features listed for dial tones 2 through 4 has been set, or
b. Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is used.
Feature Manual
67
4.1.4 Dial Tone
Type
*1
Description
Tone 2A/2B
This tone is heard when:
• There are messages that have previously been listened to and no new
messages recorded by the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature.*1
• Any of the features below are set.
• Absent Message
• BGM
• Call Forwarding (FWD)
• Call Pickup Deny
• Call Waiting
• Do Not Disturb (DND)
• Extension Dial Lock
• Executive Busy Override Deny
• Hot Line
• Timed Reminder
Tone 3A/3B
This tone is heard when:
• A called PS is being searched for.
• The recording time used by the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature
reaches the limit.*1
• Any of the features below are performed.
• Account Code Entry
• Consultation Hold
• Answering a Timed Reminder call with no message
Tone 4A/4B
This tone is heard when new messages have been recorded for the
extension.
Active even when distinctive dial tones are disabled.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Dial Tone Type A/B
Through system programming, it is possible to select dial tone type A or B for dial tones 1 through 4.
If "Type A" is selected, all dial tones 1 through 4 will become dial tone type A.
The dial tone type for the ARS feature can be selected separately. If "Type A" is selected for ARS, dial
tone 1A will be heard. If "Type B" is selected, dial tone 1B will be heard.
Distinctive Dial tone
Distinctive dial tones can be disabled. When disabled, dial tone 1 will be heard in all cases except those
marked with "*1" in the table above.
Dial Tone Patterns
All dial tone patterns have a default (® 21.2 Tones/Ring Tones).
Only dial tone 1 is sent to the extensions in a VM (DPT/DTMF) group. (® 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3
→ Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for Extension
→ Dial Tone—Dial Tone for ARS
68
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer
4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer
Description
An extension assigned as the manager can change the TRS level (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) for an
extension user temporarily. After that, the extension user can make his call.
[Example]
A hotel guest calls the front desk and asks for the telephone’s toll restriction to be lifted in order to make an
international call.
(3) Make a CO line call
(2) Change
TRS level
Toll Restriction
button
(1) Call
Guest Room
(CO line call
restricted)
Front Desk
(Extension assigned
as a manager)
Conditions
•
•
The modified TRS level only applies to the next one call placed at the user’s extension.
Toll Restriction Button
A manager extension must store the TRS level granted by the Dial Tone Transfer beforehand, when
assigning a flexible button as the Toll Restriction button.
PC Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
2.1.1 Dial Tone Transfer
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
69
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
Description
Directs a call on a public CO line assigned as a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) line to a preprogrammed destination
according to the call’s DID number, which is based on the telephone number dialed by the caller. When a call
reaches its destination via DID distribution, the DID name will be displayed on the proprietary telephone (PT),
allowing extension users to easily see whom a call is directed to. Each DID number has a destination for each
time mode.
DID distribution allows you to use your telephone numbers for specific purposes. For example, you can direct
calls from customers’ fax machines to your office fax machine automatically, or allow your overseas customers
to be automatically connected to specific operators. Incoming calls with DID numbers that match extension
numbers at this PBX will be sent to the corresponding extension. Incoming calls with DID numbers that match
extensions at other PBXs or CO line access numbers will be sent to the corresponding TIE line or CO line.
[Method Flowchart]
A CO line call is received on a DID line.
Is the DID number found in
the DID Table?
No
Yes
Does the DID
number match an
extension number?
Does the call have Caller ID
information and is CLI distribution
enabled for the DID number in the
current time mode?
Yes
No
No
The call is routed
to the extension.
Yes
Yes
Does the DID
number match an extension
number at another PBX or CO
Line Access no.?
Has the caller
been stored in the System Speed
Dialing Table and has a CLI destination
been assigned?
Yes
No
No
Is a DID destination assigned
for the current time mode?
No
The call is routed
to the TIE line or
CO line.
Yes
The call is routed to its
CLI destination.
70
Feature Manual
The call is routed to the
DID destination.
The call is routed to an
operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
[Programming Example: DID Table]
Location DID No.*1
*1
*2
*3
*4
DID
Name*2
CLI Distribution*3
Day
Lunch
Break
DID Destination*4
Night
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
1
123-4567
Sales
Enable Disable Enable Disable
105
100
105
100
2
123-2468
Judy
Enable Disable Disable Disable
102
100
102
100
® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—
® [451] DID Number
® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—
® [452] DID Name
® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—
® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table—
® [453] DID Destination
DID Number
DID Name
CLI Ring for DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
In this example:
If the DID number is "123-4567":
1. The PBX looks for the DID number in the table and finds it in location 1.
2. The PBX checks the time mode.
In day mode: Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is enabled. The call is routed to its CLI destination,
if assigned. If not assigned, the call is routed to the DID destination, extension 105, and "Sales" is displayed.
In lunch mode: CLI distribution is disabled. The call is routed to the DID destination, extension 100,
and "Sales" is displayed.
Note
Tenant numbers and VM trunk group numbers (not shown here) can also be programmed in the DID
Table.
The tenant number programmed here is used only to determine the Time Table used by each DID number;
selecting tenant 3 means the DID number will use Time Table 3, for example. The VM trunk group number
set here is used to determine the Incoming Call Service and greeting message used by the Voice
Processing System (VPS) during the current time mode. (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
Conditions
•
To use this feature, DID must be assigned as the distribution method for the desired CO line port.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DID/TIE
→ Distribution Method
→ DID/TIE—Remove Digit
→ DID/TIE—Additional Dial
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
PT Programming Manual References
[451] DID Number
[452] DID Name
[453] DID Destination
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
71
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.5 Time Service
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
Description
Directs an incoming public CO line call to a preprogrammed destination based on the CO line carrying the call.
Each CO line has a destination for each time mode.
[Method Flowchart]
A CO line call is received.
Does the call have
Caller ID information and is CLI
distribution enabled for the CO line in
the current time mode?
No
Yes
Yes
Has the caller
been stored in the System Speed
Dialing Table and has a CLI destination
been assigned?
No
Is a DIL destination assigned
for the current time mode?
No
Yes
The call is routed to its
CLI destination.
72
Feature Manual
The call is routed to the
DIL destination.
The call is routed to an
operator (Intercept
Routing—No Destination).
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
[Programming Example: DIL Table]
The table can be programmed for each CO line.
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
*1
CLI Distribution
Day
Lunch
Break
DIL Destination*1
Night
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
01
Enable Disable Enable Disable
101
100
101
100
02
Enable Disable Disable Disable
102
100
102
100
® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL—
® [450] DIL 1:1 Destination
DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
In this example:
If a CO line call is received on CO line 01:
In day mode: Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is enabled. The call is routed to its CLI destination, if
assigned. If not assigned, the call is routed to the Direct In Line (DIL) destination, extension 101.
In lunch mode: CLI distribution is disabled. The call is routed to the DIL destination, extension 100.
Note
Tenant numbers and VM trunk group numbers (not shown here) can also be programmed in the DIL
Table.
The tenant number programmed here is used only to determine the Time Table used by each CO line;
selecting tenant 3 means the CO line will use Time Table 3, for example. The VM trunk group number set
here is used to determine the Incoming Call Service and greeting message used by the Voice Processing
System (VPS) during the current time mode. (19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
Conditions
•
To use this feature, DIL must be assigned as the distribution method for the desired CO line port.
PC Programming Manual References
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→ DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group No.
PT Programming Manual References
[450] DIL 1:1 Destination
Feature Manual References
3.1.14 CLI (Calling Line Identification) Distribution
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
17.1.5 Time Service
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
73
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Description
An outside caller can access specific PBX features as if the caller is an SLT extension user in the PBX, when
the incoming call destination is a DISA floating extension number assigned to each DISA message. The caller
can have direct access to features such as:
• Placing an intercom call to an extension, operator or any floating extensions (e.g., modem for remote
system administration, an external pager for TAFAS).
• Calling an outside party via the PBX.
• Operating some PBX remote features (e.g., FWD).
74
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
[Flowchart]
A DISA call from an outside party is received.
No
Is there a port available?
Yes
The call is routed to an operator,
etc. (DISA Intercept when All
DISA Ports are busy)
(DISA Delayed
Answer time expires)
The PBX answers the call.
(DISA Mute & OGM Start Time
after Answering expires)
A
The OGM plays and the PBX starts to
receive the DTMF signaling.
F
No
Is the first digit dialed?
(DISA First Digit Time
When No Dial expires)
What method is assigned for
DISA Intercept Routing No Dial?
Operator
The call is routed to an
operator.
Yes
Disable
The call is
disconnected.
AA-0, AA-9
The call is redirected to
the destination assigned
to AA-0 or AA-9.
The OGM stops.
C
C
No
Is a second digit dialed?
(DISA Second Digit Time for
Automated Attendant expires)
Yes
No
The PBX receives the dialed
digits and checks the dialed
number.
Is the first dialed digit assigned a
destination for the DISA AA service?
Yes
The call is routed to the destination.
What is the DISA security mode?
Continued on next page
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
75
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Continued from previous page
No Security
CO Line Security
B
All Security
Is the dialed number
an extension number or
floating extension number?
No
Yes
Is the Walking COS/Verification
Code Entry feature number dialed?
C
What is the dialed number?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the correct
PIN entered?
Extension No./
Floating
Extension No.
Feature No.*
(Absent Message,
FWD, etc.)
CO Line Access No.
+ Telephone No.
The feature is set.
Other
No
D
B
Reorder tone
D
The dialed number is sent to the CO line.
C
Does the caller press
while hearing the reorder
tone (Call Retry)?
No
Is the extension
in DND mode?
Is the extension
busy?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
(DISA Reorder
Tone time
expires)
A
No
E
The call is directed to the extension.
The caller hears a ringback tone.
Is Call Waiting
mode on?
No
The call is disconnected.
Yes
No
Does the caller press
while hearing a ringback
tone (Call Retry)?
E
Yes
Does the
destination
answer
the call?
A
No
Yes
The call is established.
(DISA Intercept
time expires)
The call is routed to the
intercept destination.
(DISA Intercept Routing
No Answer)
G
Does the destination
answer the call?
Yes
Continued on next page
The call is established.
No
(DISA Disconnect
Time after
Intercept expires)
The call is disconnected.
Continued on next page
* Feature numbers are available only when the Walking COS feature is used.
76
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Continued from previous page
Continued from previous page
What method is assigned
for DISA Intercept
Routing DND?
Intercept Routing
No
Is an Intercept
Routing Busy destination
assigned?
Busy tone
press
(Busy Tone /
DND Tone
Continuation
time expires)
OGM
Does the caller
while hearing a busy
tone (Call Retry)?
Yes
The call is routed to
the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing Busy)
No
Is a DISA Busy
Message assigned?
No
G
Yes
The call is disconnected.
The message for
the DND mode is
sent to the caller.
A
The call is routed to
the intercept destination.
(Intercept Routing DND)
Yes
The message for
busy is sent to the
caller.
F
G
Busy tone
F
No
press
(Busy Tone /
DND Tone
Continuation
time expires)
The call is disconnected.
Does the caller
while hearing a busy
tone (Call Retry)?
Yes
A
DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial
If the caller fails to dial any digits within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 1st Dial Time for Intercept) after
hearing the outgoing message (OGM), one of the following can be selected through system programming:
a. Disable: The call will be terminated.
b. Operator: The call will be redirected to the operator.
c. AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the destination assigned to that AA number.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
® [211] DISA Intercept Time
® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after
DISA answers
DISA Built-in Automated Attendant Number (DISA AA Service)
After listening to the outgoing message (OGM), the caller may dial a single digit (DISA AA number). The
destination for each DISA AA number can be assigned for each message. It is also possible to assign other
DISA floating extension numbers as the destination (Multistep DISA AA Service).
If the caller dials a second digit within a preprogrammed time period (DISA 2nd Dial Time for AA), the DISA
AA service is not employed.
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
Outgoing Message (OGM)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, a prerecorded DISA message will greet and guide the caller.
Any extension assigned as the manager can record outgoing messages (OGMs). (® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing
Message))
[Programming Example]
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
77
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
*1
*2
*3
Outgoing
Message
(OGM) No.
Floating
Extn. No.*1
01
501
02
502
:
:
Automated Attendant No.*2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0
30
1
20
0
10
3
20
2
10
1
10
2
40
0
10
4
20
5
Busy/DND
Message
No.*3
04
05
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number
® [730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— 1 Digit AA Destination (Extension Number)—Dial 0–9
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Busy / DND Message No.
DISA Security Mode and Available Features
If the DISA AA service is not employed, the caller may access the PBX features by entering the feature
numbers. To prevent others from accessing the PBX features, it is possible to assign DISA security.
® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Security—DISA Security Mode
® [732] DISA Security Mode
The features available depend on the preprogrammed DISA security mode as follows:
Security Mode
Intercom
Call
TIE Line Call
CO Line Call
Without PBX Code
With PBX Code
All Security
CO Line Security
ü
ü
No Security
ü
ü
ü
ü*1
ü: Available
*1
If CO line call is available, Account Code Entry (® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry) is also available.
Note
DISA AA service and Operator Call (® 12.1.5 Operator Features) are available for any security mode.
Security Mode Override by Verification Code Entry
If the caller performs Verification Code Entry (® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry) while hearing a DISA
message, the security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode.
Entry method:
Verification Code Entry feature number + + verification code + verification code PIN
After changing mode, the new mode remains in force for the duration of the call.
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy
If the first destination called by the outside party is busy, the call is redirected as follows:
a. The call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned to the first destination.
b. If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not assigned to the first destination and a prerecorded DISA
Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear the DISA Busy Message.
c. If neither an intercept destination nor a DISA Busy Message is assigned, the caller will hear a busy tone.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
Called Party is Busy
78
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
DISA Intercept Routing—DND
If the destination called by the outside party is in DND mode and Idle Extension Hunting is not available, one
of the following can be selected through system programming:
a. Busy Tone: The caller will hear a busy tone.
b. Enable: DND will redirect the call to the preprogrammed destination on an extension basis.
c. OGM: An outgoing message (OGM) will be sent to the caller. The message for DND mode can be assigned
for each outgoing message (OGM) which has a DISA floating extension number.
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System— DISA Intercept—Intercept when destination through DISA sets
DND
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer
If a destination is not available to answer a DISA call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA Intercept time)
after the call is reached, the call will be redirected to the programmed destination by the Intercept feature.
If the intercept destination is not available to answer the call within a preprogrammed time period (DISA
Disconnect Time after Intercept) after the DISA Intercept time expires, the call will be disconnected.
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
® DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
® [604] Extension Intercept Destination
Walking COS Through DISA
If the caller performs Walking COS (extension number and PIN entry) while hearing a DISA message, the
security mode can be temporarily changed to No Security mode (® 20.1.1 Walking COS). After performing
Walking COS, the following features are available, using the settings of the specified extension:
• Intercom call
• TIE line call
• CO line call
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD
(Call Forwarding))
• Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
• Absent Message setting (® 1.1.1 Absent Message)
• Extension Dial Lock (® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)
• Time Service Switching Mode (® 17.1.5 Time Service)
Note
When making a CO line call using Walking COS through DISA, the CLIP number for that call will be
that of the extension seized by Walking COS. (® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation))
DISA Automatic Walking COS
Registered outside destinations such as cellular phones can be automatically recognized as PBX extensions
when calling through DISA. When the Caller ID of a received CO line call matches an entry in the System
Speed Dialing Table, the calling telephone is given Walking COS authorization as assigned to the
corresponding CLI destination extension. Therefore, the "CLI destination" setting in the System Speed Dialing
Table is used here to specify the target extension that the calling telephone will be recognized as for Walking
COS.
[Programming Example of DIL Table]
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
79
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
CLI
CO Line
No.
DIL Destination
Day
Lunch
...
Day
Lunch
...
01
Disable
Disable
...
501
(DISA)
501
(DISA)
...
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
"CLI" must be set to Disable, to allow incoming calls to be received by DISA.
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
→ DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
[Programming Example of System Speed Dialing Table]
Location
Name
CO Line Access +
Telephone Number
CLI Destination
000
J. Smith
912341115678
200
001
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→
CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→
CLI Destination
In this example, calls received on CO line 01 are routed to the DISA OGM with floating extension number 501.
If the number of the received call (after modification according to the Caller ID table) is "1-234-111-5678", the
call originator is recognized as extension 200, and the Walking COS feature is automatically activated.
System programming is required to enable this feature.
SMDR
The call information for DISA is recorded as the one of the DISA floating extension numbers. (® 16.1.3 SMDR
(Station Message Detail Recording))
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made using the CO-to-CO Line Call feature of DISA.
The cost of such calls will be billed to the owner/renter of the PBX.
To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Enabling DISA security (CO Line Security or All Security).
b. Keeping passwords (verification code PINs/extension PINs) secret.
c. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
d. Changing PINs regularly.
•
•
•
80
This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR card. To increase the capacity of the feature it is
possible to add an MSG4 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
DISA Delayed Answer Time
It is possible to set the Delayed Answer time so that the caller will hear a ringback tone within a
preprogrammed time period first before hearing an outgoing message (OGM).
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Hold Recall
[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
Call Retry
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
•
•
•
•
•
While hearing a ringback, reorder, or busy tone, retrying the call is possible by pressing " ". System
programming selects whether pressing " " during a CO-to-CO line conversation returns to the DISA top
menu or sends a DTMF tone.
DISA Mute Time
It is possible to set the Mute time until the outgoing message (OGM) plays and the PBX starts to receive
the DTMF signaling after the caller reaches the DISA line.
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after
answering
End of Call Detection
If a call through DISA is routed to a CO line, DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. This function
can be disabled through system programming. If disabled, DISA is released when the CO-to-CO line
connection is made.
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO
→
→
CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Private Network
The following three types of tone detection can be enabled for each trunk group to disconnect a CO-to-CO
line call via DISA.
– Silence Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→ [475] DISA Silence Detection
– Continuous Signal Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→ [476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
– Cyclic Signal Detection
→ 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection— DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
→ [477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration Limitation
For a call between two outside parties, even if end of call detection cannot be performed, the call can be
disconnected by a system timer (® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation). If the timer expires, the line will be
disconnected unless the originating caller extends the time by sending any DTMF signaling. The caller can
prolong the call duration within the preprogrammed time period and preprogrammed number of times.
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→
→
DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
® [210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time
Automatic DISA Activation
DISA can be set through system programming to automatically activate for the following types of CO-to-CO
line calls, to enable detection of the end of the call.
– When a CO line call is forwarded to another CO line
– When a CO line call is transferred to another CO line
– When a CO line call to an incoming call distribution group is answered by an outside destination
member
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO
→
→
CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Private Network
Before the call is made, the PBX confirms that a DISA port is available. If no DISA ports are available, the
call is not routed to a CO line. For transferred calls or calls to an ICD Group, if the DISA port has become
unavailable when the CO-to-CO line conversation is actually established, the call is established without
DISA.
When using this feature, the CO-to-CO Line Call Limitation timer should be enabled. In addition, prolonging
the call through DTMF signaling is not available.
DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
81
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
•
•
•
•
•
An outside party such as a cellular phone can transfer a CO line call to an extension at the PBX by
pressing "#" + extension number, if DISA is connected by the Automatic DISA Activation feature. This
feature can be enabled or disabled through system programming.
It is also possible to establish a Conference call (® 3.1.18 Conference), perform Call Splitting (® 3.1.9 Call
Splitting), and page with a call on hold to transfer the call (® 13.1.1 Paging).
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1
→
CO-CO with DISA—Transfer by DTMF "#" (Activation Key Required)
→
CO-CO with DISA—Return to DISA Top Menu by DTMF "*"
– The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this
feature.
– DISA security mode should be set to No Security or CO Line Security.
– If the called extension does not answer, is busy, or is in DND mode, the DISA Intercept feature operates.
– The party on hold can use the Call Retry feature.
– End of Call Detection does not operate after dialing "#".
– Calls can only be transferred to extensions (not including floating extensions) within the PBX. If the
transferred call is forwarded to another outside destination, COS settings are ignored.
– If the call is transferred to an ICD group, the call will wait in a queue until answered, but the Queuing
Time Table will not function.
– When using this feature, do not use the Executive Busy Override feature to interrupt the established
call.
DISA Reorder Tone Duration
It is possible to set the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time. This specifies the length of time that a reorder
tone will be sent to the caller. When the timer expires, the call will be disconnected. Call Retry is possible
during the DISA Reorder Tone Duration time.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
Call Deny
Extensions can deny DISA calls on a COS basis.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call
from DISA
Verification Code PIN Lock/Extension PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a
preprogrammed number of times successively, that extension or verification code will become locked, and
even entering the correct PIN will not unlock it. Only an extension assigned as the manager can unlock it.
In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
DISA Automatic Walking COS
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this
feature.
Each outgoing message (OGM) can be assigned a name through system programming for programming
reference.
® 7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Name
® [731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
Installation Manual References
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.5 MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)
3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
82
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
→ DISA—Delayed Answer Timer
→ DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after answering
→ DISA—No Dial Intercept Timer
→ DISA—2nd Dial Timer for AA
→ DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA—Disconnect Timer after Intercept
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter
→ DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Time
→ DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time before Recording Message
→ DISA—Reorder Tone Duration
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept the Call from
DISA
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
→ DISA Tone Detection—Silence
→ DISA Tone Detection—Continuous
→ DISA Tone Detection—Cyclic
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Intercept Destination— Intercept Destination—When
called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
→ CLI Destination
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
→DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→CLI for DIL— CLI Ring for DIL—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
PT Programming Manual References
[209] DISA Delayed Answer Time
[210] DISA CO-to-CO Line Call Prolong Time
[211] DISA Intercept Time
[475] DISA Silence Detection
[476] DISA Continuous Signal Detection
[477] DISA Cyclic Signal Detection
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[732] DISA Security Mode
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
83
4.1.9 Display Information
Operating Manual References
1.3.18 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
1.3.73 Walking COS
4.1.9 Display Information
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) can relay the following information to the user while making or receiving
calls:
Display Item
Display Example
Condition
The extension number and name of the calling
or called extension, or Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD) Group
123: Tom Smith
–
Status of the called extension
123: Busy
–
The number and name of the optional device
D02: 1st Door
–
The telephone number dialed
1234567890
–
The received call information
a. Caller’s name
b. Caller’s number
c. CO line number/name
d. Original Destination, if the call is forwarded
e. DID name
ABC Company
12345678
Line 001: Sales
®102:Mike
Panasonic*
Duration of the current CO line call
Line 001 11:02’28
The first line message can
be either (a), (c), or (e) at
each extension through
system programming.
These can be displayed in
turn by pressing the
TRANSFER button or
DISP Soft button during a
call.
–
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Multilingual Display
Each extension can select its display language through personal programming (Display Language
Selection).
Display Contrast
The display contrast can be adjusted through personal programming (Display Contrast Selection). This is
available only for digital proprietary telephones (DPTs) and IP proprietary telephones (IP-PTs).
Display Backlight
Some extensions can select whether to turn the display backlight on or off through personal programming
(Display Backlight Selection). For details, refer to the manual for your telephone.
Characters (name) or digits (number) exceeding the display’s limitations are not displayed. Although in this
case information may not be displayed properly, the received information is not altered.
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 5— PT Feature Access—No. 1–8
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 5— Display Language
84
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
→Option 5— Incoming Call Display
→Option 5— Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Option 5— Display Language
→Option 5— Incoming Call Display
→Option 5— Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking
12.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings— CO Name
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
Description
An extension user can make use of the DND feature. If this feature is set, calls will not arrive at the extension,
but will arrive at another extension using the Idle Extension Hunting feature (® 9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting)
or the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature (® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing). When a destination cannot be
found, the calling extension will hear the DND tone, while the calling outside party will hear a busy tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DND for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls
The DND feature can be set for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both of them by the extension user.
DSS button in DND Mode
The DSS button light will turn red if the assigned extension has set DND.
DND Override
An extension in DND mode can be called by other extension users who are allowed to override DND in
their COS.
Paging DND
It is programmable whether the PBX pages extensions in DND mode through system programming. (®
13.1.1 Paging)
Intercept Routing—Busy/DND
If a call arrives at an extension in DND mode, the call can be redirected to a preprogrammed destination
by the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND feature.
Idle Extension Hunting
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has DND
set will be skipped. The call will go to the next extension in the group, not the Intercept Routing—Busy/
DND destination.
If (1) a CO line call via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card arrives at an extension in DND mode and (2)
the Intercept Routing—Busy/DND destination is not available and (3) there is no available extension in the
idle extension hunting group, then the original extension in DND mode will ring.
Calls from a doorphone arrive at the extension even when the extension is in DND mode.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Busy Tone / DND Tone
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— DND Override
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
85
4.1.11 Door Open
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
PT Programming Manual References
[507] DND Override
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.19 DND (Do Not Disturb)
4.1.11 Door Open
Description
Using an extension telephone, an extension user can unlock a door for a visitor.
The door can be unlocked by extension users who are allowed to unlock the door in Class of Service (COS)
programming. While engaged on a doorphone call, any extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in.
(® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call)
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied door opener installed on each door.
A door opener can unlock a door even if no doorphone is installed.
Door Open Duration
An opened door will remain unlocked for a preprogrammed length of time.
Installation Manual References
3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— Doorphone—Open Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Door Open
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Door Unlock
PT Programming Manual References
[207] Door Unlock Time
[512] Permission for Door Open Access
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
86
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
Operating Manual References
1.3.20 Door Open
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
Description
A visitor can use a doorphone to call its preprogrammed destination. Extension users can call a doorphone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
An optional doorphone, the OPB card and DPH card
Call Destination
The destination of doorphone calls can be assigned to each doorphone port for each time mode. The Time
Table is determined by the tenant number assigned to each doorphone port. (® 17.1.5 Time Service)
The following destinations cannot be the destination for doorphone calls:
– Floating Extension no. for SVM
– DISA
– Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make an outgoing
CO line call.
Internal Call Block determines which extensions can call a doorphone. (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block)
Ring Duration
If an incoming doorphone call is not answered within a preprogrammed time period, ringing stops and the
call is canceled.
Call Duration
The duration of doorphone calls can be restricted by a system timer. If the timer expires, the call will be
disconnected.
Door Open
While engaged on a doorphone call, an extension user can unlock the door to let the visitor in. (®
4.1.11 Door Open)
A doorphone number can be referenced for each doorphone port.
Installation Manual References
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.2 DPH4 Card (KX-TDA0161)
3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ Doorphone—Call Ring Duration
→ Doorphone—Call Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Doorphone Call
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 1 : Called by Voice
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
87
4.1.12 Doorphone Call
PT Programming Manual References
[720] Doorphone Call Destination
[729] Doorphone Number Reference
Operating Manual References
1.3.21 Doorphone Call
88
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 5
Features and Configurations—E
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
89
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
5.1 E
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access)
Description
Normally, an extension user can only access features within the PBX. However, when performing External
Feature Access (EFA) the extension user performs features outside of the PBX, such as using the transfer
services of the telephone company or host PBX. When EFA is performed, the PBX sends a flash/recall signal
to the telephone company or the host PBX (® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)).
This feature is only available on CO line calls.
This feature is performed by pressing the EFA button or the FLASH/RECALL button that is set to EFA mode
(® 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate).
Conditions
•
•
•
Flash/Recall Time
The Flash/Recall time can be assigned for each CO line port.
EFA Button
A flexible button can be customized as the EFA button.
It is possible to perform this feature by entering the feature number while the current call is placed on
Consultation Hold (e.g., is going to be transferred to an extension of the host PBX).
(® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold)
PC Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Flash Time
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Flash Time
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Feature Access
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA
PT Programming Manual References
[417] LCOT Flash/Recall Time
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.22 EFA (External Feature Access)
90
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
5.1.2 Emergency Call
Description
An extension user can dial preprogrammed emergency numbers after seizing a CO line regardless of the
restrictions imposed on the extension.
Conditions
•
•
•
A specified number of emergency numbers can be stored.
Emergency numbers may be called, regardless of Toll Restriction (TRS) level (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll
Restriction)), even when:
– in Account Code—Forced mode (® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)
– in Extension Dial Lock (® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)
CLIP Number Notification
When dialing an emergency number, the preassigned CLIP number for the extension will be sent as a
location identification number. (® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))
The CLIP number assigned to the extension will be sent regardless of the settings such as CLIR or CLIP
number assigned to an ISDN port to be used. This feature is only available when using a PRI line, with
E911-compatible services.
PC Programming Manual References
9.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial
PT Programming Manual References
[304] Emergency Number
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
5.1.3 Executive Busy Override
Description
Allows an extension user to interrupt an existing call to establish a three-party conference call.
Executive Busy Override Deny
It is possible for extension users to prevent their calls from being interrupted by another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the extension users who can use Executive Busy
Override and set Executive Busy Override Deny.
This feature will not function when the busy extension:
a. Has set Executive Busy Override Deny or Data Line Security (® 4.1.1 Data Line Security).
b. Is being monitored by another extension (® 3.1.6 Call Monitor).
c. Is receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
91
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
d. Is on a conference call (® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 13.1.14 Privacy Release).
e. Is on a doorphone call (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call).
f. Is using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
g. Has a call on consultation hold (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)).
•
This feature is not available for a CO-to-CO line call via Direct Inward System Access (DISA).
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Executive Busy Override
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→Extension Feature— Executive Busy Override
→Programming & Manager— Executive Busy Override Deny
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3— Executive Override Deny
PT Programming Manual References
[505] Executive Busy Override
[506] Executive Busy Override Deny
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.23 Executive Busy Override
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
Description
An extension user can change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of the telephone (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll
Restriction)) so that other users cannot make inappropriate CO line calls. An extension personal identification
number (PIN) is used to unlock the telephone (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)).
This feature is also known as Electronic Station Lockout.
Conditions
•
•
•
92
This feature also restricts changing the Call Forward (FWD) destination. (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding))
Remote Extension Dial Lock
Overrides Extension Dial Lock. If an extension assigned as the manager sets Remote Extension Dial Lock
on an extension that has already been locked by the extension user, the user cannot unlock it. If a manager
extension unlocks an extension that has been locked by the extension user, the extension will be unlocked.
This feature is also known as Remote Station Lock Control.
TRS Level
COS programming determines the TRS level for Extension Dial Lock.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
•
Other features can also temporarily change an extension’s TRS level, similar to Extension Dial Lock. If an
extension is locked, the TRS level determined by the following features takes priority. The numbers below
(1 through 3) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the highest priority, and 3 having the lowest.
1. Dial Tone Transfer (® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)
2. TRS Override by System Speed Dialing (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))
3. Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry, ® 20.1.1 Walking COS)
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Extension Dial Lock Set / Cancel
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock Off
→ Remote Extension Dial Lock On
PT Programming Manual References
[510] TRS Level for Extension Dial Lock
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.24 Extension Dial Lock
3.2.2 Manager Programming
5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear
Description
Extension users can clear the following features set on their own telephone at once:
Features
After Setting
Absent Message
Off
BGM
Off
FWD*1/DND*1
Off
Call Pickup Deny
Allow
Call Waiting*1
Enable (Call Waiting tone)
Data Line Security
Off
Executive Busy Override Deny
Allow
Log-in/Log-out
Log-in
Message Waiting
All messages left by other extensions will be
cleared.
Paging Deny
Allow
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
93
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Features
*1
After Setting
Paralleled Telephone
Paired SLT will ring.
Hot Line*1
Off
Timed Reminder
Cleared
These features can be programmed to not be canceled by Extension Feature Clear.
This feature is also known as Station Program Clear.
Conditions
•
•
Extension Dial Lock (® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock) and the extension personal identification number (PIN)
(® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)) will not be cleared by this feature.
If dial tone 2 is heard after Extension Feature Clear:
After performing Extension Feature Clear, Call Waiting will be enabled if "Extension Clear: Call
Waiting" is set to "Clear" through system programming. In this case, dial tone 2 will be heard when
going off-hook. (® 4.1.4 Dial Tone)
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension Feature Clear
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
→ Extension Clear—Call Waiting
→ Extension Clear—Fwd/DND
→ Extension Clear—Hot Line (Pickup Dial)
Operating Manual References
1.3.25 Extension Feature Clears
5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)
Description
Each extension user can be assigned a personal identification number (PIN) through system programming or
personal programming (Extension PIN [Personal Identification Number]). This PIN is used to set features or
access the extension remotely.
The following features require a valid PIN:
a. Live Call Screening (LCS)*1 (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
b. Incoming and Outgoing Call Log Display Lock (® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal), Personal Speed Dialing
Display Lock (® 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming)
c. Walking Extension (® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)
d. Extension Dial Lock (® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)
e. Walking COS (® 20.1.1 Walking COS)
f. Walking COS through DISA (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
*1
94
If an extension user has assigned an extension PIN, the PIN is required when activating this feature.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs regularly.
•
•
•
Extension PIN Lock
If the extension PIN is entered incorrectly three times, the line will be disconnected. If an incorrect PIN is
entered a preprogrammed number of times, the PIN will be locked. Only an extension assigned as a
manager can unlock a PIN, after which it will be reset. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
This feature is also known as Station Password Lock.
Remote Extension PIN Clear
If an extension user forgets his or her PIN, a manager can clear (reset) the PIN, and the extension user
can assign a new PIN.
Extension PIN Display
It is possible to select whether to show the extension PIN on the display through system programming. By
default, it is shown as dots.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Extension PIN Set / Cancel
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Password / PIN Display
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
PT Programming Manual References
[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.2.2 Manager Programmingf
5.1.7 Extension Port Configuration
Description
There are three types of extension ports, used to connect digital proprietary telephones (DPTs), analog
proprietary telephones (APTs), single line telephones (SLTs), Cell Stations (CSs), DSS Consoles, and Voice
Processing Systems (VPS) to the PBX. The devices which can be connected to each type of port are listed
below.
a. DPT Port: DPT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration, and PT-interface
CS (e.g., KX-TDA0141)
b. SLT Port: SLT and Panasonic VPS which supports DTMF Integration
c. Super Hybrid Port: DPT, APT, SLT, DSS Console, Panasonic VPS, and PT-interface CS
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
95
5.1.8 External Relay
EXtra Device Port (XDP):
A Super Hybrid port can be used as an XDP port, allowing two telephones (a DPT and an SLT) to be connected
to the same port of the PBX. This XDP port can be used in one of the following modes:
Mode
Description
Parallel Mode
The DPT and an SLT share the same extension number so that
they can act as one extension. The SLT uses the extension data
(extension number, Class of Service [COS], etc.) of the DPT. (®
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
XDP Mode
The DPT and SLT have different extension numbers and act as
independent extensions. To use XDP mode, XDP mode must be
enabled for the port through system programming. (®
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Automatic Detection on Super Hybrid Port
A DPT, SLT, or PT-interface CS connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically without
any programming. An APT connected to a Super Hybrid port can be detected automatically when XDP
mode has been disabled.
A DSS Console or a Panasonic VPS which supports DPT (Digital) Integration can also be connected with
an SLT in XDP mode.
APT and SLT in Parallel Mode
An APT and an SLT can also be connected to a Super Hybrid port and used in parallel mode.
Digital XDP
A DPT can be connected to another DPT and act as an independent extension with its own extension
number. (® 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can be used in Wireless XDP Parallel mode with a wired telephone.
(® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
DSS Console and Paired Telephone Assignment
When a DSS Console is connected, a PT must be paired with the DSS Console through system
programming.
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension
PT Programming Manual References
[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone
[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode
5.1.8 External Relay
Description
By turning external device relays on and off, the PBX can control external devices such as alarms.
96
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
5.1.9 External Sensor
When an extension user enters the External Relay Control feature number, the specified relay turns on for a
preprogrammed length of time. When this timer expires, the relay turns off automatically. This gives the PBX
simple control over other equipment, allowing an extension user to, for example, activate an alarm from his
extension.
If the relay cannot be accessed (for example, because use is not permitted by COS, or the port is not in service),
a reorder tone will be heard at the extension.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement:
An external relay device, OPB card and EIO card
Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
Each external relay port has a COS assigned. This and the COS of an extension determine the extension
users who can use External Relay Control.
The length of time that a relay is turned on can be specified separately for each relay through system
programming.
If the same or another extension tries to access an external relay that has already been switched on, the
timer for that relay is reset.
Installation Manual References
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)
3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— External Relay Access
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions—
7.6 [5-4] External Relay
External Relay Access
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.27 External Relay
5.1.9 External Sensor
Description
External sensing devices, such as security alarms or smoke detectors, can be connected to the PBX. When
the PBX receives input from a sensor, a call is made to the preset destination, alerting the extension user.
The available destinations of a sensor call are as follows:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
97
5.1.9 External Sensor
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
SIP Extension
ICD Group
PS Ring Group
Floating Extension no. for SVM
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
External Pager (TAFAS)
DISA
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
When the call is answered, if distinctive dial tones are enabled, dial tone 3 is heard, which continues until the
user goes on-hook. If the sensor call is not answered within a specified time, the call will be canceled. It is
possible to set a different ring tone pattern for calls received from each external sensor, to distinguish between
them.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
98
Hardware Requirement:
An external sensor, OPB card and EIO card
Some devices may be unable to communicate correctly with the PBX. Confirm compatibility with the
manufacturer of a device before installing it.
After a sensor has been activated, the PBX will ignore any further alerts from the same sensor for the
duration specified by a timer. This timer can be set separately for each sensor.
As long as the previous sensor call is still being performed, any further alerts from the same sensor are
ignored.
The assigned sensor name and/or number are shown on the display of PTs and PSs when a sensor call
is received.
If the destination of a sensor call has set FWD, the sensor call will be redirected to the FWD destination.
However, if the FWD destination is not supported as the destination of a sensor call (e.g., an outside party),
the call will be received at the original destination. (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
The following features cannot be used when a sensor call is received:
– Alternate Receiving—Voice (® 9.1.13 Intercom Call)
– Hands-free Answerback (® 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback)
– Consultation Hold/Call Hold (® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold, ® 3.1.4 Call Hold)
– Call Transfer (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer)
– Executive Busy Override (® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)
Sensor call information is output on SMDR.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
5.1.9 External Sensor
Installation Manual References
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.3 EIO4 Card (KX-TDA0164)
3.9.1 Connection of Doorphones, Door Openers, External Sensors, and External Relays
PC Programming Manual References
3.36 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
→ Input Signal Decision Time
→ Input Signal Detection Reopening Time
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— External Sensor—Ring Duration
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— External Sensor—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
99
5.1.9 External Sensor
100
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 6
Features and Configurations—F
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
101
6.1.1 Fixed Buttons
6.1 F
6.1.1 Fixed Buttons
Description
Proprietary telephones (PTs), DSS Consoles, and Add-on Key Modules feature a wide variety of feature
buttons and Line Access buttons, explained below.
Note that certain models do not feature certain buttons.
For a description of the buttons found on portable stations (PSs), please refer to the Operating Instructions for
each PS.
[PT and Add-on Key Module]
Button
Usage
Used to adjust the volume of the ringer, speaker, handset and headset,
and also adjust the display contrast. The Navigator Key and Jog Dial
can also be used to select data from the Call Directory and the System
Feature Access Menu on the display.
Navigator Key,
Jog Dial,
Volume Key
102
ENTER
Used to confirm the selected item.
CANCEL
Used to cancel the selected item.
PROGRAM
Used to enter and exit programming mode.
FLASH/RECALL
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode), or used to send
a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host PBX to access
external features (External Feature Access mode). This button can
also be used as a CANCEL button while on-hook.
HOLD
Used to place a call on hold.
SP-PHONE (Speakerphone)
Used for hands-free operation. Also used to switch between handset
and hands-free operation.
MONITOR
Used for hands-free dialing. Also used to monitor the other party’s
voice in hands-free mode.
MESSAGE
Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party who
left the Message Waiting indication.
REDIAL
Used to redial the last number dialed.
TRANSFER
Used to transfer a call to another party.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.1 Fixed Buttons
Button
Usage
Flexible CO
Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a
call according to the button’s preprogrammed CO Line Access method
(Default: S-CO). Can also be customized as a different feature button.
INTERCOM
Used to make or receive intercom calls.
AUTO ANS (Auto Answer)/
MUTE
Used to receive an incoming call in hands-free mode, or used to mute
the built-in microphone or handset during a conversation.
VOICE CALL/MUTE
Used to monitor an intercom call automatically (a hands-free
conversation is not possible). Also used to mute the handset during a
conversation.
AUTO DIAL/STORE
Used for System/Personal Speed Dialing and storing program
changes.
CONF (Conference)
Used to establish a multiparty conversation.
FWD/DND
Used to set Call Forwarding (FWD) or Do Not Disturb (DND).
PAUSE
Used to insert a dialing pause in a stored number. Also used as the
Program button on analog proprietary telephones (APTs) which do not
have the PROGRAM button.
Soft
Used to select the item displayed on the bottom line of the display.
SELECT
Used to select the displayed item or to call the displayed number.
SHIFT
Used to access the second level of Soft button items.
MODE
Used to change the current display to access various features.
NEXT PAGE
Used to switch the page for the Self Labeling feature (KX-NT366 only).
[DSS Console]
Button
Usage
ANSWER
Used to answer an incoming call, or place the current call on hold and
answer another call with a one-touch operation.
RELEASE
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to
complete a Call Transfer.
Flexible CO
Used to access a CO line or trunk group when making or receiving a
call according to the button’s preprogrammed CO Line Access method.
Can also be customized as a different feature button.
Flexible DSS (Direct Station
Selection)
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. Each button is
programmed to correspond to an extension. DSS buttons can also be
customized as other different feature buttons.
PF (Programmable Feature)
Used to access a preprogrammed feature with a one-touch operation.
(no default)
Conditions
•
Certain buttons are equipped with a light to indicate the status of the corresponding line or feature.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
103
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can use the FLASH/RECALL button (Flash/Recall mode or Terminate mode)
or Terminate button (Terminate mode) to disconnect the current call and originate another call without hanging
up.
Flash/Recall Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears the dial tone from the line used last.
For example, if a CO line call is disconnected, the extension user will hear a new dial tone from the same CO
line.
Terminate Mode: Disconnects the line and the extension user hears a dial tone via the preferred CO line.
(® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
FLASH/RECALL Button Mode
One of the following modes can be selected for each extension through system programming:
– Flash/Recall mode
– Terminate mode
– EFA mode (® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))
Terminate Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the Terminate button.
Disconnect Time (Only for Flash/Recall Mode)
The amount of time between successive accesses to the same CO line is programmable for each CO line
port.
This feature generates a Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) call record (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station
Message Detail Recording)), restarts the call timer, inserts a pause, and checks the Toll Restriction (TRS)
level (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) again.
The Terminate feature will be performed when pressing the FLASH/RECALL button regardless of the mode
that the FLASH/RECALL button has been set to, in the following situations:
– When a call is made using ARS. (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
– When a CO line call is made with the INTERCOM button.
– When a CO line call is made with an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group button.
PC Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Disconnect Time
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Disconnect Time
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Flash Mode during CO Conversation
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
PT Programming Manual References
[418] LCOT Disconnect Time
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
104
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Description
Flexible buttons are customized through either system or personal programming. They can then be used to
make or receive intercom or CO line calls or be used as feature buttons, as follows:
[Button Usage]
Button
Usage
Single-CO (S-CO)
Used to access a specified CO line for making or receiving calls.
(® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
Group-CO (G-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line in a specified trunk group for making
calls. Incoming calls from CO lines in the assigned trunk group arrive
at this button. (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
Loop-CO (L-CO)
Used to access an idle CO line for making calls. Incoming calls from
any CO line arrive at this button. (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
Direct Station Selection (DSS)
Used to call an extension with a one-touch operation. (®
9.1.13 Intercom Call)
Network Direct Station Selection
(NDSS)
Used to access an extension at another PBX within the same
network. (® 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network
Direct Station Selection))
One-touch Dialing
Used to call a preprogrammed party or access a feature with a
one-touch operation. (® 12.1.4 One-touch Dialing)
Incoming Call Distribution (ICD)
Group
Used to access a specified incoming call distribution (ICD) group for
making or receiving calls. (® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
Message
Used to leave a Message Waiting indication or call back the party
who left the Message Waiting indication. (® 11.1.3 Message
Waiting)
FWD/DND (External/Internal/
Both)*1
Used to set the FWD or DND feature for the extension. The feature
is applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (® 6.1.7 FWD/
DND Button, Group FWD Button)
Group FWD (External/Internal/
Both)
Used to set the FWD feature for a specified ICD group. The feature
is applied to CO line calls, intercom calls, or both. (® 6.1.7 FWD/
DND Button, Group FWD Button)
Account Code Entry (Account)
Used to enter an account code. (® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)
Conference
Used to establish a multiparty conversation. (®
3.1.18 Conference)
Terminate
Used to disconnect the current call and make another call without
hanging up. (® 6.1.2 Flash/Recall/Terminate)
External Feature Access (EFA)
Used to send a flash/recall signal to the telephone company or host
PBX to access external features. (® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature
Access))
Call Park
Used to park or retrieve a call in a preset PBX parking zone. (®
3.1.7 Call Park)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
105
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Button
106
Usage
Call Park (Automatic Park Zone)
Used to park a call in an idle PBX parking zone automatically. (®
3.1.7 Call Park)
Call Log
Used to show a log of received calls. (® 3.1.5 Call Log, Incoming)
Log-in/Log-out*1
Used to switch between Log-in and Log-out status. (® 9.1.3 ICD
Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
Hurry-up
Used to redirect the longest waiting call in the queue of an ICD group
to the overflow destination. (® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—
Queuing)
Wrap-up*1
Used to switch between Wrap-up/Not Ready and Ready modes.
(® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
System Alarm
Used to display a PBX error. (® 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information)
Time Service*1
Used to change or display the current time mode (day/lunch/break/
night). (® 17.1.5 Time Service)
Answer
Used to answer an incoming call. (® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)
Release
Used to disconnect the line during or after a conversation, or to
complete a Call Transfer. (® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)
Toll Restriction
Used to change the Toll Restriction (TRS) level of other extension
users temporarily. (® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)*1
Used to switch between CLIP and CLIR services. (® 3.1.15 CLIP
(Calling Line Identification Presentation), ® 13.1.23 Private
Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line
Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP (Calling/Connected
Name Identification Presentation))
Connected Line Identification
Restriction (COLR)*1
Used to switch between COLP and COLR services. (®
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP
(Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation))
Headset
Used to turn headset mode on/off while idle.
Used to switch between hands-free mode and headset modes
during a conversation. (® 8.1.3 Headset Operation)
Time Service Switching Mode
(Automatic/Manual)*1
Used to switch between Automatic Switching and Manual Switching
mode. (® 17.1.5 Time Service)
Two-way Record
Used to record a conversation into your own mailbox. (®
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified
extension. (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
One-touch Two-way Transfer
Used to record a conversation into the mailbox of a specified
extension with a one-touch operation. (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT
(Digital) Integration)
Live Call Screening (LCS)
Used to monitor your own voice mailbox while a caller is leaving a
message and, if desired, intercept the call. (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail
DPT (Digital) Integration)
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Button
*1
Usage
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer
Used to transfer a call to the mailbox of a specified extension. (®
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration, ® 19.1.5 Voice Mail
DTMF Integration)
Check-in
Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
(® 15.1.3 Room Status Control)
Check-out
Used to switch the status of extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
(® 15.1.3 Room Status Control)
Cleaned-up
Used to switch the room status of extensions between Ready and
Not Ready.
CTI
Used to access CTI features. (® 3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony
Integration))
Primary Directory Number (PDN)
Used to make and receive both outside and intercom calls. (®
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension)
Secondary Directory Number
(SDN)
Used to show the current status of another extension, call the
extension, and pick up or transfer calls to it. (® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary
Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension)
One-touch Feature Setting Buttons: Pressing these buttons while on-hook changes the feature settings. The new mode will be
displayed for a preprogrammed time period.
Conditions
•
The Flexible button lights of the KX-T7040 and KX-T7240 DSS Consoles can be either "Off" or "Red On".
If a button is customized as a button which shows other light patterns, these patterns will be indicated
as "Red On".
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
6.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy
6.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
Operating Manual References
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Description
To dial another extension user or to access PBX features, the access numbers (extension numbers or feature
numbers) are required.
There are three types of numbering plans:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
107
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
2. Flexible Numbering (available while busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)
1. Flexible Numbering (available while a dial tone is heard)
Extension numbers and feature numbers which are available while a dial tone is heard can be customized
for easy use. The numbers must not conflict. It is also possible to use default (Pattern 1 or Pattern 2) shown
in the following table:
a. Extension Numbers: Extension numbers consist of leading numbers and additional numbers.
Extension numbers (consisting of "0" through "9") can be assigned as follows:
• Numbering schemes: 1-64
• Leading number: up to three digits
• Additional number: up to two digits (default: two digits)
[Example]
If the number "3" is programmed as a leading number for the 1st extension numbering scheme,
and "XX" is programmed as the additional digits, extension numbers 300 through 399 are available.
b. Feature Numbers: Up to four digits, consisting of 0-9, " ", and "#"
c. Other PBX Extension Numbers (Other PBX Extension Number [TIE] 01 through 16): Up to three
digits, consisting of 0-9, " ", and "#"
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone is heard)]
Feature
108
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Extension Numbering Scheme 1—Leading Number
1
10
Extension Numbering Scheme 2—Leading Number
2
11
Extension Numbering Scheme 3—Leading Number
3
12
Extension Numbering Scheme 4—Leading Number
4
13
Extension Numbering Scheme 5—Leading Number
None
14
Extension Numbering Scheme 6—Leading Number
None
15
Extension Numbering Scheme 7—Leading Number
None
16
Extension Numbering Scheme 8—Leading Number
None
17
Extension Numbering Scheme 9—Leading Number
None
18
Extension Numbering Scheme 10—Leading Number
None
None
Extension Numbering Scheme 11—Leading Number
None
20
Extension Numbering Scheme 12—Leading Number
None
21
Extension Numbering Scheme 13—Leading Number
None
22
Extension Numbering Scheme 14—Leading Number
None
23
Extension Numbering Scheme 15—Leading Number
None
24
Extension Numbering Scheme 16—Leading Number
None
25
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Pattern 2
(without )
Extension Numbering Scheme 17—Leading Number
None
26
Extension Numbering Scheme 18—Leading Number
None
27
Extension Numbering Scheme 19—Leading Number
None
28
Extension Numbering Scheme 20—Leading Number
None
None
Extension Numbering Scheme 21—Leading Number
5
19
Extension Numbering Scheme 22—Leading Number
6
29
None
None
0
0
9
9
Trunk Group Access*1
8
8
TIE Line Access*1
7
None
Redial*1
#
#
Personal Speed Dialing—Programming*1
30
30
Doorphone Call*1
31
31
Group Paging
33
33
External BGM on/off*1
35
35
Outgoing Message (OGM) playback/record/clear
36
36
S-CO Line Access*1
37
37
SVM—Personal Greeting Message playback/record/clear*1
38
None
Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel
39
39
Group Call Pickup
40
40
Directed Call Pickup
41
41
TAFAS—Calls through an External Pager
42
42
Group Paging answer
43
43
Automatic Callback Busy cancel/CCBS cancel
46
46
User Remote Operation/Walking COS/Verification Code
Entry
47
47
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode set/cancel
48
48
Account Code Entry*1
49
49
Call Hold/Call Hold Retrieve
50
50
Extension Numbering Scheme 23–64—Leading Number
Operator Call*1
Idle Line Access (Local Access)
*1
Speed Dialing—System/Personal*1
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
109
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
110
Pattern 2
(without )
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Holding Extension
Number
51
51
Call Park/Call Park Retrieve
52
52
Call Hold Retrieve—Specified with a Held CO Line Number
53
53
Door Open
55
55
External Relay
56
56
External Feature Access
60
60
Preventing (not showing) the telephone number when making
outside calls (KX-HGT100 only)*2
67
Showing the telephone number when making outside calls
(KX-HGT100 only)*2
68
COLR set/cancel*1
7 0
7 0
CLIR set/cancel
7 1
7 1
Switch CLIP of the CO Line/Extension*1
7 2
7 2
Message Waiting set/cancel/callback*1
70
70
FWD/DND set/cancel—Both*1
710
710
FWD/DND set/cancel—External*1
711
711
FWD/DND set/cancel—Internal*1
712
712
FWD/DND No Answer Timer set*1
713
713
Group FWD set/cancel—Both*1
714
714
Group FWD set/cancel—External*1
715
715
Group FWD set/cancel—Internal
716
716
Call Pickup Deny set/cancel*1
720
720
Paging Deny set/cancel
721
721
Walking Extension/Enhanced Walking Extension
727
727
Data Line Security set/cancel
730
730
Manual Call Waiting for Extension Call off/BSS/OHCA/
Whisper OHCA
731
731
Automatic Call Waiting set/cancel
732
732
Executive Busy Override Deny set/cancel
733
733
Not Ready Mode on/off
735
735
Log-in/Log-out*1
736
736
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
739
739
Feature Manual
*1
*1
*1
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Feature
Default
Pattern 1
(with )
Hot Line program/set/cancel
740
740
Absent Message set/cancel*1
750
750
BGM set/cancel
751
751
Remote Wake-up Call
76
76
Timed Reminder set/cancel
760
760
Printing Message
761
761
Extension Dial Lock set/cancel*1
77
77
Time Service Switch*1
780
780
*1
782
782
Remote Extension Dial Lock on*1
783
783
NDSS Monitor Release (Centralized BLF Monitor Cancel)
784
784
Extension Feature Clear*1
790
790
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) set/cancel*1
799
799
Remote Extension Dial Lock off
*1
*2
*3
Pattern 2
(without )
Dial Information (CTI)
None
None
Other PBX Extension Number (TIE) 01–16
None
None
Quick Dialing 1–80*3
None
None
SIP extension users can use these feature numbers. If these feature numbers do not work properly with the KX-HGT100, ensure
that the firmware of the KX-HGT100 and the MPR software file version of the PBX are updated to their latest versions.
These settings are unrelated to PBX feature numbers and are set directly via the telephone. If the number set to the telephone
is also used as a PBX feature number, the number functions as the telephone's feature number, and not as a PBX feature
number. See 4.5.1 Registering IP Telephones in the IP Networking Guide for programming details.
It is possible to register Quick Dialing numbers that overlap with other registered numbers. This is used for the Automatic
Rerouting of VoIP Calls To Public CO Line feature.
2. Flexible Numbering (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)
Feature numbers which are available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard can be customized for
easy use. The numbers should be one digit (0-9, " ", or "#") and must not conflict. For a list of the default
settings, refer to the following table:
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a busy, DND, or ringback tone is heard)]
Feature
Call Waiting/DND Override*1
Default
1 or 2*2
Executive Busy Override
3
Message Waiting set
4
*1
Call Monitor
5
Automatic Callback Busy
6
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
111
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Feature
Default
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
*1
*2
SIP extensions cannot perform DND Override or Message Waiting but can be the recipient of them.
To use Call Waiting/DND Override, both "1" and "2" are available by default.
3. Fixed Numbering (available while dialing or talking)
Features which are available while dialing or talking have fixed numbers, as shown in the following table:
[Fixed Numbering Table (available while dialing or talking)]
Feature
Fixed Numbering
Pulse to Tone Conversion
*1
Conference*1
3
Door Open
5
SIP extensions cannot establish conferences but can participate in them.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
The following are examples of feature number conflicts: 1 and 11, 0 and 00, 2 and 21, 10 and 101, 32 and
321, etc.
Feature number + Additional number (Parameter)
Certain flexible feature numbers require additional digits to make the feature active. For example, to set
Call Waiting, the feature number for "Call Waiting" must be followed by "1" and to cancel it, the same feature
number should be followed by "0".
Rotary single line telephone (SLT) users cannot dial feature numbers which include " " or "#".
Portable station (PS) users cannot use the following features:
– Personal Speed Dialing
– OGM playback/record
– S-CO Line Access
– Parallel Telephone Mode set/cancel
– Walking Extension
– BGM set/cancel
– Timed Reminder
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main
→Extension
→Features
→Other PBX Extension
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
PT Programming Manual References
[100] Flexible Numbering
112
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.5 Floating Extension
Feature Manual References
13.1.26 PS Connection
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
4.2.1 Feature Number Table
6.1.5 Floating Extension
Description
Virtual extension numbers can be assigned to resources to make them as easily accessible as extensions.
These numbers are referred to as "floating extension numbers" and can be assigned as a destination of
incoming calls, intercepted calls, etc.
This feature is also known as Floating Station.
Resource
Device
Group
Description
Default
External Pager
Used as the destination for the Trunk Answer
From Any Station (TAFAS) feature. (®
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any
Station))
600
Outgoing Message
(OGM)
Used to play messages for callers via the
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
(® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access))
5 + two-digit
OGM number
Simplified Voice
Message (SVM)
Used to access message boxes associated
with extensions. (® 16.1.8 SVM (Simplified
Voice Message))
SVM card 1: 591
SVM card 2: 592
Analog Remote
Maintenance
Used to access PC programming mode
through a modem on a PC.
Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD)
Group
Used to call an ICD group. (® 9.1.1 ICD
GROUP FEATURES)
PS Ring Group
Used to call a PS ring group. (® 13.1.29 PS
Ring Group)
VM (DPT) Group
Used to call a VM (DPT) group.
VM (DTMF) Group
Used to call a VM (DTMF) group.
599
6 + two-digit
group number
—
500 (VM [DPT]
Group 1)
—
Conditions
•
Certain resources which are assigned a floating extension number can also be assigned a name.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
113
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Extension
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Group Name
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings— Floating Extension No.
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Floating Ext. No.
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group— Floating Extension Number
7.2 [5-2] External Pager— Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number
13.1 [11-1] Main—Remote— Remote—Analog Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number
PT Programming Manual References
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
[731] Outgoing Message (OGM) Name
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
13.1.6 PC Programming
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Description
Extensions and incoming call distribution groups can forward their calls to preset destinations. There are
several different types of forwarding, and the circumstances under which the calls are forwarded for each type
differ as follows:
Type
114
Circumstance
All Calls
Any time
Follow Me:
When an extension user fails to set this feature before leaving the
desk, this feature can be set from the destination extension.
Busy
When the extension user’s line is busy.
No Answer
When the extension user does not answer within a preprogrammed
time.
Busy/No Answer
When the extension user’s line is busy or the user does not answer
within a preprogrammed time.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Depending on the type of incoming intercom or CO line calls, it is possible to set a different destination for
each.
Extension
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Forwards to
Another Extension
Forwards to
Outside Party
Incoming CO
Line Calls
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
Busy
No Answer
Busy/No Answer
ICD Group
Incoming
Intercom Calls
Forwards to
Another Extension
Incoming CO
Line Calls
Forwards to
Outside Party
Available Forwarding Type: All Calls
[Available Destinations]
Destination
Availability
Condition for Original Extension/
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/
T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
ü
–
Floating Extension no. for SVM
ü
–
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü
–
External Pager (TAFAS)
ü
–
DISA
ü
Only available for incoming CO line
calls. Incoming intercom and
doorphone calls cannot be
forwarded to a DISA floating
extension number.
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
ü
–
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. +
Phone no.
ü
Only available when FWD to CO line
is allowed through COS
programming.
Document Version 2009-12
Only available when FWD to
extension is allowed through COS
programming.*1
Feature Manual
115
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
Destination
*1
Availability
Condition for Original Extension/
Incoming Call Distribution Group
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line,
Access with PBX Code)
ü
Only available when FWD to CO line
is allowed through COS
programming.
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line,
Access without PBX Code)
ü
–
If an extension user is not permitted by COS to call a certain extension (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block), the FWD feature will not
function if that extension is set as the forwarding destination.
Conditions
[General]
• FWD for CO Line Calls/Intercom Calls
•
•
•
•
The extension user can set the FWD feature for CO line calls, for intercom calls, or for both.
FWD from Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group FWD)
COS programming determines the incoming call distribution groups that can use this feature.
FWD to CO Line
COS programming determines the extensions or incoming call distribution groups that can forward calls
externally.
The original extension’s Toll Restriction and ARS still apply to the forwarded call.
CO Line Call Duration
The duration of a CO line call can be restricted by a system timer. CO line call duration is assigned
separately for calls between an extension user and an outside party, and calls between two outside parties.
If the timer expires, the line will be disconnected. (® 3.1.17 CO Line Call Limitation)
Multiple FWD
Calls can be forwarded up to four times. The following forwarding features are counted as Multiple FWD:
– FWD—Busy or Busy/No Answer (when the destination extension is busy), or All Calls
– Idle Extension Hunting—Overflow
– Intercept Routing—Busy/DND (when the destination extension is busy or in DND mode)
– Incoming Call Distribution Group—Overflow
Incoming
call
1
A
2
B
3
C
4
D
5
E
F
Original
destination
In the above illustration, forwarding stops at extension E. However, forwarding can go farther in the
following cases:
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the forward destination by the FWD
—No Answer or Busy/No Answer feature.
– If a destination extension rings, and then the call is redirected to the intercept destination by the
Intercept Routing—No Answer feature.
– If a call waits in a queue of an incoming call distribution group, and then the call is redirected to the
overflow destination by the Queuing Time Table. (® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing)
116
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
In the above cases, the forwarding counter resets to zero, and the call can be forwarded up to four times
again from the destination extension described above.
Incoming
call
1
A
2
B
3
C
Original
destination
•
1
D
2
E
F
FWD—No Answer
Boss & Secretary feature
It is possible to call the original extension from the destination extension regardless of the forward setting.
FWD—All Calls
Incoming
call
Call or
transfer a call
Boss
(Original)
•
•
Secretary
(FWD destination)
Message Waiting
While calls are forwarded, Message Waiting information is not forwarded. The Message button light turns
on at the originally called extension. (® 11.1.3 Message Waiting)
Idle Extension Hunting
Idle Extension Hunting applies to calls forwarded to a busy extension in an idle extension hunting group.
[All Calls and Busy]
• If the forward destination is not available to answer a call, this feature is canceled and the original
destination will ring for the following type of call:
– Doorphone call
– CO line calls via the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) cards
[No Answer and Busy/No Answer]
• No Answer Time
The number of rings before the call is forwarded is programmable for each extension.
[Follow Me]
• This feature is only available when the original extension has set "
Remote Operation by Other
Extension" to "Allow" through COS programming.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— FWD No Answer Timer Set
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
→Programming & Manager— Group Forward Set
→Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation by Other Extension
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main
→ CO-CO Duration Time (*60s)
→ Extension-CO Duration Time (*60s)
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Group Log / Group FWD
6.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
117
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
PT Programming Manual References
[472] Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration
[473] CO-to-CO Line Call Duration
[504] Call Forwarding to CO Line
[605] Call Forwarding—No Answer Time
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Operating Manual References
1.3.29 FWD (Call Forwarding)
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Description
The FWD/DND fixed button, or a customized flexible button, can display the FWD/DND setting status of the
extension. Using this button, the FWD status and DND status of the extension can be temporarily set or
canceled without clearing FWD destination settings.
FWD/DND Button Types
Multiple types of FWD/DND buttons can be customized on an extension.
Type
FWD/DND for
Extension
Description
FWD/DND—Internal
Works for incoming intercom calls
FWD/DND—External
Works for incoming CO line calls
FWD/DND—Both
Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The FWD/DND button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Status (default)
Red on
DND on
Slow red flashing
FWD on
Off
FWD/DND off
The functions assigned to the "on" and "flashing" patterns can be changed through system programming.
Group FWD Button Types
The FWD feature for the incoming call distribution group can be customized on a flexible button. Multiple types
of Group FWD buttons can be customized on an extension.
118
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
Type
FWD for Incoming Call
Distribution Group
Description
Group FWD—Internal
Works for incoming intercom calls
Group FWD—External
Works for incoming CO line calls
Group FWD—Both
Works for all incoming calls
[Button Status]
The Group FWD button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Status (default)
Red on
FWD on
Off
FWD off
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button
Pressing the fixed FWD/DND button in idle status allows the extension user to set the following items for FWD/
DND:
• FWD/DND for CO line calls
The FWD/DND status for CO line calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the
FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current CO line call FWD/DND status.
The forwarding type and destination for CO line calls can also be set.
• FWD/DND for intercom calls
The FWD/DND status for intercom calls to that extension can be switched temporarily without clearing the
FWD destination. During setting, the LED of the button shows the current intercom call FWD/DND status.
The forwarding type and destination for intercom calls can also be set.
• FWD—No Answer timer
The length of time until unanswered calls are forwarded can be modified. This setting is applied to both
intercom and CO line call forwarding.
• FWD for Virtual PS
If the extension is the first registered extension in an Incoming Call Distribution Group, the extension user
can set the FWD destination and forwarding status (on/off) for up to 4 virtual PSs preregistered to the group.
(® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)
These settings are only available when FWD/DND buttons are set through system programming to FWD/DND
Setting mode.
Conditions
•
When FWD/DND buttons are set to FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, pressing the FWD/DND button cycles
the FWD/DND setting.
In this mode, when intercom calls are set to be handled differently from CO line calls (forwarding type,
forward destination, DND on/off):
a. in idle mode, the light patterns of the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed
button]) and the Group FWD—Both button will indicate the setting for either CO line calls or intercom
calls, but not both.
b. the FWD and DND icons on a PS display reflect the settings for CO line calls only.
c. pressing the FWD/DND—Both button (including FWD/DND button [fixed button]) or the Group FWD—
Both button will be ignored.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
119
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
•
When both the FWD and DND features are assigned simultaneously, pressing the button changes the
settings as follows:
FWD
•
DND
Off
A FWD/DND button customized on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the
mode cannot be changed.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO
→ Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from Extension
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→ PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—FWD / DND
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings— FWD / DND Reference
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External))
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Internal))
Feature Manual References
6.1.1 Fixed Buttons
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
120
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 7
Features and Configurations—G
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
121
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
7.1 G
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
Description
This PBX supports various types of groups.
1. Trunk Group
CO lines can be grouped into trunk groups based on carrier, CO line type, etc. Several settings can be
assigned on a trunk group basis. All CO lines belonging to a trunk group follow the programming for that
trunk group.
® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings
® [402] LCOT Trunk Group Number
Each CO line can belong to only one trunk group. CO lines are assigned to a trunk group based on their
port numbers (for LCOT and PRI cards) or their channel numbers (for T1 cards).
2. Extension User Group
Extensions can be grouped into extension user groups. Extension user groups then compose the following
groups:
a. Tenant (® 17.1.3 Tenant Service)
b. Call Pickup Group (See below.)
c. Paging Group (See below.)
Every extension must belong to one extension user group and cannot belong to more than one extension
user group.
® 5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
® [603] Extension User Group
Assignable Extensions: Proprietary telephone (PT)/single line telephone (SLT)/portable station (PS)/
T1-OPX
[Example]
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Call Pickup Group
Using the Group Call Pickup feature, extensions can answer any calls within the call pickup group to which
they belong. One extension user group can belong to several call pickup groups. (® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)
® 5.7 [3-3] Call Pickup Group
® 5.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting
® [650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
122
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
[Example]
Call Pickup Group 1
Call Pickup Group 2
Call Pickup Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Paging Group
Using the Paging feature, extensions can make a page to any paging group or answer a page to their own
groups. One extension user group or external pager (loudspeaker) can belong to several paging groups.
(® 13.1.1 Paging)
® 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
® 5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
® 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[Example]
Paging Group 1
Paging Group 2
Paging Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Pager
3. Idle Extension Hunting Group
If a called extension is busy or in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming
call to an idle member of the same idle extension hunting group. Members are programmed through system
programming. When calls are received, idle extensions are automatically searched for according to a
preprogrammed hunting type: Circular Hunting or Terminated Hunting. (® 9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting)
® 5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
® 5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
® [680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
® [681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
4. Incoming Call Distribution Group (ICD Group)
An ICD group is a group of extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each ICD group
has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number) and name. One extension can belong
to multiple ICD groups.
® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
Assignable Extensions: PT/SLT/PS/T1-OPX/PS ring group
(® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
123
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
[Example]
ICD Group 1
(Floating Extn. No. 601,
Name: Sales 1)
ICD Group 2
(Floating Extn. No. 602,
Name: Sales 2)
Extn. 103 Extn. 104
Extn. 105 Extn. 106 Extn. 107
Extn. 100 Extn. 101 Extn. 102
5. VM Group
There are two types of VM groups, explained below.
Type
Description
VM (DPT) Group
A group of DPT ports which use Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
One DPT port can belong to only one group.
VM (DTMF) Group
A group of SLT ports which use Voice Mail DTMF Integration
features.
One SLT port can belong to only one group.
(® 19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group)
® 5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
® 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
® 5.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[Example]
PBX
DPT
Port
SLT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VM (DPT) Group
VM (DTMF) Group
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
SLT
Port
6. PS Ring Group
A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions which receives incoming calls directed to the group. Each
group has a floating extension number and name assigned through system programming. One PS can
belong to multiple PS ring groups. (® 13.1.29 PS Ring Group)
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
124
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
PS Ring Group 1
Floating Extension No. 301
Name: Sales 1
PS 1
(Extn. 601)
PS 2
(Extn. 602)
PS Ring Group 2
Floating Extension No. 302
Name: Sales 2
PS 3
(Extn. 603)
PS 4
(Extn. 701)
PS 5
(Extn. 702)
PC Programming Manual References
Section 5 [3] Group
PT Programming Manual References
[402] LCOT Trunk Group Number
[603] Extension User Group
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[650] Extension User Groups of a Pickup Group
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
125
7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES
126
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 8
Features and Configurations—H
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
127
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
8.1 H
8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user with a speakerphone or optional headset can talk to a caller without lifting
the handset. If the user receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, a hands-free conversation is
established in the following method:
Type
Answering Method
Intercom Call
Established immediately after a beep tone at the called extension
and the caller hears a confirmation tone.
CO Line Call
Established after a specified number of rings, a called extension
hears a beep tone.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
Hands-free Answerback applies to:
Intercom calls and CO line calls, including calls directed to an incoming call distribution group (ICD) in UCD
or Priority Hunting distribution method. (® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution)
Hands-free Answerback for CO Line Calls
System programming is required to use this feature.
Hands-free Answerback for Calls From an Extension That Placed a CO Line Call on Consultation
Hold
Calls from an extension that placed a CO line call on Consultation Hold can be treated by this feature as
either intercom calls or CO line calls, depending on system programming. If treated as intercom calls, the
call will be established immediately.
When transferring a call from an analog CO line, users are strongly recommended to perform a screened
transfer, so that the outside caller is not automatically connected to an extension using Hands-free
Answerback when the extension user is absent.
Secret Monitor
The beep tone heard by the called party before answering can be eliminated through system programming.
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice) Override
Hands-free Answerback overrides the Alternate Receiving mode preset on the telephone and the Alternate
Calling mode from the caller.
Hands-free Answerback with Headset
The Hands-free Answerback feature can also be used with a headset.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
4.18 [2-9] System Options
→Option 1— PT Operation—Automatic Answer for Call from CO after
→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
→Option 4— Transfer—Automatic Answer for Transferred Call
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 5— Automatic Answer for CO Call
→Option 6— Forced Automatic Answer
128
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
8.1.3 Headset Operation
Feature Manual References
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Operating Manual References
1.3.30 Hands-free Answerback
8.1.2 Hands-free Operation
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can talk to another party without lifting the handset. Pressing specific buttons,
such as REDIAL, automatically activate hands-free mode.
Conditions
•
PTs with the MONITOR Button
PTs with the MONITOR button can dial in hands-free mode but cannot have hands-free conversations.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Hands-free
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Answer Mode
8.1.3 Headset Operation
Description
This PBX supports headset compatible proprietary telephones (PTs). A PT user can talk to another party
hands-free and without lifting the handset by using an optional headset.
For connection and operation, refer to the Operating Instructions for the headset.
This feature is also known as Handset/Headset Selection.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
If headset mode is on, pressing the SP-PHONE button activates the headset, not the built-in speaker.
To set the headset mode on a digital proprietary telephone (DPT), use personal programming (Headset
Operation) or press the Headset button. To set headset mode on an analog proprietary telephone (APT),
use the handset/headset selector located on the telephone and/or on the headset.
Headset Button
Any flexible button on a DPT can be customized as the Headset button. The Headset button can be also
assigned to a flexible button on an APT, but the button will have no function.
Answer/Release Button
A flexible button can be customized as an Answer button or a Release button. Such buttons are useful for
headset operation. It is possible to answer an incoming call by pressing the Answer button. While hearing
a call waiting tone during a conversation, pressing the Answer button enables one to answer the second
call by placing the current call on hold. Pressing the Release button enables one to disconnect the line
during or after conversation, or to complete a Call Transfer.
It is possible to change from headset mode to hands-free mode or vice versa during a conversation by
pressing the Headset button.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
129
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
•
Headset users cannot use the following features:
– Automatic Redial (® 15.1.1 Redial, Last Number)
– Receiving the Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement))
– Receiving Whisper OHCA (® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA)
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— Headset OFF/ON
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.32 Headset Operation
3.1.2 Personal Programming
8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES
Description
This PBX has several features that support its use in a hotel-type environment, where extensions correspond
to guest rooms.
Feature
Description
Details in
Room Status Control
An extension designated as the hotel operator can set
the check-in status of rooms remotely.
® 15.1.3 Room
Status Control
Remote Wake-up Call
An extension designated as the hotel operator can set a
timed reminder for a room remotely.
® 17.1.4 Timed
Reminder
SMDR for External Hotel
Application
Hospitality feature data, including check-in, check-out,
and timed reminder times, can be output to SMDR for
use in a PC-based hotel application.
® 16.1.3 SMDR
(Station
Message Detail
Recording)
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX)
Description
This PBX can be installed behind an existing PBX (host PBX) by connecting the extension ports of the host
PBX to the CO line ports of this PBX (behind PBX). A Host PBX Access code is required for the behind PBX
to access the telephone company (e.g., to make outside calls) through the host PBX. The CO line access
number of the host PBX should be stored as a Host PBX Access code on a trunk group of the behind PBX.
A preprogrammed Pause time will be automatically inserted between the user dialed Host PBX Access code
and the subsequent digits (® 13.1.4 Pause Insertion).
130
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
[Example]
Telephone Company
Host PBX
Access Code: 0
Host PBX
Outside Party
(01-23-4567)
Idle Line
Access No.: 9
Extn. 101
Extn. 102
Dials "0-01-23-4567".
TRG1
Host PBX
Access Code
PBX
Telephone
No.
Dials "9-0-01-23-4567".
Idle Line
Access No.
Telephone No.
Host PBX
Access Code
Dials "9-101".
Idle Line
Access No.
Extn. No.
of the Host PBX
Note
In this example, "0" should be assigned as a Host PBX Access code for trunk group (TRG) 1 of this PBX.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
TRS
TRS checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Host PBX Access code when accessing the
telephone company through the host PBX. (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when
ARS mode is enabled. (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
SMDR
The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on Station Message Detailed
Recording (SMDR) only if the modified number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not
recorded on SMDR.
A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a CO line port is
connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long distance
code (e.g., "0") is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not require
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
131
8.1.6 Hot Line
a "0" to be dialed first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on
SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX. Therefore, only
long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.
PC Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Host PBX Access Code
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
PT Programming Manual References
[471] Host PBX Access Code
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
8.1.6 Hot Line
Description
An extension user can make an outgoing call by simply going off-hook, if the user has previously stored the
telephone number or the extension number.
If the Hot Line feature is set and the user goes off-hook, a dial tone is generated for a specified time assigned
through system programming and then dialing starts. During this waiting time the user can dial another party,
overriding the Hot Line feature.
This feature is also known as Pickup Dialing.
Conditions
•
Compatible Telephone
Proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), T1-OPX, and portable station (PS)
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
→ Pickup Dial No.
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2
→ Pickup Dial Set
→ Pickup Dial No.
PT Programming Manual References
[204] Hot Line Waiting Time
132
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
8.1.6 Hot Line
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.34 Hot Line
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
133
8.1.6 Hot Line
134
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 9
Features and Configurations—I
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
135
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
9.1 I
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Description
An incoming call distribution group is a group of extensions programmed through system programming.
® 5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
® [620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
An incoming call distribution group receives calls directed to the group. Each incoming call distribution group
has a floating extension number (default: 6 + two-digit group number).
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions in the
group using a distribution method. When a preprogrammed number of extensions in the group are busy, the
incoming calls can wait in a queue.
Each incoming call distribution group and member extensions can be programmed as desired to handle
incoming calls. Calls to the group can be monitored by an extension assigned as a supervisor.
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→ Main
→ Overflow Queuing Busy
→ Overflow No Answer
→ Miscellaneous
A
B
Group Floating
No. Extn. No.*1
1
2
3
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
*9
136
601
602
Group
Name*2
Sales
Engineering
C
D
E
F
Max. No. of
Queuing
Overflow Destination*8 Tenant
Distribution Busy Extensions
Hurry-up Overflow
Call
*3
Method (No. of Agents)*4 Capacity*5 Level*6
Time*7
No.*9
Day Lunch Break Night
Ring
UCD
3
Max.
5
11
3
8
60
90
100 103 100 100
200 203 200 200
1
5
® [622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
® [623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
® [624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
® [632] Maximum Number of Agents
® [628] Queuing Call Capacity
® [629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
® [626] Overflow Time
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration/[627] Destination When All Busy
The tenant number is required to determine the time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service) and the music source
(for Music on Hold) for each group.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
Calls arrive at ICD group 1.
13
12
F Overflow Feature
a) Sends a busy tone (Busy on Busy), or
b) Redirects to the overflow destination.
11
10
9
D Queuing Feature
8
Five calls are waiting
in the queue. (Calls
4 through 8)
7
6
Calls are distributed
using the assigned
method.
Extn.
101
Extn.
100
Monitors or controls the
status of the ICD group.
*1
*2
*3
The longest waiting call in a queue
can be redirected to the overflow
destination by pressing the Hurry-up
button.
5
B Call Distribution
Supervisor
Extension*2
E Manual Queue Redirection *1
4
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
A ICD Group 1
Extn.
104
Extn.
105
Extn.
105
Logged-in
Logged-out*3
Floating extension no.: 601
Name: Sales
C Agents: 3
® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
1. Group Call Distribution [® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution]
Incoming calls are distributed using one of the following methods:
Distribution Method
Description
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time
a call is received.
Priority Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the specified order, always
starting from the same location.
Ring
All extensions in the incoming call distribution group ring
simultaneously.
2. Queuing Feature [® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing]
If a preprogrammed numbers of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, a
preprogrammed number of additional calls can wait in a queue.
While calls are waiting in the queue, an outgoing message (OGM) or Music on Hold can be sent to the
waiting callers.
3. VIP Call [® 9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call]
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups so that incoming calls can be received
in priority order.
4. Overflow Feature [® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow]
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
137
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
A call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination when it cannot be answered or queued (Intercept
Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group). It is also possible to send a busy tone
(Busy on Busy) or disconnect the line.
5. Incoming Call Distribution Group Controlling Feature
Feature
Log-in/Log-out
Description & Reference
Member extensions can join the group to handle
calls (Log-in) or leave the group for a break
(Log-out).
They can leave the group temporarily when they
are away from their desks, to prevent calls being
sent to their extensions.
® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Supervisory Feature
Incoming Call Queue
Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor various
information about the incoming calls for each
incoming call distribution group on his display.
® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Log-in/Log-out
Monitor and Remote
Control
Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor
the log-in/log-out status of the group members.
Remote Control: The supervisor extension can
change the status of the members.
® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Conditions
•
•
•
138
One extension can belong to multiple incoming call distribution groups.
ICD Group button
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group button can be assigned on a flexible button for each incoming
call distribution group. It receives the incoming calls to the group.
One extension can have more than one ICD Group button of the same or different incoming call distribution
groups (Multiple ICD Group). If all ICD Group buttons in the same incoming call distribution group are
occupied, the next incoming call will be held in a queue or will overflow. If the ICD Group button is not
assigned, incoming calls will arrive at the INTERCOM, CO or PDN button.
The mode of ICD Group buttons can be selected through system programming, as follows:
– Standard Mode (Group DN Button Mode)
An extension can have an ICD Group button for an incoming call distribution group that the extension
does not belong to through system programming. However, the ICD Group button will not receive calls
to that group.
– Enhanced Phantom Button Mode
An extension can join an ICD Group just by creating a button for that group, even if the extension was
not previously registered as a member. When the button is created, the extension will be automatically
registered in the lowest-numbered available member slot for the group. Calls to the group can be
received at the extension with no further programming. If no member slots are available for that group,
the button cannot be created and an alarm tone will be heard.
When creating an ICD Group button in this mode, the user can also specify the delayed ringing settings.
If an extension user deletes the last ICD Group button at his extension for a certain group, he will also
be deregistered as a member from that group.
Group FWD
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
•
The FWD feature can be assigned on an incoming call distribution group basis.
COS for Incoming Call Distribution Groups
Each incoming call distribution group is assigned a COS number. Group FWD to an outside party can be
enabled or disabled for each COS. The COS for incoming call distribution groups is also used for the
Internal Call Block feature; when an extension user calls an incoming call distribution group, the PBX
checks the COS of the calling extension against the COS of the incoming call distribution group (®
9.1.14 Internal Call Block).
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings
→CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
→Programming & Manager— Group Forward Set
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→Main
→Overflow Queuing Busy
→Overflow No Answer
→Miscellaneous
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—ICD Group Key Mode
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
PT Programming Manual References
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[623] Incoming Call Distribution Group Name
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
Description
Incoming calls directed to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to the member extensions using
the selected distribution method until a preprogrammed number of extensions (agents) are busy with calls.
When incoming calls exceed the number of available extensions, calls enter a queue (® 9.1.6 ICD Group
Features—Queuing).
1. Distribution Method
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
139
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
One of the three distribution methods below can be assigned to each incoming call distribution group.
Distribution Method
Description
Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD)
Calls are distributed evenly to a different extension each time a call is
received. Extensions are hunted in a circular way in the
preprogrammed order for the group, starting at the extension after the
extension that received the last call.
Received
the last call.
Extn.
D
Extn.
C
Extn.
B
Extn.
A
Starts searching from
extn. B. (Skips extn. A.)
Depending on system programming, calls can be directed to the longest
idle extension. This is known as Automatic Call Distribution (ACD).
Priority Hunting
An idle extension is searched for using the preprogrammed order for
the group.
1st Priority
2nd Priority
3rd Priority
...Priority
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Extn.
X
Always searches beginning with the
first extension assigned to the group.
Ring
All extensions in the group ring simultaneously.
Delayed Ringing:
Delayed ringing or no ringing can be programmed for each extension
in the group. The call can be answered by pressing the flashing button
even if no ring or a delayed time is set.
Extn.
A
Extn.
B
Extn.
C
Immediately ring simultaneously.
Extn.
D
Delayed Ringing:
Rings after a
specified time delay.
2. Call Waiting for Incoming Call Distribution Group (Group Call Waiting)
When there are no available extensions in an incoming call distribution group, the group members can
receive the Call Waiting tone. To use this feature:
• Select the Group Call Waiting mode through system programming. This determines the distribution
method for waiting calls.
• Member extensions must assign the Call Waiting mode individually, or they will not be notified. (®
3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES)
140
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
[How the Group Call Waiting Feature Activates]
Programming Conditions
Result
Group Call
Group Call
Waiting Mode Distribution Method
Distribution
UCD
Priority Hunting
Ring
All
UCD/Priority Hunting/
Ring
Group Call Waiting
Capable
Distribution Method
Telephone
PT/PS with idle
UCD
ICD Group button
Priority Hunting
Any telephone
Not available*
Ring
* Incoming calls enter the queue immediately. Member extensions do not receive the Call Waiting tone.
[Example]
• Group Call Waiting mode: All
• Group call distribution method
for idle extensions: UCD
All extensions hear the Call
Waiting tone (Ring).
[ICD Group Button for Group Call Waiting]
The way that the Group Call Waiting feature works depends on the Group Call Waiting Distribution method
as follows:
a. Ring: The Group Call Waiting feature activates for all busy member extensions (even when the
extensions do not have ICD Group buttons) simultaneously for only one incoming call—additional calls
will wait in a queue.
b. UCD/Priority Hunting: The Group Call Waiting feature activates on an idle ICD Group button located
on busy member extensions in a certain order. (This order depends on the type: UCD or Priority
Hunting.) Calls will arrive at idle buttons until all ICD Group buttons are occupied—additional calls will
wait in a queue.
Note
In method b), if an extension has one or more ICD Group buttons for an incoming call distribution
group and all the ICD Group buttons on the extension are occupied, the Group Call Waiting feature
for the group will not work at the extension.
ICD Group 1
(Floating
extension
no.: 601)
3
2
ICD Group 2
(Floating
extension
no.: 602)
1
ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 1; 601 (Call Waiting)
ICD Group 2; 602 (Answering the Call)
3. No Reply Redirection (UCD or Priority Hunting Method)
If a call received at a member extension is not answered within a preprogrammed time period (No Answer
time), the call will be redirected to the next member extension. If there is no idle group member, the call
queues at the target extension until a group member becomes available.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
141
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Conditions
•
•
•
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
When a KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is installed in the PBX,
and the distribution type is set to Uniform Call Distribution, it is possible to select whether incoming calls
are distributed to idle extensions evenly in order (UCD), or to the extension that has been idle the longest
(ACD).
FWD/DND Extension
System programming for each incoming call distribution group is required to skip or ring extensions which
have the FWD or DND feature set. If set to ring, the FWD/DND settings are ignored. (® 4.1.10 DND (Do
Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
The Group Call Waiting feature cannot be used with the VIP Call feature (® 9.1.8 ICD Group Features—
VIP Call) and/or Wrap-up feature (® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out). To use the VIP Call
feature and/or Wrap-up feature, Call Waiting mode on each extension should be off.
PC Programming Manual References
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— Line Hunting Order
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→Main— Distribution Method
→Main— Call Waiting Distribution
→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Longest Idle Distribution
(Activation Key Required)
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
PT Programming Manual References
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
Description
Members of an incoming call distribution group can join (Log-in) or leave (Log-out) the group manually.
They can leave the group temporarily when they are away from their desks, to prevent calls being sent to their
extensions. They can return to the group when they are ready to answer calls.
Wrap-up:
While logged in, a member extension can have a preprogrammed time period automatically for refusing calls
after completing the previous call (Wrap-up time). While the Wrap-up timer is active, calls to all incoming call
distribution groups to which the extension belongs will skip the extension so that the extension user can perform
necessary tasks such as reporting on the previous call.
Wrap-up mode can also be activated manually (Not Ready) by pressing the Wrap-up button.
142
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
[Log-in/Log-out and Wrap-up Status Example]
Incoming call
Incoming call
Incoming call
Ready
Call
arrives
Extn.
101
Extn.
102
Ready
Extn.
103
Extn.
104
Extn.
105
Extn.
106
Answering a call
Waiting for call
Wrap-up
time expires
Wrap-up
button pressed
Not Ready
Finishing paperwork/
temporary break
Ready Not Ready Wrap-up Ready
Wrap-up
button pressed
Call
completed
Logged-in
Wrap-up
Finishing paperwork
Extn.
102
Logged-out
Conditions
•
•
It is programmable whether the last remaining logged-in extension can log out.
Log-in/Log-out Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Log-in/Log-out button with the following parameters:
Light Pattern
Parameter
Usage
Red on
No parameter
Used with an ICD Group
button, or with the floating
extension number of an
incoming call distribution
group, or with (All).
—
—
Floating extension number of a
specified incoming call
distribution group
Used to log in to or out of the
specified incoming call
distribution group.
Log-out
Status
Log-in Status
Used to log in to or out of all
incoming call distribution
groups to which the extension
user belongs.
After Log-out
Operation
After Log-in
Operation
(All)
•
•
•
Off
If an ICD Group button is assigned, it also shows the log-in/log-out status of the corresponding group. The
light pattern is the same as the Log-in/Log-out button that includes the group number.
Wrap-up Timer
– Two wrap-up timers can be programmed, an ICD Group member wrap-up timer and an extension
wrap-up timer. System programming selects which timer is used. When the ICD Group member
wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is only activated after calls to the extension through an ICD Group.
When the extension wrap-up timer is selected, the timer is activated after all calls to or from the
extension, including a retrieved call on hold.
– Only calls from ICD Groups cannot be received during the wrap-up time. Other calls are received as
normal.
– The wrap-up timer does not work for SIP extensions or PS Ring Groups.
Wrap-up Button
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
143
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
A flexible button can be customized as the Wrap-up button. It shows the current status as follows:
Light pattern
•
•
•
•
Status
Slow red flashing
Wrap-up
Red on
Not Ready
Off
Ready (Wrap-up mode cancel)
When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode completes a call, neither the PS nor its wired telephone can
have Wrap-up time. (® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Automatic Log-out
A member extension may be logged out automatically, if the Unanswered time expires a preprogrammed
number of times consecutively. The number of consecutive unanswered calls can be assigned for each
incoming call distribution group. If the extension is a member of more than one incoming call distribution
group, the unanswered number is counted across all corresponding incoming call distribution groups. It is
possible to return to log-in mode manually.
The Automatic Log-out feature does not work for extensions in an incoming call distribution group using
the Ring distribution method (® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution).
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor and control the log-in/log-out status of the incoming call distribution
group members. (® 9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory)
Log-in/Log-out Information on SMDR
Log-in/Log-out information can be printed out on SMDR. (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail
Recording))
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Log-in / Log-out
→ Not Ready (Manual Wrap-up) Mode On / Off
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous
→ No. of Unanswered Calls for Automatic Log-out
→ Last Extension Log-out
5.15 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous— Options—Wrap-up Timer based on
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List— Wrap-up Timer
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8— Wrap-up Timer
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out)
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in / Log-out
144
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.38 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Description
Up to 4 outside parties or destinations at another PBX can be assigned as members of an Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD) Group, using the following method: A virtual PS is registered as a member of the ICD Group.
Then, the telephone number of the outside destination is specified as the FWD—All Calls destination. Calls to
the ICD Group will also ring at the outside destination as if that destination were an extension within the PBX.
This is useful in situations such as the following:
• An extension user can have his PT and multiple cellular phones ring together for calls.
• An employee who is not in the office, but is still available to answer calls, can receive calls to an ICD Group.
Telephone Company
PBX-2
Cellular
Company
PBX-1
TIE
ICD Group
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 4
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Cellular Phone XDP Parallel
The extension registered first in an ICD Group can program the Forward settings for CO line calls to up to 4
virtual PSs through PT programming. Using this feature, an extension user can assign his cellular phone to
ring with his PT, so that he can easily receive CO line calls even when not at his desk.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
145
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this
feature.
For this feature to be activated, the following conditions must be met:
– A virtual PS is assigned as a member of the ICD Group. (® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)
– The forwarding type of the virtual PS is set to All Calls. (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
– The forwarding destination is an outside party, including an extension at another PBX in the network.
– FWD to CO line is allowed through COS programming for the virtual PSs.
– The distribution method for the ICD Group is set to Ring. (® 9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call
Distribution)
Up to 4 virtual PSs can be assigned to a single ICD Group. If more than 4 are assigned, the 4 virtual PSs
with the lowest member numbers are available.
LCOT CO lines and channels of a T1 CO line set to LCOT do not support this feature.
Calls to an ICD Group will ring at a virtual PS even if all of the other extensions assigned to the group are
busy.
If all members of an ICD Group are virtual PSs, and CO lines are available but the called parties are all
busy, neither the queuing or overflow features will operate. Therefore, it is recommended that at least one
PT or SLT is also assigned to an ICD Group.
To log in to or out of a group, a virtual PS user can access the PBX through DISA, enter the Walking COS
feature number (if required), and access log-in/log-out settings.
Delayed ringing can be assigned for virtual PSs in the same way as for other extensions.
The wrap-up time feature is not available for virtual PSs.
When forwarding calls to a public CO line, system programming selects whether the CLIP number of the
calling party or of the virtual PS is sent to the forward destination.
When calling using a private network, the CLIP number of the calling party will always be sent.
DSS button for Cellular Phone XDP Parallel
The DSS button light of the extension registered first in an ICD Group will turn red if the parallel cellular
phone:
– is on a CO line call that was received via the ICD Group.
– is on a CO line call that was made using the Walking COS Through DISA feature. (® 4.1.8 DISA
(Direct Inward System Access))
PC Programming Manual References
3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Call Forward to CO
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular
Phone
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Distribution Method
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
→ Extension Number
→ Delayed Ring
6.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD/DND
PT Programming Manual References
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[621] Incoming Call Distribution Group Delayed Ringing
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
146
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
[690] PS Registration
Feature Manual References
13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
19.1.2 Virtual PS
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Description
When waiting calls exceed the waiting queue capacity, they may be redirected to a preprogrammed destination
or a busy tone may be sent to the callers by the following features:
1. Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
2. Busy on Busy
1. Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group works in one of following conditions:
a. There is no space in the waiting queue.
b. The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged in.
c. An Overflow command is assigned to the Queuing Time Table.
d. The Overflow time expires.
e. Manual Queue Redirection is performed.
[Available Destination]
The overflow destinations can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group and each time mode
(day/lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service). The destination can be assigned as follows, depending
on the above conditions.
• For a) and b):
® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow Queuing Busy—
Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [627] Destination When All Busy
• For c), d), and e):
® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out
& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
Destination
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
ü
Floating Extension no. for SVM
ü
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü
External Pager (TAFAS)
ü
DISA
ü
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
147
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
Destination
Availability
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
ü
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
ü
2. Busy on Busy
The Busy on Busy feature works when the destination for the Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming
Call Distribution Group feature is not assigned in one of the following conditions:
a. There is no space in the Waiting queue.
b. The Queuing Time Table is not assigned and there are no extensions logged-in.
[Example of a)]
There are five assistants in a shop. When the answering agent number is "2", and the queuing call number
is "0":
If two of the assistants are talking on the phone, the next caller will hear a busy tone to prevent the caller
from thinking that there is no one in the shop or that the shop is closed.
Conditions
[Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution Group]
• If the Overflow time expires, and the overflow destination is unavailable:
a. If the CO line call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card:
(1) If the call was once in a queue and an outgoing message (OGM) was sent to it, or the call reached
an incoming call distribution group by using the DISA feature (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access)): The line is disconnected.
(2) In all other cases: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
b. If the call arrives through another card: Redirection is ignored and the Overflow timer activates again.
[Busy on Busy]
• If a CO line call arrives through the LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card, a busy tone will not be sent to the
caller.
PC Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→Overflow Queuing Busy
→Overflow No Answer
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
PT Programming Manual References
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
[626] Overflow Time
[627] Destination When All Busy
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
148
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Feature Manual References
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
Description
When a preprogrammed number of extensions in an incoming call distribution group are busy, additional
incoming calls can wait in a queue. The number of calls which can wait in the queue is programmable.
While calls are waiting in the queue, the calls are handled by the Queuing Time Table, which can be assigned
for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service). This PBX supports a specified number
of Queuing Time Tables which each have a specified number of sequences (specific commands which are
performed when a caller enters a queue). The following commands can be assigned to each sequence when
making a Queuing Time Table:
[Command Table]
Command
Description
Condition
OGM xx
An outgoing message is sent to the
caller. "xx" applies to the OGM
number.
After the OGM, Music on Hold will be
sent and the next event in the
sequence will be activated.
Wait
The caller waits for the specified
time while hearing a ringback tone
or Music on Hold.
If an OGM has not been sent to the
caller, the caller hears a ringback
tone.
If an OGM has been sent to the
caller, the caller hears Music on
Hold.
Redirects to sequence c. "c"
applies to the sequence number.
None
Redirects to the overflow
destination.
None
Disconnects the line.
None
Redirects to the next sequence.
If assigned as sequence 01, the
Queuing Time Table will not be
activated.
Sequence c
Overflow
Disconnect
None
(No command)
[Programming Example of Queuing Time Table]
Queuing Time
Table No.
Sequence*1
Sequence 01
Sequence 02
Sequence 03
Sequence 04
01
OGM 01
Wait 30 s
OGM 03
Overflow
02*2
OGM 02
Wait 30 s
OGM 04
None
:
:
:
:
...
03
:
*1
® 5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table—
Document Version 2009-12
:
Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–16
Feature Manual
149
9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing
*2
® [631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
If a call has not reached a destination by the time the final sequence is completed, the call will be disconnected.
Explanation for Queuing Time Table 01:
Queuing Time Table 01
The call
enters
the queue.
Sequence 01
Sequence 02
Sequence 03
Sequence 04
OGM 01 is played.
Music on Hold
is played for
30 seconds.
OGM 03 is played.
We are sorry to
keep you holding.
All of our agents
are still handling
other calls. We
are transferring
you to the
The call is
redirected to
the overflow
destination.
Thank you for
calling Panasonic.
All of our agents are
currently handling
other calls. Please
hold the line. We
will answer your call
shortly.
The call is
answered
by the
overflow
destination.
The call is connected to an agent as
soon as one becomes available.
Conditions
•
•
•
If the call is transferred to the incoming call distribution group and is handled by the Queuing Time
Table:
Transfer Recall will not occur even if the Transfer Recall time expires.
Manual Queue Redirection
It is possible to redirect the longest waiting call in a queue to the overflow destination by pressing the
Hurry-up button. (If the call is already ringing at an extension, it will not be redirected.)
This feature is also known as Hurry-up Transfer.
Hurry-up Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Hurry-up button. The number of calls queuing before Manual
Queue Redirection may be performed is programmable. The button shows the current status as follows:
Light Pattern
Calls in the Waiting Queue
Off
No queued call
Red on
At or under the assigned number for Hurry-up
Rapid red flashing
Over the assigned number for Hurry-up
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Transfer—Transfer to busy Extension without BSS Operation
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→Overflow Queuing Busy
→Overflow No Answer
→Queuing Time Table
→Miscellaneous— Extension No Answer Redirection Time
→Miscellaneous— Maximum No. of Busy Extension
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Call Waiting on VM Group
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Call Waiting on VM Group
150
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up)
PT Programming Manual References
[628] Queuing Call Capacity
[629] Queuing Hurry-up Level
[630] Queuing Time Table
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[632] Maximum Number of Agents
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.40 ICD Group Features—Manual Queue Redirection
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
Description
An extension preprogrammed as a supervisor (supervisor extension) can monitor and control each member’s
status within the incoming call distribution group using a 6-line display PT.
Feature
Description
Incoming Call Queue Monitor
The supervisor extension can monitor the status of an incoming
call distribution group with the display.
Log-in/Log-out Monitor and
Remote Control
Monitor: The supervisor extension can monitor the log-in/log-out
status of the incoming call distribution group members through the
corresponding DSS button light.
Remote Control: The supervisor extension can change the
status of the members by pressing the corresponding DSS button.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
151
9.1.7 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
[Example]
<Incoming Call Queue Monitor Display>
JAN.31 08:13AM FRI
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now :00006
Max. Waiting Time :05'10
EXIT
LOG
--- Date and time
--- ICD group's floating extension number and name
--- Number of calls waiting in the queue
--- Elapsed waiting time of the call queuing the longest
SPRVS
Since JAN.29
Total Calls
Overflow Calls
Lost Calls
Average Waiting
EXIT
09:10AM
:00996
:00131
:00039
:02'12
CLEAR
--- Monitoring starting date and time
--- Total number of incoming calls
--- Total number of overflowed calls
--- Total number of lost calls
--- Average queuing time
<Log-in/Log-out Monitor/Remote Control Mode with DSS Button light>
JAN.31 08:13AM FRI
601:Sales Section
Waiting Calls Now :00006
Max. Waiting Time :05'10 With
EXIT
Log-in/Log-out Monitor
DSS buttons show the status
of the corresponding group
members.
Log-in/Log-out Remote Control
Pressing a DSS button
changes the extension's
status as follows:
Light pattern
Status
Status
Light pattern
Green on
Log-in (Ready)
Log-out
Red on
Slow Green Flashing Log-in (Not Ready)
Red on
Log-out
Off
Extension in another ICD
group
Log-in (Ready) Green on
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
152
Available Extension as a Supervisor Extension
a. One supervisor extension can be assigned for each incoming call distribution group, but it need not
belong to the group.
b. One extension can be the supervisor extension of more than one incoming call distribution group.
Available Paired DSS Console
This feature is available for the KX-T7640, KX-T7440, and KX-T7441.
Accumulation Value Clear
Accumulation value data (total incoming calls, total overflowed calls, lost calls, average queuing time) can
be cleared manually. The date and time of clearing is saved and is shown on the display (monitoring starting
date and time). When the value exceeds 99999 before clearing, "****" will be shown.
If a call to an incoming call distribution group is overflowed:
If the display is in idle status, it will change to monitor mode for the corresponding incoming call distribution
group automatically.
If the display is monitoring another incoming call distribution group, it will not change.
Other Features while in Monitor Mode
The supervisor can use other features on the extension (making calls, pressing the MESSAGE button,
etc.) even while in monitor mode. When each operation is finished, his telephone returns to the queue
monitor display.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Incoming Call Queue Monitor
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
Number
Supervisor Extension
Operating Manual References
1.3.41 ICD Group Features—Supervisory
9.1.8 ICD Group Features—VIP Call
Description
It is possible to assign a priority to incoming call distribution groups. If an extension belongs to multiple groups
and the extension becomes idle, queuing calls in the groups will be distributed to the extension in priority order.
Each incoming call distribution group can enable or disable the VIP Call mode. When multiple groups enable
the VIP Call mode, the incoming call distribution group with the lowest numbered group has the highest priority.
When multiple groups disable the VIP Call mode, queuing calls are distributed to extensions uniformly.
[Example]
In the call center, incoming call distribution groups 1 and 3 enable the VIP Call mode, while incoming call
distribution groups 2 and 4 disable the VIP Call mode.
Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/CLI distribution.
(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls.
ICD Group 1
(for VIPs)
ICD Group 2
(for general customers)
6
5
1
3
1st
Priority
Extn.
101
3rd
Priority
Extn.
102
Extn.
103
Distribution order: 1
2nd
Priority
ICD Group 3
(for special
customers)
3rd
Priority
2
7
4
8
6
2
4
From: Group 1 Group 3
3
7
5
8
Groups 2 and 4
ICD Group 4
(for general customers)
Calls have been distributed by DIL/DID/CLI distribution.
(The circled numbers indicate the arrival order of the calls.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
153
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
PC Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous—
VIP Call Mode
9.1.9 Idle Extension Hunting
Description
If a called extension is busy or in DND mode, Idle Extension Hunting redirects the incoming call to an idle
member of the same idle extension hunting group, which can be programmed through system programming.
Idle extensions are automatically searched according to a preprogrammed hunting type.
This feature is also known as Station Hunting.
Type
Circular Hunting
Description
An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group in a circular way.
Incoming call
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Assignment order
Terminated Hunting
An idle extension is searched for in the order specified in the idle
extension hunting group until reaching the last assigned extension.
Incoming call
Last
Extn.
Busy
Extn.
Extn.
Extn.
Assignment order
Conditions
•
•
•
Idle Extension Hunting applies to:
Intercom, CO line, and doorphone calls to a single destination.
An extension user can belong to only one idle extension hunting group.
If all the searched extensions are busy:
The PBX redirects the call to an overflow destination which can be assigned for each idle extension hunting
group and each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service).
[Available Destination]
Destination
154
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
ü
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Destination
Availability
Floating Extension no. for SVM
•
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü
External Pager (TAFAS)
ü
DISA
ü
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
ü
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
ü
FWD/DND Mode
While searching for an idle extension within an idle extension hunting group, any extension that has set
FWD—All Calls or DND feature will be skipped, and the call will go to the next extension in the group.
PC Programming Manual References
5.16 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group
5.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List
PT Programming Manual References
[680] Idle Extension Hunting Type
[681] Idle Extension Hunting Group Member
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Description
Each CO line functions as either a public line or a private line. Private lines are used to connect different PBXs
and form a private network (® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES), while public lines connect a PBX
to a public network, i.e., the telephone company. Certain PBX features are available depending on the
networking type (public or private) of each CO line.
1. Networking Type Used by Each CO Line
Each CO line port (channel) of a CO line card or an IPCMPR card is assigned a port (channel) type which
determines the CO line’s networking type—public or private.
® 3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
® 12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
155
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
Card
Type
Port/Channel/
Protocol Type
IPCMPR
(V-IPGW)
H.323
IPCMPR
(V-SIPGW)
SIP
Networking Type
Public
Private
LCOT
T1
PRI
LCOT
GCOT
DID
TIE (E&M)
OPX (EXTN.)
CO
Extension
QSIG-Master
QSIG-Slave
Default
Available
2. Distribution Method
Each public CO line port (channel) can use a different method of directing calls to their destinations as they
are received.
Distribution Method
Description
Details in
Direct In Line (DIL)
Directs a call to a preprogrammed destination,
such as an operator, based on the CO line
carrying the call.
® 4.1.7 DIL (Direct
In Line)
Direct Inward Dialing
(DID)
Directs a call received on a DID line to a
preprogrammed destination based on the
telephone number dialed by the caller.
® 4.1.6 DID (Direct
Inward Dialing)
Calling Line Identification (CLI) distribution is the most customizable call distribution method available. It
allows calls from specific people to be directed to specific destinations, based on the callers’ telephone
numbers. CLI distribution, when enabled for the current time mode, takes precedence over DIL or DID
distribution.
Distribution Method
Calling Line
Identification (CLI)
Distribution
156
Feature Manual
Description
Directs a call to its preprogrammed destination if
the caller’s telephone number and its CLI
destination has been stored in the System Speed
Dialing Table.
Details in
® 3.1.14 CLI
(Calling Line
Identification)
Distribution
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES
3. Available Distribution Method for Public CO Lines
Card
Type
Port/Channel/
Protocol Type
Distribution Method
DIL
DID
LCOT
T1
PRI
LCOT
GCOT
DID
TIE (E&M)
CO
Default
Available
4. Available Destination
The following destination types can be programmed as DIL, DID, or CLI destinations.
Destination Type
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
ü
Floating Extension no. for SVM
ü
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü
External Pager (TAFAS)
ü
DISA
ü
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
ü
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
ü
5. Intercept Routing
After a call has been directed to its DIL, DID, or CLI destination, the following Intercept Routing features,
if programmed, can redirect the call.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
157
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Type
Description
Details in
No Answer (IRNA)
If a called party does not answer a call within a
preprogrammed time period (Intercept time), the
call is redirected to a preprogrammed destination.
® 9.1.11 Intercept
Routing
Busy
If a called party is already handling another call,
the new call is redirected to a preprogrammed
destination.
DND
If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode,
the call is redirected to a preprogrammed
destination.
No Destination
If a destination is not assigned, the call is
redirected to an operator.
® 9.1.12 Intercept
Routing—No
Destination
PC Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Trunk Property
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Description
Redirects an incoming CO line call or intercom call to a preprogrammed destination when the original
destination does not, or can not, answer the call. There are four types of Intercept Routing, described below.
Type
No Answer (IRNA)
Description
If a called party does not answer a call within a preprogrammed time period
(IRNA Timer), the call is redirected to a preprogrammed intercept
destination.
The assigned intercept destination of the extension port.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→ Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—
Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
® [203] Intercept Time
158
Busy
If a called party is already handling a call, new calls are handled as follows:
– The call is redirected to the preprogrammed Intercept Routing—Busy
destination.
– If an Intercept Routing—Busy destination is not enabled, the caller will
hear a busy tone. However, if the call is made through an LCOT or
T1 [LCOT/GCOT] card, the caller hears a ringback tone.
DND
If a called party is in Do Not Disturb (DND) mode, the call is redirected to
a preprogrammed intercept destination.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Type
No Destination
Description
If a call has no destination (i.e., if a destination is not assigned), the call is
redirected to an operator. (® 9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination)
Intercept Routing redirects calls to destinations based on the original destination of the call, as shown in the
table below. Different intercept destinations can be programmed for each time mode. Note that calls redirected
by Intercept Routing—No Answer/DND are directed to the same destination, while Intercept Routing—Busy
is directed to a separate destination, and the intercept destination for Intercept Routing—No Destination is
always an operator.
When the original destination is:
•
•
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/
T1-OPX)
PS
•
ICD Group
The Available Intercept Destination is:
The destination assigned to the original extension.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—
Intercept Destination
Intercept Destination—When called party
→
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
Busy
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—
Intercept Destination
→
Intercept Destination—When called party
does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Intercept Destination—When Called Party is
→
Busy
® [604] Extension Intercept Destination
The ICD Group Overflow destination assigned to the
group. (® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow)
® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—
Group Settings—Overflow No Answer— Time out
& Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day,
Lunch, Break, Night
® [625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
•
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
The destination assigned to the first extension of the
VM group.
•
DISA*1
If all DISA ports are busy when a call is made using
DISA, one of the following can be selected through
system programming:
• Disable: Busy tone is sent to the caller. When
using an analog CO line, a ringback tone is sent.
• Operator: The call will be redirected to the
operator.
• AA-0, AA-9: The call will be redirected to the
destination assigned to that AA number.
® 7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—
Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all
DISA ports are busy
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
159
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
When the original destination is:
•
•
•
•
*1
*2
The Available Intercept Destination is:
PS Ring Group*2
External Pager (TAFAS)*2
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
Other PBX Extension (TIE with no PBX Code)
Not assignable (Intercept Routing is not available.)
Intercept Routing for DISA will redirect a call only if all of the Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ports are busy. If Intercept Routing
is activated after a call from DISA reaches the destination extension, the Intercept Routing settings assigned to that extension will
be applied.
By assigning the forward destination of a Virtual PS to a PS Ring Group or external pager, and assigning Intercept Routing destinations
to the Virtual PS, calls to these destinations will be redirected to the Intercept Routing destination of the Virtual PS.
Programming Example
<Forward Destination of Virtual PS>
Ext. No. of the Virtual PS FWD Destination
2001
600
...
...
"600" is an example of a
Floating Extension No.
for the External Pager
<Intercept Destination of Virtual PS>
Ext. No. of the Virtual PS
Intercept Destination
Day
Lunch Break
2001
1001
1001
...
...
...
1001
...
Night
...
1001
...
...
...
When extension 2001 is called from another extension or is the first destination
of an incoming CO line call, etc., the call will ring at extension 600 (external pager)
first, and then ring at the intercept destination (extension 1001) after the IRNA
Timer expires.
[Available Intercept Destination]
The following can be used as intercept destinations:
Intercept Destination
160
Availability
Wired Extension (PT/SLT/SIP Extension/T1-OPX)
ü
PS
ü
ICD Group
ü
PS Ring Group
ü
Floating Extension no. for SVM
ü
VM Group (DTMF/DPT)
ü
External Pager (TAFAS)
ü
DISA
ü
Analog/ISDN Remote Maintenance
ü
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
Intercept Destination
Availability
Idle Line Access no. + Phone no.
ü
Trunk Group Access no. + Trunk Group no. + Phone no.
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access with PBX Code)
ü
Extension of Another PBX (via TIE Line, Access without PBX Code)
ü
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the intercept destination is busy or in DND mode and therefore cannot receive the call:
a. When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—No Answer, the call is sent back to the original
destination and continues to ring at the original destination until answered.
b. When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—Busy and arrived through an LCOT or T1
(LCOT/GCOT) card, the call waits at the original destination. If the extension has Call Waiting activated,
the user will hear a call waiting tone. When the call arrived on any other card, the caller hears a busy
tone.
c. When the call was intercepted via Intercept Routing—DND and arrived through an LCOT or T1
(LCOT/GCOT) card, the call waits at the original destination and it rings. When the call arrived through
any other card, the caller hears a busy tone.
If the intercept destination can, but does not, answer the call:
The call continues to ring at the intercept destination until answered.
Intercept Routing—DND on/off
Intercept Routing—DND can each be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system
programming. If enabled, calls will be routed to the appropriate destination.
If disabled, a call to an extension which is in DND mode will be handled as described below, depending
on the type of line carrying the call.
® 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)
a. LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) Card: The caller will hear a ringback tone. If in DND mode, the extension
will ring.
b. All other lines: An outside caller will hear a busy tone and an extension caller will hear a DND tone.
Idle Extension Hunting
If an extension is a member of an idle extension hunting group, calls to that extension will not be redirected
by Intercept Routing—Busy/DND. If the extension is busy or in DND mode, calls to that extension will be
redirected to the next extension in the idle extension hunting group.
Intercept Routing for intercom calls can be enabled or disabled on a system basis.
® 12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous— Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
IRNA Timer
The IRNA timer can be set on a system basis and an extension basis for each time mode (day, lunch,
break, night).
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time— Intercept No Answer
Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
The Intercept Routing destination for each time mode will not apply for Intercept Routing—Busy. When the
original destination is busy, the call is redirected to the Intercept Routing—Busy destination assigned
through system programming. If no destination is assigned the caller will hear a busy tone.
The time modes that are selected for CO line calls arriving at extensions and VM groups are decided on
a tenant basis.
When an intercom, CO line, or DISA call is received by an extension and forwarded (e.g., FWD—All Calls)
to an outside destination, and the outside destination is busy or does not answer, the Intercept Routing
feature can be used. This can be useful when calls are forwarded to cellular phones.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
161
9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination
This feature may not be available depending on the specifications of some CO lines. Also, this feature is
not available when the original call was made from a SIP extension.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters
→Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings
→Overflow No Answer— Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Intercept Destination
→Intercept No Answer Time
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings
→Intercept Destination
→Intercept No Answer Time
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1— DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are
busy
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND.)
→ Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not programmed.)
→ Intercept—Intercept Routing for Extension Call
PT Programming Manual References
[203] Intercept Time
[604] Extension Intercept Destination
[625] Destination for Overflow Time Expiration
Feature Manual References
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
9.1.12 Intercept Routing—No Destination
Description
Directs a CO line call to an operator when the call has no assigned destination.
Conditions
•
•
•
162
Intercept Routing—No Destination on/off
Intercept Routing—No Destination can be enabled or disabled for the entire system, through system
programming. If disabled, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
Note that calls received through an LCOT or T1 (LCOT/GCOT) card will always be directed to an operator,
even when this feature is disabled.
If an operator is not assigned:
The default intercept destination will be the extension connected to the lowest numbered port, on the card
installed in the lowest numbered slot.
Intercept Routing—No Destination also applies to calls from doorphones.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.13 Intercom Call
PC Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM—
12.6 [10-4] Miscellaneous—
programmed.)
PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
Intercept—Routing to Operator - No Destination (Destination is not
PT Programming Manual References
[006] Operator Assignment
Feature Manual References
12.1.5 Operator Features
9.1.13 Intercom Call
Description
An extension user can call another extension user.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Extension Number/Name Assignment
Extension numbers and names are assigned to all extensions. The assigned number and name of the
other extension are shown on display PTs during intercom calls.
DSS Button
It is possible to call another extension by simply pressing the corresponding Direct Station Selection (DSS)
button. Any flexible button can be customized as a DSS button.
Call Directory—Extension Dialing
Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting stored names on the display.
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice
A PT user can select to receive intercom calls by ring tone or by voice, through personal programming
(Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice). If a user selects voice-calling, the calling party talks to the user
immediately after a confirmation tone. Denying voice-calling can also be selected.
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
A caller can change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice) temporarily. By
doing so, ring-calling is switched to voice-calling, or vice versa, at the called party. The called party may
deny voice-calling.
PDN/SDN
It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method when making a call
using a Primary Directory Number (PDN) button or Secondary Directory Number (SDN) button (®
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension).
Tone after Dialing
After dialing an extension number, a user will hear one of the following:
Type
Description
Ringback Tone
Indicates the called party is being called.
Confirmation Tone
Indicates the called party has set voice-calling.
Busy Tone
Indicates the called party is busy.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
163
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
Type
Description
DND Tone
Indicates the called party has set DND.
PC Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature—
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Main— Extension Number
→Main— Extension Name
→Option 3— Intercom Call by Voice
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Number
→ Extension Name
Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice
PT Programming Manual References
[003] Extension Number
[004] Extension Name
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.2.1
1.3.3
1.4.3
3.1.2
Making Calls
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
Directories
Personal Programming
9.1.14 Internal Call Block
Description
Internal calls can be restricted based on the Class of Service (COS) assigned to the caller and to the called
party.
[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]
Caller
Called Party
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS...
Block
Block
Block
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
164
Feature Manual
Block
Block
Block
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
In this example:
a. COS 1 can make calls to all extensions.
b. COS 2 can make calls to COS 1 only. (COS 2 cannot make calls to COS 2.)
c. COS 3 can make calls to COS 3 only.
COS 1
Extn. 100
Extn. 101
COS 2
Extn. 102
COS 3
Extn. 103
Extn. 104
Extn. 105
Extn. 106
Conditions
•
•
•
Internal Call Block also prohibits certain features, such as Walking Extension and Walking COS, from being
performed between certain extensions.
Any extension can make an Operator Call regardless of the Internal Call Block setting of its COS. (®
12.1.5 Operator Features)
Because each doorphone port is assigned a COS, the Internal Call Block feature can restrict certain
extensions from calling certain doorphones. (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call)
PC Programming Manual References
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block— COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call
from Other Extension 1–64
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— COS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— COS
7.6 [5-4] External Relay— COS Number
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Description
This PBX supports the connection of IP proprietary telephones (IP-PTs), which function almost identically to
normal PTs. However, they connect to the PBX over a Local Area Network (LAN), and send and receive calls
using Internet Protocol (IP).
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
165
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
IP-PTs have two Ethernet ports for connection, primary and secondary. They are connected to the PBX through
a network hub or other splitting device, and can have a PC connected to the secondary Ethernet port.
[Connection Example]
PBX
IP-PT
V-IPEXT
Private IP
Network
IP-PT
PC
IP-PT
Primary
Ethernet Port
Secondary
Ethernet Port
Main Office
Branch Office
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A V-IPEXT card is required to use IP-PTs.
IP-PT registration is required through system programming before an IP-PT can be used with the PBX. An
IP-PT cannot be used unless an extension number is assigned. For details on how to register IP-PTs, see
the IP Networking Guide.
The following features cannot be used with an IP-PT:
– XDP (® 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
– Digital XDP (® 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
– OHCA (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement))
– Walking Extension (® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)
– Using PC Phone or PC Console on a connected PC (® 13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone)
The KX-NT265 does not have a secondary Ethernet port.
The following optional devices are available for the KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321) IP-PT:
– KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth® Module
– KX-NT303 Add-on 12 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)
– KX-NT305 Add-on 60 Key Module (not available for KX-NT400 or KX-NT366)
KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module
A Bluetooth wireless headset can be registered to an KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series (except KX-NT321)
IP-PT containing the KX-NT307(PSLP1528) Bluetooth Module through personal programming. When
Headset Mode is off, the Bluetooth headset can be used to answer calls or redial. In this case, Headset
Mode will turn on automatically, and will turn off after you hang up.
This Bluetooth Module is also compatible with KX-DT343/KX-DT346 DPTs.
Calls made using a Bluetooth wireless headset will not be disconnected immediately when the user
wanders out of range. However, if the Bluetooth wireless headset user remains out of range for a specified
time period, the call will be disconnected.
Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX
A KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PT can automatically connect to a secondary PBX, when the primary
PBX becomes disconnected.
Installation Manual References
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
166
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
PC Programming Manual References
3.14 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension
3.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Connection Command
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK)
FEATURES
Description
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is a digital switching and transmission network. ISDN transmits
voice, data, and image in digital format. ISDN lines can be connected to public lines (CO lines), private lines
(QSIG).
1. ISDN Interface and Configuration
Interface Type
Primary Rate Interface
(PRI)
*1
Description
Provides twenty-three 64 kbps B channels for
communication and one 64 kbps D channel for
signaling (23B + D).
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Main—
Port Mode
CO Line, QSIG—
Master, QSIG—
Slave*1
Port Type
2. ISDN Supplementary Services for Public Network
Service
Description
Details in
Direct Inward Dialing
(DID)
Directs a call with a DID number to the
preprogrammed destination.
® 4.1.6 DID (Direct
Inward Dialing)
Calling Line
Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Sends the caller’s telephone number to the
network when making a call. The called party can
see the number on his or her telephone display
before answering the call.
® 3.1.15 CLIP
(Calling Line
Identification
Presentation)
Connected Line
Identification
Presentation (COLP)
Sends the telephone number of the answered
party to the network when answering a call. The
caller can see the number on his telephone
display when the line is connected.
Calling Line
Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Prevents the caller’s CLI from being presented to
the called party.
Connected Line
Identification
Restriction (COLR)
Prevents COLP from being sent by the answered
party.
Caller ID
The PBX receives Caller ID information, such as
the caller’s name and telephone number, when a
call is sent from the network. A display proprietary
telephone (PT) user can see this information
before answering the call.
® 3.1.3 Caller ID
3. Private Networking Connection (QSIG)
Private networking with QSIG is possible using an ISDN line. Each ISDN port must be programmed so that
each ISDN line has a "master" connection and a "slave" connection.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
167
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
En bloc
The PBX sends all of dialed digits at once after the extension user completes dialing. The PBX recognizes
the end of dialing as follows:
– the # key is pressed (programmable).
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
– the dialed number is a preprogrammed telephone number.
5.4 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan
– the inter-digit timer expires.
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
Extension Number
An extension number can be assigned to each ISDN port.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Number
Network Type
Each ISDN port can be set to the requirements of each country/area.
L1 Active Mode and L2 Data Link Mode
The active mode of Layer 1 (L1) and the data link mode of Layer 2 (L2) can be selected individually
(Permanent or Call by Call) for each ISDN port.
TEI Assignment Mode
The Terminal Endpoint Identifier (TEI) assignment mode can be selected for each ISDN port.
Bearer Mode
The bearer mode can be assigned for each ISDN port.
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
PC Programming Manual References
3.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - PRI type
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port
3.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Extension Inter-digit
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2— End of Dial Plan—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode
5.5 [3-1-4] Dialing Plan—Auto Assign
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Main— Extension Number
→Option 7— ISDN Bearer
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— ISDN Bearer
Feature Manual References
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
168
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 10
Features and Configurations—L
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
169
10.1.1 LED Indication
10.1 L
10.1.1 LED Indication
Description
The LED of the Message/Ringer Lamp and the following buttons (Line Status Buttons and Corresponding
Extension Status Button) can indicate line status with a variety of light patterns.
Line Status Buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, INTERCOM, ICD Group, PDN
Corresponding Extension Status Button: DSS, SDN
1. Light Pattern of the Message/Ringer Lamp
[Digital proprietary telephone (DPT)]
• Incoming call from a CO line: Red flashing
• Incoming call from another extension: Green flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
[Analog proprietary telephone (APT)]
• Incoming call: Red flashing
• Message(s) present (no incoming call): Red on
• No message(s) present (no incoming call): Off
170
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
10.1.1 LED Indication
2. Light Pattern of the Line Status Buttons
Line Status
Button:
CO Line Status
Light
Pattern
S-CO
G-CO
Off
Green on
L-CO
Idle
Intercom
Line Status
Incoming Call
Distribution
(ICD) Group
Line Status
INTERCOM
ICD Group
This extension is using the line.
Slow green
flashing
This extension is holding the line.
Moderate
green
flashing
This extension is holding the line using Exclusive Hold
or using the line for an Unattended Conference.
Rapid green
flashing
Red on
Slow red
flashing
Rapid red
flashing
Incoming
Incoming call
call/Privacy
Release
–
Incoming
–
Other
call for
extensions
another
are using
extension/
all CO lines
Another
in the trunk
extension
group.
is using the
line/Another
extension
has the line
on Exclusive
Hold.
–
–
–
Another
extension
is holding
the line.
Incoming call to the ICD group in Ring –
distribution method
This extension
is logged out
of the ICD
group.
–
–
For information on the light patterns of PDN and SDN buttons, refer to 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory
Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension.
3. Light Pattern of the Corresponding Extension Status Button
Corresponding
Extension
Status Button
DSS
Light Pattern
*1
*2
Off
Idle
Red on
Busy/Incoming call*1/DND for CO line calls
Rapid red flashing
Incoming call*2
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is disabled.
Only when Call Pickup by a DSS button is enabled.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
171
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
4. Flashing Light Patterns
1s
Slow Flashing
Moderate Flashing
Rapid Flashing
Conditions
•
•
The incoming CO line call shows on the buttons in the following priority:
ICD Group®S-CO®G-CO®L-CO®PDN®INTERCOM
The light pattern of a DSS button for incoming calls can be set to "Off" through system programming. In
this case, the DSS button light will not indicate the status of the corresponding extension.
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options
→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED
→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—DND LED
→Option 4— DSS Key—DSS key mode for Incoming Call
Feature Manual References
3.1.4 Call Hold
3.1.18 Conference
6.1.7 FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
13.1.14 Privacy Release
10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the method used to answer incoming calls from the following
three line preferences.
Each of these line preferences can be assigned on each extension through personal programming (Preferred
Line Assignment—Incoming).
Type
No Line
172
Feature Manual
Description
Selects a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to
answer an incoming call after you go off-hook.
Document Version 2009-12
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Type
Description
PDN
Answers a call arriving at a Primary Directory Number (PDN)
button simply by going off-hook. This works even when multiple
calls are received simultaneously.
(® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary
Directory Number) Extension)
Prime Line
Answers a call arriving at a CO button (on which the "Prime
Line" is assigned) simply by going off-hook. This works even
when multiple calls are received simultaneously.
Ringing Line (default)
Answers the longest ringing call when multiple calls arrive at
one’s own telephone simply by going off-hook.
Conditions
[Prime Line]
• The priority of the incoming call is as follows:
1. The call arriving at a button on which the "Prime Line" is assigned.
2. The call arriving at the INTERCOM button.
PC Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Incoming Preferred Line
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing
Description
Through personal programming, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can select the preferred method of seizing
a line (Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing) that is used each time the user goes off-hook.
Method
Description
ICM/PDN
When an extension user goes off-hook, an extension line is selected
automatically. If the extension is a PDN extension, the first available
Primary Directory number (PDN) button is selected automatically.
(® 13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension)
Idle Line
When an extension user goes off-hook, an idle CO line is selected
automatically from the assigned trunk groups.
No Line
When an extension user goes off-hook, no line is selected. In order to
make a call, the user must select the desired line manually.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
173
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Method
Prime Line
Description
When an extension user goes off-hook, the preset line is selected
automatically. A prime line can be selected from the Line Access
buttons: S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group.
Conditions
•
•
Line Preference Override
A user can override the preset Line Preference temporarily by pressing the desired Line Access button or
a Memory Dialing button, such as One-touch Dialing, before going off-hook.
To select Idle Line Preference, the trunk groups available to the extension should be programmed on a
COS basis. Also trunk groups available for Idle Line Access should be assigned.
PC Programming Manual References
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
5.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— Outgoing Preferred Line
PT Programming Manual References
[103] Idle Line Access (Local Access)
[500] Trunk Group Number
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Description
When the PBX detects an error, the System Alarm button on the proprietary telephone (PT) of an extension
which is allowed to use this feature through system programming (a maximum of two extensions per PBX),
lights red. Pressing the button will show the error number on the display. If multiple errors occur, the error
number will be displayed in order of highest priority to lowest. The System Alarm button light turns off
automatically after all error numbers have been displayed.
For details about the errors and their solutions, refer to the Installation Manual.
174
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
[Error Example]
ERR #100 (*10001)
(1)
(2)
[Explanation]
Number in the
Example
Item
Description
(1)
Error Code
Shows three-digit error code.
(2)
Sub Code
Shows six-digit sub code (X1YYZZ).
X: Slot type (Physical slot: blank, Virtual slot: *)
1: Cabinet number
YY: Slot number (00–08)
ZZ: Physical port number (01–16)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
System Alarm Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the System Alarm button.
If an extension allowed to utilize this feature uses PC Console or PC Phone, the alarm information will be
displayed on the PC, and can be sent to the preprogrammed destination via PC Console or PC Phone. PC
Console and PC Phone use e-mail to send the information.
The alarm information will be logged on the Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), if enabled through
system programming.
The PBX can be automatically diagnosed at a preprogrammed time everyday.
Installation Manual References
5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
PC Programming Manual References
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
13.1 [11-1] Main
→SMDR— Print Information—Error Log
→Maintenance— Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Set
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Hour
→Maintenance— Daily Test Start Time—Minute
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
175
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
176
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 11
Features and Configurations—M
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
177
11.1.1 Manager Features
11.1 M
11.1.1 Manager Features
Description
An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) is allowed to use certain features which most
extensions cannot. Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions are manager
extensions and can therefore use the following features:
Feature
Manager
Programming
178
Description
Manager
Password
Details in
Manager
Password
Change
Changes the manager password.
Required
–
Verification
Code
Personal
Identification
Number (PIN)
Set
Sets a Verification Code PIN for
each Verification Code.
Required
®
19.1.1 Verificati
on Code Entry
Remote PIN
Clear
Clears the extension PIN of an
extension remotely, or a verification
code PIN. PIN Lock is also unlocked.
Required
®
5.1.6 Extension
PIN (Personal
Identification
Number)
®
19.1.1 Verificati
on Code Entry
Remote
Extension
Dial Lock
Sets or cancels the Extension Dial
Lock on an extension remotely.
Required
®
5.1.4 Extension
Dial Lock
Dial Tone Transfer
Changes the Toll Restriction (TRS)
level of an extension temporarily,
allowing the extension user to make
a normally unauthorized call.
Not
required
® 4.1.5 Dial
Tone Transfer
Outgoing Message (OGM)
Records and plays back OGMs.
Not
required
® 12.1.2 OGM
(Outgoing
Message)
Time Service
Switches the time mode manually.
Not
required
® 17.1.5 Time
Service
BGM—External
Turns the External BGM on and off.
Not
required
® 2.1.1 BGM
(Background
Music)
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES
Feature
NDSS Monitor Release
Description
Removes the monitor function from
an NDSS button.
Manager
Password
Not
required
Details in
®
13.1.17 Private
Network
Features—
NDSS (Network
Direct Station
Selection)
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs regularly.
•
Manager Password
Only one manager password can be assigned per PBX.
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager
13.1 [11-1] Main—Password— Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
PT Programming Manual References
[112] Manager Password
[511] Manager Assignment
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
2.1 Manager Service Features
3.2.2 Manager Programming
11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES
Description
An extension user can store frequently dialed numbers in the PBX extension data and/or the PBX system data.
A stored number is dialed automatically with a simple operation.
1. Features
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
179
11.1.2 MEMORY DIALING FEATURES
Feature
Storing Method
Details in
®
12.1.4 One-touc
h Dialing
One-touch Dialing
•
•
Last Number Redial
(Outgoing Call Log)
The last or most recent dialed numbers are
automatically stored.
®
15.1.1 Redial,
Last Number
Speed
Dialing
Personal
•
•
•
® 16.1.6 Speed
Dialing,
Personal
System
System Programming
® 16.1.7 Speed
Dialing, System
Quick Dialing
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
® 14.1.1 Quick
Dialing
Hot Line
•
•
•
® 8.1.6 Hot
Line
Incoming Call Log
Incoming call information is automatically stored.
Personal Programming
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Personal Programming
Personal Operation with the Feature Number
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
Personal Programming
Personal Operation with the Feature Number
System Programming
(PC Programming only)
® 3.1.5 Call
Log, Incoming
2. Valid Input
Displayed while
Entering
Input
180
Description
0–9/ /#
0–9/ /#
Store digits, and # by pressing the
corresponding buttons.
PAUSE (Pause)
P
Store a dialing pause by pressing the
PAUSE button. (® 13.1.4 Pause
Insertion)
FLASH/RECALL
(Hooking)*1
F
Store a flash/recall signal (EFA mode) by
pressing the FLASH/RECALL button at
the beginning of the number. (®
5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))
INTERCOM (Secret)*1
[]
Conceal all or part of the number by
pressing the INTERCOM button at the
beginning and at the end of the number
to be concealed. It is programmable
whether the concealed part will be shown
on the SMDR. (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station
Message Detail Recording))
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Displayed while
Entering
Input
TRANSFER (Transfer)*1
*1
T
Description
Store a transfer command by pressing
the TRANSFER button at the beginning
of the number (used only for One-touch
Dialing). (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer)
[Example] Storing "T + 305"=
Transferring a call to extension 305.
Available only when in the system/personal programming mode
[Secret Dialing Example]
When storing the number "9-123-456-7890", to conceal the telephone number "123-456-7890",
Enter 9
INTERCOM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0
INTERCOM .
Note
•
•
It is possible to store a Memory Dialing feature number at the beginning of Memory Dialing
numbers.
It is possible to store several feature numbers in one Memory Dialing location.
Conditions
•
CO Line Access by Memory Dialing
A specific CO Line Access number can be stored along with the telephone number in Memory Dialing.
However, if Memory Dialing is done after selecting a CO line, the stored CO Line Access number is ignored
and the telephone number is sent using the selected CO line.
11.1.3 Message Waiting
Description
When an extension user calls another extension that does not or cannot answer the call, he or she can leave
a Message Waiting notification. The appropriate button or lamp on the called extension user’s telephone will
light, indicating that a call was missed or a message recorded by the Voice Processing System (VPS) or the
Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature is waiting. A Message button can be used to call the caller back or
listen to the message.
When a message is left for a proprietary telephone (PT), the Message button on it lights or the Message/Ringer
Lamp turns red. Pressing the lit Message button while on-hook shows the caller’s information as shown below:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
181
11.1.3 Message Waiting
[Example]
105:Tom Smith
--- Extension no. and name of who left the message
Message buttons
This extension
ICD Group
Other extension*
* This button is useful, for
example, when a secretary
checks messages left for the
boss (Boss & Secretary Feature).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Message Button
Any flexible button can be assigned as a Message button. This button can be used on a PT which does
not have the MESSAGE button (fixed button), or can be used on any PT to access messages left for another
extension or for an incoming call distribution (ICD) group.
Distinctive Dial Tone for Message Waiting
If Distinctive Dial mode is enabled, dial tone 4 will be sent to an extension when a message has been left
on the extension. (® 4.1.4 Dial Tone)
It is possible to leave a Message Waiting notification while hearing a ringback tone, busy tone, or DND
tone.
Messages are always left on the original destination extension, regardless of that extension’s FWD settings.
(® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
Both the calling extension and the called extension can cancel a notification after it has been left.
If the extension that received a notification calls back the extension that sent the notification, and the call
is answered, the notification will be cleared automatically. However, if a voice message has been left on
the VPS, whether the notification is cleared or not depends on the VPS settings.
If a voice message has been left on the VPS for a SIP extension (except KX-HGT100), the lamp will not
turn on.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature— Message Waiting Set
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 3— Dial Tone—Distinctive Dial Tone
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
182
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
11.1.4 Music on Hold
Operating Manual References
1.3.42 Message Waiting
11.1.4 Music on Hold
Description
Music or other audio can be played to a party that has been put on hold. The following audio sources are
available:
a. External music source
b. Internal music source
c. Outgoing Message (OGM)
d. Tone
Music Source Assignment
Seven BGMs are available to assign for Music on Hold. An external music source or one of two internal music
sources can be assigned to BGM 1. In addition, 6 OGMs can be assigned to BGMs 2 through 7.
For tenant users, each tenant can select one of the BGMs or the tone to use for Music on Hold.
Conditions
[General]
• Hardware Requirement: User-supplied music source (when an external music source is assigned).
• Volume Control
•
It is possible to change the volume of an internal and/or external music source.
For tenants, the type of call determines which tenant's music source is used, as follows:
Type
Incoming Intercom Calls/Outgoing
Calls
Incoming CO Line Calls
Music Source
Selected based on the tenant setting to which the
extension user belongs.
Selected based on the tenant setting of the distribution
method (DIL/DID).
[Using OGMs for BGM]
• This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR card. To increase the capacity of the feature, it is
•
possible to add an ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
To use OGMs for BGM, the corresponding ESVM card/block's SVM Feature must be disabled, and MSG
Feature (OGM) enabled.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
183
11.1.4 Music on Hold
•
When an OGM is assigned to a BGM, the channel for that OGM becomes occupied and cannot be used
for other OGM features, even when no calling parties are listening to Music on Hold.
OPB3 Card
IPCMPR Card
OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled
ESVM4 Card
SVM Enabled/OGM Disabled
OGM for BGM2
OGM for
other features
Only cards with
OGM Enabled and
SVM Disabled can
be used for Music on
Hold.
OPB3 Card
ESVM4 Card
SVM Enabled/OGM Enabled
SVM Block 1
SVM
Block 1
SVM Block 2
SVM
Block 2
OGM
for other
features
ESVM4 Card
OGM Enabled/SVM Disabled
OGM for BGM3
OGM for BGM4
Empty Slot
OGM for
other features
Empty Slot
Empty Slot
Installation Manual References
3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
PC Programming Manual References
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
→ SVM Feature
→ MSG Feature
3.36 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property
→ SVM Feature
→ MSG Feature
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH— MOH—MOH (Music On Hold)
PT Programming Manual References
[710] Music Source Selection for BGM
[711] Music on Hold
Feature Manual References
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
17.1.3 Tenant Service
184
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
11.1.5 Mute
11.1.5 Mute
Description
During a conversation, a proprietary telephone (PT) user can disable the built-in microphone or the handset
microphone to consult privately with others while listening to the other party on the phone through the built-in
speaker or the handset receiver. The user can hear the other party’s voice during Mute. Only your voice will
be muted.
Conditions
•
This feature is available on all PTs that have the AUTO ANS/MUTE button.
Operating Manual References
1.3.43 Mute
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
185
11.1.5 Mute
186
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 12
Features and Configurations—O
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
187
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
12.1 O
12.1.1 Off-hook Monitor
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can let others listen to the user’s conversation through the built-in speaker,
during a conversation using the handset.
Conditions
•
Compatible Telephone
– KX-DT300 series
– KX-T7600 series
– KX-T7400 series (display PT only)
– KX-NT series
To enable this feature, system programming is required. If disabled, hands-free conversation is performed
instead.
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1—
PT Operation—Off Hook Monitor for KX-T74xx/T76xx
Operating Manual References
1.3.44 Off-hook Monitor
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Description
An extension assigned as a manager (manager extension) can record outgoing messages (OGMs) for the
following features:
Feature
188
Usage
Details in
Direct Inward System
Access (DISA)
When a call arrives on a DISA line, the caller will
hear a message.
® 4.1.8 DISA
(Direct Inward
System Access)
Queuing Feature
If assigned in the Queuing Time Table of the
incoming call distribution (ICD) group, callers
waiting in a queue will hear a message.
® 9.1.6 ICD Group
Features—Queuing
Timed Reminder
When answering the Timed Reminder Alarm, the
user will hear a message.
® 17.1.4 Timed
Reminder
Music on Hold
Extensions put on hold will hear a message or
recorded music.
® 11.1.4 Music on
Hold
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
Feature
Usage
Background Music
(BGM)
Details in
Extensions can listen to music through their
built-in speaker.
® 2.1.1 BGM
(Background
Music)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR card. To increase the capacity of the feature it is
possible to add an MSG4 card or ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
Number of Messages and Recording Time
The PBX can record a maximum of 64 messages.
A floating extension number is assigned to each outgoing message (OGM) (default: 5 + two-digit OGM
number).
The SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR card allows two messages to play simultaneously, and one MSG4
or ESVM4 card allows four messages to play simultaneously. Increasing the number of cards does not
increase the total recording time or the number of messages; it increases the number of messages that
can be played simultaneously.
[Example]
Up to 4 messages can be
played simultaneously to
callers.
Up to 8 messages can be
played simultaneously to
callers.
PBX
PBX
MSG
Card
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
MSG
Card
Total message recording time:
8 minutes max.
The maximum recording time for each card depends on the recording quality and the type of card used,
as follows:
Recording Quality
Recording Time with the IPCMPR/
ESVM4 Card
Recording Time with the MSG4
Card
High
(default)
about 20 minutes
about 8 minutes
Middle
about 60 minutes
about 8 minutes
Low
about 120 minutes
about 8 minutes
When cards of different types are installed, the shortest recording time is used. For example, if an
ESVM4 card and an MSG4 card are installed, the maximum recording time at default will be about 8
minutes.
Note
When an additional MSG/ESVM card is added, it is blank—all necessary messages will need to be
stored in the new card. This can be done in two ways:
a. By installing the new MSG/ESVM card then recording each message again. The PBX will
automatically store the new recordings in each card.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
189
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
b. By transferring messages from the PBX to a PC using Maintenance Console, then transferring
•
•
them back to the PBX with the new MSG/ESVM card installed.
The same message can be played to multiple callers simultaneously.
Recording Methods
a. Record voice messages through the extension telephone.
b. Transfer prerecorded voice messages from an external audio source to the PBX via an external music
port.
Note
Record voice messages only; avoid the recording of music.
However, it is possible to record music when using the IPCMPR/ESVM card in High Recording Quality
mode.
•
•
•
After recording messages, a manager extension can also play them back for confirmation.
A progress tone is sent to a manager extension before recording messages for a preprogrammed time
period, or while clearing a prerecorded message assigned to a floating extension number.
When a manager tries to record a message, he or she will hear a ringback tone if a message channel is
in use. When all ports of the card(s) become idle, the manager will hear the progress tone for a
preprogrammed time period, then the PBX will automatically switch to the recording mode.
Installation Manual References
3.3.1
3.7.1
3.7.5
3.7.6
IPCMPR Card
OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
MSG4 Card (KX-TDA0191)
ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)
PC Programming Manual References
2.6.6 Utility—Message File Transfer PC to PBX
2.6.7 Utility—Message File Transfer PBX to PC
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
3.36 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— MSG Feature
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf— DISA—Progress Tone Continuation Time
before Recording Message
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— OGM Record / Clear / Playback
5.14 [3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Queuing Time Table— Queuing Sequence—Sequence 01–
16
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Recording Mode
7.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message— Floating Extension Number
PT Programming Manual References
[631] Sequences in Queuing Time Table
[730] Outgoing Message (OGM) Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
190
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
Operating Manual References
2.1.3 OGM (Outgoing Messages)
12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement)
Description
An extension user can talk with a busy extension through the built-in speaker and microphone of the called
party’s proprietary telephone (PT). If the existing call is using a handset, a second conversation is made using
the speakerphone and microphone so that the called extension can talk to both parties.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
This feature is available when the called extension uses one of the following telephones:
– KX-T7625, KX-T7630, KX-T7633, KX-T7636, KX-DT333, KX-DT343, KX-DT346
– KX-T7436
– KX-T7235
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) cannot be used when:
a. The OHCA mode of the caller’s COS is set to "Disable".
b. The called extension’s telephone is not compatible with this OHCA.
c. The called extension is a digital proprietary telephone (DPT) which is connected via a USB Module to
a computer running PC Console or PC Phone.
d. The called extension is in a Digital XDP connection.
In these cases, a call waiting tone is sent to the called extension. (® 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone)
While an extension is receiving an OHCA, if the extension user places the current CO line call on hold or
transfers the current intercom call or CO line call, the OHCA will become disabled and the calling extension
will hear a ringback tone.
While an extension is receiving an OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on hold,
the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.
PC Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
191
12.1.5 Operator Features
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) user can make a call or access a feature with a one-touch operation. This is
possible by storing the number, such as an extension number, telephone number, or feature number in a
One-touch Dialing button.
Conditions
•
•
One-touch Dialing Button
Any flexible button can be customized as a One-touch Dialing button.
Full One-touch Dialing
There is no need to go off-hook before pressing a One-touch Dialing button.
PC Programming Manual References
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— Flexible Button Programming Mode
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Dial (for One-touch)
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.46 One-touch Dialing
12.1.5 Operator Features
Description
Any extension or Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) group can be designated as an operator.
This PBX supports the following types of operators:
Type
PBX operator
192
Feature Manual
Description
An extension or ICD group can be assigned as a PBX operator for each
time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
Document Version 2009-12
12.1.5 Operator Features
Type
Tenant operator
Description
An extension or incoming call distribution group can be assigned as a
tenant operator. The tenant operator may be the extension or ICD group
of another tenant.
[Example] Extension 110 in tenant 1 is the tenant operator of tenant 3.
Operator Call:
An extension user can call an operator by dialing the preprogrammed Operator Call feature number. The
destination of the Operator Call depends on the following:
– If the Tenant Service is not in use:
The call is directed to the PBX operator according to the corresponding time mode.
– If the Tenant Service is in use:
The call is directed to the extension’s tenant operator. If a tenant operator is not assigned, the call is directed
to the PBX operator. In this case, the current time mode of the extension’s tenant is used to determine the
PBX operator that the call is directed to.
If neither a tenant operator nor a PBX operator is assigned, the caller will hear a reorder tone.
Conditions
•
•
An extension or ICD group can be assigned as both a tenant operator and the PBX operator.
The same tenant operator can be assigned as the operator for multiple tenants.
PC Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM— PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
PT Programming Manual References
[006] Operator Assignment
Feature Manual References
17.1.3 Tenant Service
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
193
12.1.5 Operator Features
194
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 13
Features and Configurations—P
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
195
13.1.1 Paging
13.1 P
13.1.1 Paging
Description
An extension user can make a voice announcement to several people at once.
The announcement is heard through the built-in speakers of proprietary telephones (PTs) and/or an external
pager (loudspeaker) which belongs to a paging group.
The paged person can answer the page from a nearby telephone.
It is possible to page with a call on hold in order to transfer the call.
Paging Deny:
It is possible to deny being paged on an extension basis.
Paging Group
Each paging group can consist of extension user groups and an external pager. One extension user group or
external pager can belong to several paging groups.
(® 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES)
[Example]
Paging Group 01
Extension User
Group 1
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Paging Group 02
Paging Group 03
Extension User
Group 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
Pager
[Programming Example]
Paging Group
No.
Extension User Group No. *1
001
002
003
...
External
Pager No. *2
01
02
03
04
05
ü: Constituent
*1
*2
196
® 5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
or
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
® [640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
® 5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
® [641] External Pagers of a Paging Group
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.1 Paging
Conditions
•
Extensions which cannot be paged are:
– Portable stations (PSs)
– Single line telephones (SLTs)
– Ringing or busy PTs
– PTs in Paging Deny mode
– PTs in Paging DND mode
– IP-PTs connected to a V-IPEXT card, that are assigned to extension user group 31 (default)*1
These extensions cannot be paged, but can answer a page.
*1
•
•
•
Changing the extension user group of the extension, allows it to receive pages. However, doing so may affect the number of
simultaneous IP extension and IP CO line calls available on the IPCMPR card.
External Pager Priority
An external pager can be used with the following priorities:
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) ® Paging ® Background Music (BGM)
(® 17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station), ® 2.1.1 BGM (Background Music))
Volume Control
The volume level of pages heard from PTs and the external pager can be changed through system
programming.
Paging DND
When Do Not Disturb (DND) (® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)) is set for incoming calls, it is programmable
whether an extension receives paging through system programming.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Group Paging
→ Group Paging Answer
→ Paging Deny Set / Cancel
4.18 [2-9] System Options
→Option 1— PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension
→Option 3— Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH
→ Paging—EPG (External Pager)
→ Paging—Paging Level from PT Speaker
5.9 [3-4] Paging Group
5.10 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting
5.11 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
PT Programming Manual References
[640] Extension User Groups of a Paging Group
[641] External Pagers of a Paging Group
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.47 Paging
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
197
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Description
By connecting telephones in parallel, you can increase the number of telephones connected to the PBX without
adding additional extension cards.
Both wired and wireless telephones can be connected in parallel. Single line telephones (SLTs), analog
proprietary telephones (APTs), and digital proprietary telephones (DPTs) can be connected to other telephones
or connectors, allowing up to three telephones to be connected to the PBX through just one extension port.
Additionally, portable stations (PSs) can be linked to other telephones wirelessly and used as "paired"
extensions.
The different type of parallel connections are described below.
Features
Parallel Mode
EXtra Device Port
(XDP) Mode
Digital XDP
Descriptions
Allows an SLT to be connected to an APT or DPT
which is connected to a Super Hybrid port of the
PBX.
When parallel mode is enabled, the two telephones
function as follows:
• Both share the extension number of the
telephone connected directly to the PBX (main
telephone).
• Either telephone can make or answer a call.
Allows an SLT to be connected to a DPT which is
connected to a Super Hybrid port of the PBX.
Unlike parallel mode, XDP mode allows each
telephone to act as an independent extension with
its own extension number. (® 5.1.7 Extension Port
Configuration)
Allows a DPT to be connected to another DPT
which is connected to a DPT port or a Super Hybrid
port of the PBX. The DPT that is connected directly
to the PBX is called the "master DPT", and the DPT
connected to the master DPT is called the "slave
DPT".
Similar to XDP mode, each DPT acts as a
independent extension with its own extension
number.
If a master DPT is connected to the PBX by a Super
Hybrid port (not a DPT port), a third telephone (SLT)
can also be in parallel or XDP mode with the master
DPT.
Digital XDP connection allows the number of DPTs
that the PBX supports to increase.
Connections
APT/DPT + SLT
PBX
SLT
DPT
Extn. 101 Extn. 101
APT
Extn. 102
SLT
Extn. 102
DPT + SLT
PBX
DPT
SLT
Extn. 101 Extn. 105
DPT + DPT
PBX
Master
Slave
DPT
DPT
Extn. 101 Extn. 201
DPT + DPT + SLT
PBX
Master
Slave
DPT
DPT
Extn. 101 Extn. 201
SLT
Extn. 101 (in Parallel Mode)
or
Extn. 105 (in XDP Mode)
198
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
Features
Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode
Descriptions
For information on this type of parallel connection,
refer to the Wireless XDP Parallel mode feature.
(® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
Connections
APT/DPT/SLT + PS
PBX
PT
Extn. 101
PS
Extn. 101
SLT
Extn. 102
PS
Extn. 102
Conditions
[APT + SLT]
• If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is on a call, a three-party call is established. If one user goes
•
•
on-hook, the other user continues the call.
An extension user cannot originate a call from the SLT if the APT is:
– playing background music (BGM)
– receiving a paging announcement over the built-in speaker.
The SLT will always ring for incoming calls (if its ringer is turned on). It cannot be programmed to not ring.
[DPT + SLT]
• When in the parallel mode, XDP mode of the Super Hybrid port should be turned off through system
•
•
programming.
Whether the SLT rings for incoming calls is programmable.
Ring on: Both telephones ring when a call is received, except for when the digital proprietary telephone
(DPT) is in Hands-free Answerback mode (® 8.1.1 Hands-free Answerback) or voice-calling mode
(Alternate Receiving Ring/Voice) (® 9.1.13 Intercom Call).
Ring off: Only the DPT rings when a call is received, however, the SLT can be used to answer the call.
Both telephones cannot engage in calls simultaneously. If one telephone goes off-hook while the other is
on a call, the call is switched to the telephone that goes off-hook. Note, however, that the call will not be
switched when the telephone is:
a. Being monitored by another extension (® 3.1.6 Call Monitor).
b. Receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement)) or Whisper OHCA (® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).
c. On a conference call (® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ® 13.1.14 Privacy
Release).
d. Using Live Call Screening (LCS) or Two-way Record is activated (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration).
[DPT + DPT]
• Available Telephones
•
KX-DT300 series and KX-T7600 series, except KX-T7640
The following features cannot be used on either the master or slave DPT:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
199
13.1.3 Password Security
a. OHCA: A call waiting tone will be heard even if the OHCA feature is set.
b. USB Module/Bluetooth Module: The DPTs will not function properly if a USB Module or Bluetooth
Module is attached to either DPT. Do not connect a USB Module or Bluetooth Module to either of the
DPTs.
Note
To cancel a Digital XDP connection, disconnect the slave DPT from the master, then disconnect the and
reconnect the master DPT to the PBX.
[DPT + DPT + SLT]
• When an SLT is connected to the slave DPT in parallel mode, the SLT acts as a parallel extension of the
master DPT. If connected in XDP mode, the SLT acts as an independent extension.
Installation Manual References
1.3.3 System Capacity
3.8.2 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
3.8.3 Digital EXtra Device Port (Digital XDP) Connection
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
→ XDP Mode
→ Parallel Telephone Ringing
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel
PT Programming Manual References
[600] EXtra Device Port (XDP) Mode
Operating Manual References
1.3.48 Paralleled Telephone
13.1.3 Password Security
Description
To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the
PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of
programming that each user is able to perform.
The following types of system passwords are available:
Password
PT
200
Description
Format
System Password
(PT) for User
Used to access user-level PT programming. The specific
PT programming items that may be programmed at user
level can be selected through system programming item.
System Password
(PT) for
Administrator
Used to access administrator-level PT programming. All PT
programming settings are available.
Feature Manual
4 – 10
digits
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
Password
PC
Description
System Password
(PC) for User
Used with the user-level programmer code to access
user-level PC programming. The installer can specify
which system programming settings are available.
System Password
(PC) for
Administrator
Used with the administrator-level programmer code to
access administrator-level PC programming. The installer
can specify which system programming settings are
available.
System Password
(PC) for Installer
Used with the installer-level programmer code to access
installer-level PC programming. All system programming
settings are available.
Format
4 – 10
characters
CAUTION
To the Administrator or Installer regarding the system password
1. Please provide all system passwords to the customer.
2. To avoid unauthorized access and possible abuse of the PBX, keep the passwords secret, and inform the
customer of the importance of the passwords, and the possible dangers if they become known to others.
3. The PBX has default passwords preset. For security, change these passwords the first time that you
program the PBX.
4. Change the passwords periodically.
5. It is strongly recommended that passwords of 10 numbers or characters be used for maximum protection
against unauthorized access. For a list of numbers and characters that can be used in system passwords,
refer to Section 1.1.2 Entering Characters in the PC Programming Manual.
6. If a system password is forgotten, it can be found by loading a backup of the system data into a PC, and
checking the password using the Maintenance Console software. If you do not have a backup of the system
data, you must reset the PBX to its factory defaults and reprogram it. Therefore, we strongly recommend
maintaining a backup of the system data. For more information on how to back up the system data, refer
to the PC Programming Manual.
However, as system passwords can be extracted from backup copies of the system data file, do not allow
unauthorized access to these files.
PC Programming Manual References
1.1.2 Entering Characters
2.1.2 Access Levels
13.1 [11-1] Main—Password
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
13.1.4 Pause Insertion
Description
Pressing a PAUSE button inserts a preprogrammed Pause time between digits of a user-dialed number before
the number is dialed out, allowing certain numbers separated with a pause to be used to access certain features
(e.g., access codes, seizing idle lines, etc.).
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
201
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
When a pause is needed, pauses must be inserted manually (pressing the PAUSE button) in all cases, except
for the following access codes where a pause is automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code
and the subsequent digits:
a. Host PBX Access code (® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from
a Host PBX))
b. Special Carrier Access code (® 16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code)
c. Second Dial Tone Waiting code
Conditions
•
•
•
•
The length of a pause is programmable for each CO line.
Numbers stored in Memory Dialing can contain pauses.
When a Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialed after seizing a CO line, a preprogrammed number of
pauses are inserted after the code.
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when
the ARS mode is enabled. (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
PC Programming Manual References
3.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port— Pause Time
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Pause Time
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— During Conversation—Pause Signal Time
8.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone
PT Programming Manual References
[416] LCOT Pause Time
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
Description
Panasonic PC Console/PC Phone is supported by a PC with a KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/
KX-T7636 DPT (equipped with USB module) through USB ports. By using the KX-TDA0350 PC Phone or
KX-TDA0300 PC Console CTI application, users can enjoy many PBX features while utilizing the benefits of
a CTI solution. PC Console gives users access to certain administrative level features that are not available
with PC Phone.
202
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.5 PC Console/PC Phone
The extensions that use PC Console must be assigned through system programming. A CTI server is not
required to use PC Console/PC Phone.
PBX
USB
DPT
PC
Along with many PBX features, PC Phone and PC Console offer many specific features, including the following:
• Phone Book:
A list of telephone numbers including detailed information pertaining to each entry. This feature allows the
user to make calls and send e-mails to each entry.
• Outlook Integration:
The Microsoft® Outlook® Address Book can be integrated to be used with the PC Phone or PC Console.
• Pop-up Screen:
An image containing information about the caller appears when a call is received.
• Voice Memo:
Conversations are recorded at any time and can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.
• Text Memo:
A user can type a short message during a conversation which can be saved, sent by e-mail, etc.
[For PC Phone Only]
• TAM (Telephone Answering Machine):
•
If a call is not answered within a preprogrammed time, callers can leave a message after hearing a greeting
message.
Message:
TAM messages are played back and/or automatically transferred by phone or by e-mail.
[For PC Console Only]
• Incoming Group Screen:
Names, extension numbers, and the status (e.g., busy) of each extension can be monitored on a single
screen. Calls can also be made and received on this screen.
Conditions
•
Hardware Requirements: KX-DT343/KX-DT346 or KX-T7633/KX-T7636 DPT and USB Module
Installation Manual References
3.8.4 First Party Call Control CTI Connection
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
→ DPT Type—Type
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
203
13.1.6 PC Programming
→
DPT Type—Location No.
PT Programming Manual References
[601] Terminal Device Assignment
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
13.1.6 PC Programming
Description
Although many PBX features can be programmed using a proprietary telephone (PT) (® 13.1.30 PT
Programming), a PC connected to the PBX can use the Maintenance Console software to program in further
detail. System programming, diagnosis, and data upload/download can be performed either through on-site
programming or remote programming.
1. On-site Programming: Programming that is performed using an on-site PC connected directly to the PBX.
2. Remote Programming: Programming that is performed using an off-site PC that connects to the PBX via
a CO line.
1. Connection Methods for On-site Programming
Method
*1
204
Required
Hardware
Description
Serial Interface
(RS-232C) port
The PC is connected to the PBX via the Serial Interface
(RS-232C port) of the PBX.
–
USB
The PC is connected to the PBX via the USB port of a USB
Module attached to a digital proprietary telephone (DPT).
USB Module
LAN
The PC is connected to the PBX via the MNT port of the
IPCMPR card.
IPCMPR card
Modem
(connected to
SLT port)*1
The PC is connected to a modem, which is then connected to
an SLT port of the PBX. Use the modem to dial the floating
extension number (default: 599) assigned to the analog remote
maintenance feature to access the PBX.
RMT card and
user-supplied
modem
Remote access must be enabled through system programming when performing on-site programming via modem.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.6 PC Programming
2. Connection Methods for Remote Programming
Method
Description
Off-site modem
Call the PBX and have the call directed to the floating extension
number (default: 599) assigned to the analog remote
maintenance feature using one of the following methods:
Required
Hardware
RMT card and
user-supplied
modem
Direct Access: Using the off-site modem, dial a telephone
number with the modem which will direct your call (via Direct
In Line (DIL) or Direct Inward Dialing (DID) distribution) to the
floating extension number assigned to the analog remote
maintenance feature.
DISA: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number which will
direct your call (via DIL or DID distribution) to a floating
extension number used by the Direct Inward System Access
(DISA) feature (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access)). Next, dial the floating extension number assigned to
the analog remote maintenance feature. Then access the PBX
with the modem.
Call Transfer: Using a telephone, dial a telephone number
which will direct your call to an operator (or other extension of
the PBX) and request to be transferred to the floating extension
number assigned to the analog remote maintenance feature
(® 3.1.10 Call Transfer). Then access the PBX with the
modem.
On-site modem
The modem is connected to the Serial Interface (RS-232C port)
and also to either an extension port which is assigned as the
DIL/DID destination, or to a CO line directly. AT commands can
be sent to the modem automatically when it is connected to the
Serial Interface (RS-232C port) and can be programmed
beforehand, through system programming, to initialize the
modem. AT commands can also be sent manually in the PT
system programming mode.
User-supplied
modem
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Only one system programming session is permitted at a time. Access will be denied when a second party
tries to perform system programming, including system programming via a PT.
Programmer Code and Password for System Programming
To access system programming, a programmer code and its password must be entered. For more details,
see Section 13.1.3 Password Security.
Remote Programming Limitation
It is possible to disable remote access through system programming. Disabling this feature will also disable
the ability to perform on-site programming via modem.
If an extension user sets Walking Extension at the same time that the extension’s data is being programmed
through PC programming, the data may not be transferred properly. (® 20.1.2 Walking Extension)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
205
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Installation Manual References
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.3.3 RMT Card (KX-TDA0196)
4.1 Overview
4.2 PC Connection
4.3 Installation of the Maintenance Console
PC Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main
→RS-232C— External Modem Command—Automatic Initialization
→RS-232C— External Modem Command—Manual Initialization 1–Manual Initialization 5
→Remote
→Password— System Password - PC Programming—User Level
→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Administrator Level
→Password— System Password - PC Programming—Installer Level
PT Programming Manual References
[801] External Modem Control
[810] Remote Programming
[811] Modem Floating Extension Number
[812] ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line)
13.1.3 Password Security
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory
Number) Extension
Description
Primary Directory Number (PDN) buttons and Secondary Directory Number (SDN) buttons are ideal for use
between bosses and secretaries. When a call (intercom or CO) arrives at a PDN button on the boss’s extension,
the call will ring and the LED of the SDN button will flash at the secretary’s extension as well, indicating that
an incoming call is arriving at the boss’s extension. In addition, caller information (e.g., Caller ID) of the incoming
call will appear on the secretary’s extension. The secretary can answer the call for the boss by simply pressing
the SDN button. Delayed ringing can be set for a PDN or SDN button.
A secretary can hold a call answered on the SDN button, and the boss can retrieve the held call simply by
pressing the PDN button, like when answering a call with an S-CO button. In addition, a secretary can transfer
calls from an SDN button or other button (e.g., S-CO button) to the boss’s extension with a simple operation,
like when using a DSS button.
An extension can have several SDN buttons, each registered to a different boss’s extension. However, only
one SDN button can be registered for a single boss at each extension. An extension can have up to eight PDN
buttons. PDN buttons can simplify the use of an extension because both intercom and CO line calls can be
made and received at a PDN button.
206
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Making Calls with an SDN Button
When Standard SDN Key mode is assigned to an SDN extension (secretary) through COS programming, SDN
extensions (secretaries) can make calls for PDN extensions (bosses) on the SDN button. For example, a boss
can ask a secretary to make a call and put the call on hold, after which, the boss can retrieve the held call.
Through COS programming, it is possible to allow an SDN extension to make calls using the COS of the PDN
extension. All other settings that are available when using the Walking COS feature are also applied (®
20.1.1 Walking COS).
SDN Direct Dial
An SDN extension can call a PDN extension or transfer a call to a PDN extension using an SDN button.
In this case:
– Only the PDN extension rings (i.e., other SDN extensions do not ring).
– The delayed ringing and DND settings of the PDN extension are ignored.
Depending on the mode selected through COS programming, SDN Direct Dial is performed in one of two ways,
as follows:
– Enhanced DSS Key mode: pressing the SDN button once.
– Standard SDN Key mode: pressing the SDN button twice (a dial tone is heard the first time the SDN button
is pressed).
Calls answered using the SDN button can be transferred to the PDN extension by simply pressing the SDN
button once, regardless of the mode.
LED Indication
The LED patterns and the corresponding status of PDN and SDN buttons are as follows:
Light Pattern
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
Off
This extension is idle.
The corresponding PDN extension is idle.
Green on
The extension is on a call using the PDN
button.
The extension is on a call using the SDN
button.
Slow green
flashing
A call is on hold using the PDN button.
A call is on hold using the SDN button.
Moderate
green
flashing
•
•
•
Rapid green
flashing
Document Version 2009-12
A call on a PDN button is on
Exclusive Call Hold or consultation
hold.
The PDN extension is adding a
member to a conference or using the
line for an Unattended Conference,
on a PDN button.
An incoming call is arriving at this
extension.
•
A call answered using the SDN button
is on Exclusive Call Hold or consultation
hold.
The SDN extension is adding a member
to a conference, or using the line for an
Unattended Conference.
Receiving Hold Recall or automatic callback
ringing from a call answered using the SDN
button.
Feature Manual
207
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
Light Pattern
PDN Button Status
SDN Button Status
Red on
A corresponding SDN extension is:
• on a call.
• holding the line using Exclusive Call
Hold or consultation hold.
• adding a member to a conference.
• using the line for an Unattended
Conference.
• receiving Hold Recall or automatic
callback ringing.
The corresponding PDN extension or
another corresponding SDN extension is:
• on a call.
• holding the line using Exclusive Call
Hold or consultation hold.
• adding a member to a conference.
• using the line for an Unattended
Conference.
• receiving an incoming call directed only
to the PDN extension (e.g., callback
ringing).
Slow red
flashing
A call is on hold by a corresponding SDN
extension.
A call is on hold by the corresponding PDN
extension or another corresponding SDN
extension.
Rapid red
flashing
A call is arriving at an Incoming Call
Distribution (ICD) group in Ring
Distribution method that this extension is
a member of.
The corresponding PDN extension is
receiving an incoming call.
When multiple calls are on a PDN extension, the LED pattern that appears on the corresponding SDN buttons
is displayed according to the following priority:
Receiving an incoming call ® holding a call ® on a call ® idle
For example, if a PDN extension receives an incoming call while on a call, the LEDs on the corresponding
SDN extensions will show the incoming call.
However, if an SDN extension is handling a call using the SDN button (e.g., on a call, has a call on hold, etc.),
the status of that call will be displayed on the SDN button, regardless of the call status of the PDN extension.
Example of a Secretary Handling Calls for Multiple Bosses
The following example shows the LED patterns of the PDN and SDN buttons of each extension and how calls
can be handled.
1. A Call From 111-1111 Arrives at Ext. 101
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
SDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
SDN buttons
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
2. The Call From 111-1111 is Answered by Ext. 103
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
208
Feature Manual
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Off)
(Red On)
(Off)
(Red On)
SDN buttons
(Off)
(Ext. 101)
(Green On)
(Off)
(Ext. 101)
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
3. The Call From 111-1111 is On Hold by Ext. 103
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Slow Red
Flashing)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
SDN buttons
(Off)
(Slow Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Slow Green
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
4. The Call Held by Ext. 103 is Answered by Ext. 101
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Off)
(Red On)
(Off)
(Green On)
SDN buttons
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Ext. 101)
(Red On)
(Off)
(Ext. 101)
5. A Call From 222-2222 Arrives at Ext. 101
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
(Green On)
(Ext. 103)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Off)
SDN buttons
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
6. A Call From 333-3333 Arrives at Ext. 102
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
(Green On)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 102) Flashing)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
SDN buttons
(Ext. 102)
(Rapid Red
Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
7. The Call From 333-3333 is Answered by Ext. 103
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
(Green On)
Document Version 2009-12
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Red On)
(Ext. 102)
(Red On)
SDN buttons
(Green On)
(Ext. 102)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
Feature Manual
209
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
8. The Call From 333-3333 is Transferred by Ext. 103 to Extension 102
Ext. 101 (Boss)
Ext. 102 (Boss)
Ext. 103 (Secretary)
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
SDN buttons
PDN buttons
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Off)
(Ext. 103)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
(Green On)
(Ext. 103)
(Off)
(Red On)
(Ext. 102)
(Rapid Green
Flashing)
SDN buttons
(Moderate
(Ext. 102) Green Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
(Off)
(Rapid Red
(Ext. 101) Flashing)
Conditions
[General]
• A flexible button of a PT and a PS can be customized as a PDN or SDN button. A flexible button on a DSS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
210
Console can be customized as an SDN button.
An extension can have up to eight PDN buttons.
If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, the extension will not receive incoming calls, including Call
Waiting. Therefore, it is strongly recommended for PDN extensions to have at least three PDN buttons.
Through COS programming, it is possible to select whether extensions can create SDN buttons on their
own extensions using PT programming.
Up to eight different extensions can assign SDN buttons corresponding to the same PDN extension.
When a PDN extension has an idle CO line button or ICD Group button, calls will arrive on the following
buttons according to the following priority:
– Incoming intercom calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button ® PDN button
– Incoming CO line calls: S-CO button ® G-CO button ® L-CO button ® PDN button
– Incoming CO line calls to an ICD group: ICD Group button ® S-CO button ® G-CO button ® L-CO
button ® PDN button
When multiple calls of the same status (e.g., on hold) are on a PDN extension, the status of the newest
call will be displayed on the corresponding SDN extensions. For example, if a PDN extension has two calls
ringing, an SDN extension will answer the call that arrived at the PDN extension last, when pressing the
SDN button.
When a PDN extension is a member of an ICD group in Ring Distribution method, and an incoming call
arrives at the ICD group, the incoming call status will not appear on the LEDs of the corresponding SDN
extensions. (® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
If none of an extension’s PDN buttons are idle, DSS buttons of other extensions registered to the PDN
extension will turn on red.
Ring Tone Pattern
Through system programming, each extension can set ring tone patterns for PDN buttons. Ring tone
patterns can be assigned separately for each SDN button.
Outgoing Line Preference
When "PDN" is selected as the outgoing line preference, outgoing calls will originate on the first available
PDN button (® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing).
Incoming Line Preference
Through system programming, it is possible for only incoming calls arriving at PDN buttons to be answered
simply by going off-hook, by selecting "PDN" as the incoming line preference (® 10.1.2 Line Preference
—Incoming). This prohibits calls that arrive on non-PDN buttons (e.g., an SDN button) to be answered
when going off-hook.
Walking Extension
For PDN extensions, the Walking Extension feature can only be used when all PDN buttons are idle (®
20.1.2 Walking Extension).
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.7 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
•
•
If a PS has PDN or SDN buttons, Wireless XDP Parallel mode cannot be assigned to that PS (®
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode).
OHCA/Whisper OHCA
A PDN extension cannot receive OHCA or Whisper OHCA, unless the call is made using a corresponding
SDN button (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call Announcement), ® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA).
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice
It is not possible to temporarily change the called party’s preset call receiving method (ring tone or voice)
when calling a PDN extension, unless the call is made using a corresponding SDN button (®
9.1.13 Intercom Call).
[Delayed Ringing]
• The same delayed ringing setting is applied to all PDN buttons on an extension. Delayed ringing can be
•
•
•
•
assigned separately for each SDN button.
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether caller information (such as Caller ID) is
shown immediately on a PS when a call is received while delayed ringing is set.
Caller information (such as Caller ID) is not shown immediately on a PT when a call is received while
delayed ringing is set.
SDN buttons can be set to not ring (only flash) for incoming calls. However, this setting is not available for
PDN buttons.
The forward no answer timer starts when a PDN extension starts ringing.
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 9— PDN Delayed Ringing
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for SDN)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
9.1.2 ICD Group Features—Group Call Distribution
10.1.1 LED Indication
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.6 Call Hold
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
211
13.1.9 PING (Packet Internet Groper) Confirmation
1.3.49 PDN (Primary Directory Number)/SDN (Secondary Directory Number) Extension
1.3.73 Walking COS
13.1.8 Peer-to-Peer Connection
Description
This PBX automatically establishes peer-to-peer communication between peer-to-peer compatible IP
extensions (i.e., IP-PTs and SIP extensions). Non-peer-to-peer IP extension calls are routed through the
DSP card. However, with peer-to-peer calls, the call is routed directly from one IP extension to another without
going through a DSP card. In other words, peer-to-peer calls can be made without using the PBX’s resources.
Conditions
•
•
Peer-to-peer calls can only be made between extensions connected to the PBX through the IPCMPR card.
The following IP telephones are peer-to-peer compatible for calls between each other:
– KX-NT265 (version 2.00 or later)*1
– KX-NT300 Series
– KX-NT400
– SIP Extensions
*1
•
•
•
•
•
For details about checking the version of the KX-NT265, refer to the Installation Manual.
Three codecs are used for peer-to-peer calls: G.722, G.711, and G.729A. The speech quality of the codecs
varies as follows: (High) G.722, G.711, G.729A (Low).
When the preferred codec of each party differs, the call will be established using the lower codec. For
example, if the caller prefers G.711 while the called party prefers G.729A, the call will be established using
G.729A.
G.722 is only available for calls between KX-NT400/KX-NT300 series IP-PTs and some SIP extensions
that support this codec during peer-to-peer communication.
Through system programming, it is possible to assign a specific type of codec to be used for each extension.
For SIP extensions, the priority of the codec that will be used can be specified on a SIP extension basis.
For non-peer-to-peer calls via the DSP card, calls cannot be made or received when all of the card’s
resources are being used.
PC Programming Manual References
3.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Extension—Option—
IP Codec Priority
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
13.1.9 PING (Packet Internet Groper) Confirmation
Description
It is possible for this PBX to confirm the connection of IP telephones, routers, and hubs within or outside the
private network using PING. The PBX will send an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) echo request
through the PC programming terminal and receive an ICMP message confirming connection.
212
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.11 Power Failure Transfer
Conditions
•
This PBX performs PING as follows:
• Test packet length: 56 bytes
• Ping attempts: 5
• Time out length: 1 second
• Ping interval time: 1 second
PC Programming Manual References
2.6.18 Utility—Ping
13.1.10 Power Failure Restart
Description
When the electricity is turned back on, the PBX restarts, loads its stored data automatically, and logs the event
as a System Restart in the error log.
Conditions
•
In the event of a power failure, PBX memory is protected by a factory-installed lithium battery. There is no
memory loss except the memories of Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) (® 1.1.4 Automatic Callback
Busy (Camp-on)) and Call Park (® 3.1.7 Call Park).
13.1.11 Power Failure Transfer
Description
If the power supply to the PBX fails, specific single line telephones (SLTs) are automatically connected to
specific CO lines (Power Failure Connections). The PBX will switch from the current connections to the Power
Failure Connections, and all existing conversations will be disconnected.
Only CO line conversations handled by Power Failure Connections can be made during a power failure.
Conditions
•
•
Only CO line calls can be made during a power failure. All other features do not work.
The analog CO line cards, extension cards, and the number of PFT ports (ports which can be used for
Power Failure Connections) are as follows:
CO Line Card: LCOT4 (1 PFT ports)
Extension Card: DHLC4 (1 PFT ports)
Note
Through system programming, it is possible to allow CO line calls that are established during a power
failure to be maintained even when the power returns and the connection is switched back to the normal
configuration from the Power Failure Connection. However, if no special programming is performed,
the connection will be dropped when power returns.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
213
13.1.13 Printing Message
Installation Manual References
3.12.1 Power Failure Connections
PC Programming Manual References
13.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer
13.1.12 Predialing
Description
A display proprietary telephone (PT) user can check and correct the number to be dialed on-hook. The call will
be initiated after going off-hook.
Conditions
•
Storing the Predialed Number in Personal Speed Dialing
The predialed number can be stored in Personal Speed Dialing by pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button
(® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal). In this case, the extension will enter personal programming mode
automatically so that a name can be assigned to the stored number.
Operating Manual References
3.1.2 Personal Programming
13.1.13 Printing Message
Description
An extension user can select a message to be output on SMDR. Up to eight messages can be preprogrammed
in the Printing Message table, and are available to all extensions connected to the PBX. A message can contain
the "%" symbol, which requires a number to be entered in its place when the message is selected at an
extension.
Depending on the content of the preprogrammed messages, this feature can be used to record a variety of
information, which can be output on SMDR to, for example, a connected PC.
[Example]
If message 1 is preprogrammed as "Started work", and message 2 as "Finished work", employees can sign in
by selecting message 1 when starting work, and sign out by selecting message 2 when finishing. A connected
PC can then be used to generate employee work records.
Conditions
•
Up to seven "%"s can be stored for each message.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
214
Feature Manual
Printing Message
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Feature Manual References
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.50 Printing Message
13.1.14 Privacy Release
Description
By default, all conversations which take place on CO lines, extension lines and doorphone lines are protected
from others interrupting the conversation (Automatic Privacy).
Privacy Release allows a proprietary telephone (PT) or portable station (PS) user to suspend Automatic Privacy
for an existing CO line call on the S-CO button in order to establish a three-party call.
System programming is required to enable or disable this feature.
Conditions
•
•
•
S-CO Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the S-CO button.
Privacy Release Time
Privacy is released for five seconds to allow the conversation to be joined.
This feature overrides Data Line Security (® 4.1.1 Data Line Security) and Executive Busy Override Deny
(® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override).
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.15 Conference
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Description
A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective
communications between company members at different locations. The TIE lines can be used to call through
the PBX to reach another switching system (PBX or telephone company). By using TIE lines, the PBX can
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
215
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
support not only communications with the public network but with other company members in the private
network where the PBX is included.
Interface
The following interfaces can be used to establish a private network:
Interface
Network Type
T1 (TIE [E & M])
Digital (64 kbps ´ 24 channels)
PRI (QSIG)
Digital (ISDN 23B+D)
VoIP
Internet Protocol (IP)
The available interfaces depend on the cards installed in the PBX.
Making a TIE Line Call
One of the following two methods can be used to make a TIE line call.
a. Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
Dial the [Extension Number] only.
[Example]
PBX-1
PBX-2
TIE Line
Interface
Extn.1011
Dials "3011".
Extn.1012
PBX-3
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Extn. 2011
Interface
Extn. 3011
Dials "2011".
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to change the first one or two digits of extension numbers of either PBX
(e.g., 10XX for PBX-1, 20XX for PBX-2) to allow calls to be routed properly.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "2011".
® Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 2011 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials extension number "3011".
® Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 3011 of PBX-3.
216
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
b. PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
Dial the [TIE Line Access Number] + [PBX Code] + [Extension Number].
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code
[Example]
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX-3
PBX Code 951
PBX Code 952
PBX Code 953
TIE Line
Interface
Extn.1011
Dials "7-953-1011".
TIE Line
Interface Interface
Extn.1012
Extn. 1011
Interface
Extn. 1011
Dials "7-952-1011".
[PBX code]
[TIE line
access no.]
[Extn. no.]
Explanation:
To use this method, it is necessary to know each PBX code in order to identify the location of an extension.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension
number "1011".
® Extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials TIE line access number "7", PBX code "953", and extension
number "1011".
® Extension 1011 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011 of PBX-3.
TIE Line and CO Line Connection
To connect the TIE line with the CO line, the following patterns are available:
1. CO Line-to-TIE Access
2. TIE-to-CO Line Access
3. CO Line-to-TIE-to-CO Line Access
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
217
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
CO Line-to-TIE Access
It is possible to assign an extension of another PBX as the destination of incoming CO line calls to the own
PBX.
It is also possible to forward calls using a virtual PS. Using this method, CO line calls received at PBX-1 are
forwarded directly to the extension at PBX-2, even when using the PBX Code method.
a. Incoming CO Line Call Destination Assignment
[Example]
Telephone Company
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
CO Line
PBX-2
DID No: 4567
Destination: 2011
TIE Line
Interface
Interface
Outside Caller
Dials "123-4567".
Extn. 1011
Extn. 2011
Explanation:
An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call is sent to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line
according to the assignment of the DID or DIL call destination of PBX-1. (® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward
Dialing))
® 12.3 [10-3] DID Table— DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [453] DID Destination
218
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
b. FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the TIE Line
[Example]
Telephone Company
CO Line TIE Line Network
CO Line
PBX Code 952
PBX-1
TIE Line
PBX Code 952
PBX-2
Interface
Interface
Forwarded/Transferred
/Intercepted to 7-952-2011
Outside Caller
Extn. 1011
Extn. 2011
Dials "123-4567".
Explanation:
An outside caller dials "123-4567". The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-1), and the
call is forwarded, transferred, or intercepted to extension "2011" of PBX-2 through the TIE line.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
219
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
TIE-to-CO Line Access
The PBX sends TIE line calls to the CO lines of another PBX through the TIE lines.
a. CO Line Call through Other PBXs
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-2
PBX-1
9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
Outside Party
Extn. 1011
Extn. 2011
(211-4567)
Dials "802-9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", trunk group
number "02" (TRG2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567".
® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Trunk Group Access
2. PBX-1 sends the call to PBX-2 through the trunk group (TRG) 2 (TIE line).
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".
220
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX Code 951
PBX Code 952
952-9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
Outside Party
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1011
(211-4567)
Dials "7-952-9-211-4567" or
"802-952-9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access
number of PBX-2 "9", and telephone number "211-4567"; or dials the Trunk Group Access number of
PBX-1 "8", trunk group number "02" (TRG2), PBX code "952", Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9",
and telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is connected to the outside party "211-4567" through PBX-2 which has PBX code "952".
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
221
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
CO Line Call through Other PBXs—by the ARS feature
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code) using ARS>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-2
PBX-1
9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
Outside Party
Extn. 1011
Extn. 2011
(211-4567)
Dials "9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to PBX-2
through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".
222
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code) using ARS>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX Code 951
PBX Code 952
952-9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
Interface
Outside Party
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1011
(211-4567)
Dials "9-211-4567".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9" and telephone
number "211-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call
to PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS
programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the call to the outside party "211-4567".
b. Blocking CO line calls made through another PBX and how to override it:
Whether an incoming TIE line call can make a CO line call through this PBX (i.e., PBX-2), depends on the
COS that is assigned to the trunk group of this PBX, that the incoming TIE line is connected to. If the COS
of the trunk group is unable to make outgoing calls by the TRS or External Call Block feature, CO line calls
made through this PBX will be prohibited.
To override this prohibition, an extension of PBX-1 must enter a verification code assigned to PBX-2 to
change the COS temporarily. It is also possible to override the prohibition by specifying an extension at
PBX-2 with the Walking COS feature, to temporarily switch to that extension’s COS.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
®4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
® 5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
® [500] Trunk Group Number
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
223
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
[Programming Example of PBX-2]
Trunk Group No.
COS No.
1
3
2
2
3
2
:
:
TRG of Incoming
Call
Outgoing Call
TRG 1
TRG 2
TRG 3
…
:
:
:
:
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
:
: Block
[Example]
<Extension Number Method (Access Without PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
TRG 3
of PBX-2
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
9-211-4567
Interface
TIE Line
TRG 2
of PBX-1
TRG 1 (COS 3)
of PBX-2
CO Line
PBX-2
Interface
verification code entry feature no.
+ + verification code + verification code
PIN+9-211-4567
Outside Party
(211-4567)
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1012
Dials "8-02-9-211-4567".
224
Feature Manual
Extn. 2001
Dials "8-02+verification code entry feature
no. +
+ verification code + verification code
PIN+9-211-4567".
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Explanation:
Case 1:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group
number (TRG 2), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is
blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the Trunk Group Access number of PBX-1 "8", TIE line trunk group
(TRG2), verification code entry feature number, , verification code, verification code personal
identification number (PIN), Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone
number "211-4567".
2. If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party
through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
<PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)>
Telephone Company
CO Line
211-4567
TRG 3
of PBX-2
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
CO Line
PBX-2
PBX Code 951
Interface
952-9-211-4567
TIE Line
TRG 2
of PBX-1
TRG 1 (COS 3)
of PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Interface
952+verification code entry feature no.
+ + verification code + verification code
PIN + 9-211-4567
Outside Party
(211-4567)
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1012
Dials "7-952-9211-4567".
Document Version 2009-12
Extn. 1001
Dials "7-952+verification code entry feature
no. + + verification code + verification code
PIN+9-211-4567".
Feature Manual
225
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Explanation:
Case 1:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", Idle Line Access
number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
2. The call is not connected to the outside party through PBX-2 because the COS of TRG 1 (COS 3) is
blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
Case 2:
1. Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", verification code entry
feature number, < , verification code, verification code personal identification number (PIN), Idle Line
Access number of PBX-2 "9", and the telephone number "211-4567".
2. If the specified verification code applies COS 2 of PBX-2, the call is connected to the outside party
through PBX-2, because COS 2 is not blocked from accessing TRG 3 of PBX-2.
c. FWD/Call Transfer/Intercept Routing to the CO Line
[Example]
Telephone Company
CO Line
Forwarded/Transferred/
Intercepted to 211-4567
CO Line
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX Code 951
PBX Code 952
Interface
952-1011
TIE Line
Extn. 1011
Interface
Extn. 1011
Outside Party
(211-4567)
Dials "7-952-1011".
Explanation:
1. Extension 1011 of PBX-1 dials the TIE line access number "7", PBX code "952", and extension
number "1011".
2. The call reaches the destination (extension 1011 of PBX-2) through the TIE line, and the call is
forwarded, transferred or intercepted to the outside party "211-4567" through the CO line.
CO Line-to-TIE-to-CO Line Access
An outside caller can be connected to an outside party through the TIE line by using the DISA feature.
226
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
[Example]
Telephone Company
(area code: 222)
CO Line
CO Line
Telephone Company
(area code: 333)
TIE Line Network
CO Line 123-4567
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX Code 951
PBX Code 952
CO Line
952-9-1-333-123-4567
DISA Interface
TIE Line
Interface
TRG 2
Outside Party
Outside Caller
(333-123-4567)
Dials "(DISA phone
number)-9-1-333123-4567".
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1011
Explanation:
1. The outside caller dials the "DISA phone number of PBX-1", Idle Line Access number of PBX-1 "9", and
telephone number "1-333-123-4567".
2. PBX-1 modifies the call (adds "952" and the Idle Line Access number of PBX-2 "9") and sends the call to
PBX-2 which has PBX code "952" through the TIE line (trunk group [TRG] 2) according to the ARS
programming of PBX-1.
3. PBX-2 sends the modified call to the outside party "333-123-4567" according to its ARS programming.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
227
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
TIE Line Programming
To Make a TIE Line Call
The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table is referenced by the PBX to identify the CO line route when an
extension user makes a TIE line call.
It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs in the TIE line network.
The routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided by the dialed number.
There are two system programs for the tables:
TIE Line Routing Table: used to assign the leading numbers (PBX code or extension number) and trunk group
hunt sequence.
® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Leading Number
TIE Modify Removed Number of Digits/Added Number: used to remove digits from and add a number to
the dialed number of the TIE line call. This modification may be needed depending on the TIE line network
configuration.
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
→
Removed Number of Digits
→
Added Number
→
Trunk Group
[Programming Examples]
Your PBX is PBX-1 and there are four PBXs in your TIE line network. To identify the CO line route as illustrated,
you should make the following tables.
a. Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension— Dial
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX-3
Extn. 4xxx
Extn. 3xxx
b-2nd) 3xxx
c)
4xxx
TRG 2
If you dial:
a) 2xxx
b) 3xxx
c) 4xxx
TRG 1
(2, 3, 4: Other PBX
Extension Number
[TIE] in the Flexible
Numbering Plan)
a) 2xxx
b-1st) 3xxx
Extn. 1xxx
PBX-1
Extn. 2xxx
PBX-2
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]
Location
No.
01
228
Feature Manual
Leading
No.
2
TRG
1
Priority 1
Priority 2
..
Dial Modification
Dial Modification
..
Removed
No. of
Digits
0
Added
No.
TRG
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
..
..
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Location
No.
Leading
No.
TRG
Priority 1
Priority 2
..
Dial Modification
Dial Modification
..
Removed
No. of
Digits
02
3
1
0
03
4
2
0
:
:
:
:
Added
No.
TRG
Removed
No. of
Digits
2
Added
No.
0
..
..
..
:
:
:
:
:
Explanation:
Location 01:
The hunt sequence by dialing [2XXX]:
Sending no. to PBX-2: 2XXX
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1
Location 02:
The hunt sequence by dialing [3XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 3XXX
The 2nd route—trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4: 3XXX
Location 03:
The hunt sequence by dialing [4XXX]:
The 1st route—trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4: 4XXX
b. PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
® 4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TIE Line Access
® 11.1 [9-1] TIE Table— Own PBX Code
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX-3
PBX Code 954
PBX Code 953
Extn. xxxx
If you dial:
a) 7-952-xxxx
b) 7-953-xxxx
c) 7-954-xxxx
(7: TIE Line Access
Number in the
Flexible
Numbering Plan)
Document Version 2009-12
Extn. xxxx
b-2nd)
953#-xxxx
c)
954#-xxxx
TRG 2
TRG 1
a) 952-xxxx
b-1st) 953-xxxx
Extn. 1xxx
PBX-1
PBX Code 951
Extn. xxxx
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Feature Manual
229
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table of PBX-1]
Location
No.
Leading
No.
TRG
Priority 1
Priority 2
..
Dial Modification
Dial Modification
..
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
01
952
1
0
02
953
1
0
03
954
2
3
954#
:
:
:
:
:
TRG
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
..
..
2
3
953#
..
..
:
:
:
:
Explanation:
Location 01:
The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 952+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 952–XXXX
Location 02:
The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 953+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 1
Sending no. to PBX-2: 953–XXXX
The 2nd route — trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4:
953#–XXXX
Location 03:
The hunt sequence by dialing [7+PBX Code 954+XXXX]:
The 1st route — trunk group (TRG) 2
Sending no. to PBX-4:
954#–XXXX
230
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
To Receive a TIE Line Call
a. Extension Number Method (Access without PBX Code)
[Example]
1
A TIE line call is sent to
PBX-2 from PBX-1. If the
number sent from PBX-1
is an extension number of
PBX-2 (e.g., 2011), the
call will be received at
extension "2011". If not,
PBX-2 checks the
number in the TIE Line
Routing and Modified
Table of PBX-2.
2
If the match is found in
the table, the call will be
modified according to the
table and send to the
corresponding PBX
(PBX-3).
3
The number sent from
PBX-2 "3011" is an
extension number of
PBX-3. The call is
received at extension
"3011".
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX-3
3
Extn. 3011
2 3011
1 3011
Extn. 2011
Extn. 1011
Dials "3011".
PBX-1
PBX-2
Note
When a TIE line call is sent from one PBX to another, the receiving PBX first modifies the received
number according to the assignment for the CO line port: the number of digits removed, and the number
added, are determined by this assignment. Then the PBX checks whether the completed number is
an existing extension number at that PBX.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
231
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
b. PBX Code Method (Access with PBX Code)
[Example]
1
A TIE line call is sent to
PBX-2 from PBX-1. If
the number sent from
PBX-1 has the PBX
code of PBX-2 "952",
the call will be received
at the corresponding
extension of PBX-2
(e.g., 1011 of PBX-2).
If not, PBX-2 checks
the number in the TIE
Line Routing and
Modified Table of
PBX-2.
2
If the match is found in
the table, the call will
be modified according
to the table and send to
the corresponding
PBX (PBX-3).
3
The number sent from
PBX-2 "953-1011" has
the PBX code of PBX-3
"953". The call is
received at extension
"1011" of PBX-3.
TIE Line Network
PBX-4
PBX-3
PBX Code 953
PBX Code 954
3
Extn. 1011
2 953-1011
1 953-1011
Extn. 1011
Extn. 1011
PBX-1
Dials "7-953-1011". PBX Code 951
PBX-2
PBX Code 952
Note
When a TIE line call is sent to a PBX from another PBX, first the PBX modifies the number sent to the
PBX according to the assignment for each CO line port of the PBX: the removed number of digits from
and/or added number to the number sent to the PBX is determined by the assignment. Then the PBX
starts to check the number whether the number has the PBX code of the PBX.
232
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
TIE Line Routing Flowchart
[Making a TIE Line Call from an Extension]
A TIE line call is made using one of the
following methods:
PBX Code Method:
TIE Line Access Number + PBX Code +
(Extension Number or Other Digits)
Extension Number Method:
Extension Number
Is the dialed number either
an extension number of another PBX or
a number beginning with the
TIE Line Access number?
A
No
Not treated as a call
which uses the TIE line.
Yes
Does the dialed number begin with a
leading number (PBX code or first few digits of an
extension number) stored in the TIE Line Routing
and Modification Table?
No
Reorder tone
Yes
The TIE Line Routing and Modification Table checks the number and
selects the highest-priority Trunk Group that is available.
The dialed number is modified if a removed number of digits
and/or added number is assigned.
Is a trunk group
available?
No
Reorder tone
Yes
Is there an idle CO line
in the trunk group?
No
Busy tone
Yes
Routes to other PBX or CO line.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
233
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
[Receiving a Call through a TIE Line]
A call is received via a TIE line.
The Incoming Number Modification Table
checks the CO line port carrying the call,
and modifies the number according to the
method assigned for that port.
PBX Code Method
(Access with PBX Code)
Extension Number Method
(Access without PBX Code)
Does the PBX have
a PBX code (Own PBX Code)
assigned to it?
Yes
Does the modified number
contain the PBX code
assigned to this PBX?
No
No
To
A
(found in the flowchart,
[Making a Call via a TIE
Line from an Extension])
Yes
Modifies the number
by removing the PBX code.
The PBX checks the modified number to determine what kind of number it is.
Operator Call No.
Extension No.
of this PBX
Directs the call
to an operator.
To
Does the
corresponding
extension
exist?
Yes
No
Extension No.
of Another PBX
No
A
(found in the
flowchart,
[Making a Call
via a TIE Line
from an
Extension])
Call Waiting
Busy tone
Intercept Routing
Busy/DND
Sends a reorder
tone, or sends the
call to an operator
(Intercept Routing
No Destination).
Other
Reorder tone.
PBX checks the Class of Service (COS)
of the incoming trunk group.
Is the outgoing trunk group
programmed to allow calls
from this COS?
Is the
extension idle?
Yes
Idle Line
Access No.
or
Trunk Group
Access No.
Yes
Does
Toll Restriction (TRS) allow
this COS
to make this call?
Yes
No
Reorder tone.
No
Reorder tone.
Calls the extension.
Sends the call to the CO line.
234
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Common Extension Numbering for 2 PBXs
Two PBXs can have extensions with the same leading number. TIE Line calling is available using extension
numbering.
Telephone Company
CO Line TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
DID No.: 4567
Destination: 1033
CO Line
Interface
Outside Caller
Extn.1011
Dials "123-4567".
TIE Line
Extn.1012
Interface
Extn.1033
Dials "1033".
Explanation:
The PBX first searches local extensions for a matching number. If a dialed number is not found at the local
PBX, the call can then be sent to a remote PBX, and the remote PBX checks the TIE Line Routing Table for
a corresponding entry.
Case 1:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "1011".
® The dialed number is found at the local PBX, and extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1011
of PBX-1.
Case 2:
Extension 1012 of PBX-1 dials extension number "1033".
® The dialed number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line, and
extension 1012 of PBX-1 is connected to extension 1033 of PBX-2.
Case 3:
A public CO line call directed to extension 1033 arrives at PBX-1.
® The target extension number is not found at the local PBX, so the call is redirected to the specified TIE Line,
and the call is connected to extension 1033 of PBX-2.
– The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required to use this
feature.
– System programming is required to enable this feature.
– If a dialed number is not found at a remote PBX, the call cannot be redirected to the local PBX to search
for a matching number.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
235
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
Conditions
•
•
A CO line which is used for a private network should be assigned "Private" as the networking type. (®
9.1.10 INCOMING CALL FEATURES)
To establish a QSIG network (® 13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG), each ISDN (QSIG)
connection in a TIE line network must have the port on one PBX assigned as a master port, and the port
on the other PBX assigned as a slave port. PBXs that support this feature are KX-NCP series, KX-TDE
series, and KX-TDA series PBXs.
[TIE Line Network Connection Example]
Extn.1000
:
PBX-1
(A) Master
(A) Slave
PBX-2
Extn. 2000
:
Extn.1999
Extn. 2999
(B) Master
QSIG Network
(C) Slave
(C) Master
(B) Slave
PBX-3
Extn. 3000
:
Extn. 3999
•
•
When a TIE line call arrives at a busy extension which has disabled Call Waiting, the caller will hear a busy
tone. If required, Intercept Routing can be activated.
The Inter-digit time can be assigned for TIE line calls.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Network Numbering Plan— Trunk Property
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port— Trunk Property
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DID
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Idle Line Access (Local Access)
→ Trunk Group Access
→ TIE Line Access
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— Private Network—TIE Call by Extension Numbering (Activation Key
Required)
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Main— COS
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings
→DIL— Trunk Property
→DIL— DIL Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→DID/TIE
12.3 [10-3] DID Table— DID Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
PT Programming Manual References
[453] DID Destination
236
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
[500] Trunk Group Number
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
3.1.10 Call Transfer
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Description
Up to 8 PBXs connected in a VoIP or ISDN private network can share the services of a VPS connected to
another PBX in DPT integration. This VPS can provide voice mail for extensions attached to any of the PBXs
in the network, as if the VPS were connected to the local PBX. In addition, the VPS can send Message Waiting
notifications to extensions at any PBX, and users can access their mailboxes directly using the Message
Waiting button.
The VPS features available at extensions in a network are shown below.
No.
Feature
Remote VPS
Local VPS
1
Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup
No
Yes
2
FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
Yes
Yes
3
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
Yes
Yes
4
Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
No
Yes
5
Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS
No
Yes
6
Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct
Mailbox Access)
Yes
Yes
7
VPS CO Line Service & Automatic Time Mode
Notification
Yes
Yes
8
Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS
Yes
Yes
9
DID Number Notification to the VPS
Yes
Yes
10
Status Notification to the VPS
Yes
Yes
11
Paging by the VPS
No
Yes
12
Live Call Screening (LCS)
No
Yes
13
Two-way Recording into the VPS
No
Yes
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
237
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
No.
Feature
Remote VPS
Local VPS
14
VPS Data Control by the PBX
No
Yes
15
Remote FWD Setting by the VM
No
Yes
16
VM Menu
No
Yes
17
Message clear on Check Out
No
Yes
18
Voice message number display
Yes
Yes
[CO Line Call Answered by the VPS, Transferred to Extension at Other PBX (Extension
Number Method)]
Outside Caller
Telephone Company
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX-3
PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
PBX-7
PBX-8
Private network
Mailbox 101
Extn.
101
Hello.
Please enter
extension number.
Mailbox 201
Mailbox 202
VPS
Extn. Extn.
201 202
[Explanation]
A CO line call is answered by the AA service of the VPS. The caller enters extension number 201, so the call
is transferred over the private network to extension 201.
If extension 201 does not answer, mailbox 201 in the VPS will answer it and play the appropriate message.
238
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
[CO Line Call to an Extension Not Answered, Forwarded to Mailbox (Extension Number
Method)]
Outside Caller
Telephone Company
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
PBX-3
PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
PBX-7
PBX-8
Private network
Mailbox 101
Extn.
101
Mailbox 201
Mailbox 202
VPS
Mailbox 201:
"Hello. I am not at
my desk right now."
Extn.
Extn. 201
Fwd to VPS 202
[Explanation]
Extension 201 does not answer the CO line call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, and answered by mailbox
201. If the outside caller leaves a message, the VPS sends a Message Waiting notification to the extension
using Enhanced QSIG information over the private network.
When forwarding the call, PBX-2 sends any received call information (Caller ID number/name, etc.) along with
the VM trunk group number to use, applicable time mode, and extension number and forwarding reason of the
original destination extension to PBX-1 as Enhanced QSIG information.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
239
13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
PBX Code Method
Telephone Company
Outside Caller
TIE Line Network
PBX-2 (PBX
Code: 30)
PBX-1 (PBX
Code: 20)
Private network
Mailbox 101
Extn.
101
Mailbox 730102:
"Hello. I am not at
my desk right now."
Mailbox 201
PBX-3
PBX-4
PBX-5
PBX-6
PBX-7
PBX-8
Mailbox 730101
Mailbox 730102
Extn.
Extn. 102
Fwd to VPS 101
VPS
"7-30-102"
[PBX
code]
[TIE line
access no.]
[Extn. no.]
[Explanation]
Extension 102 does not answer the CO line call, so the call is forwarded to the VPS, using a VPS mailbox
number containing the TIE line access number, the PBX code of the PBX that received the call, and the
extension number that received the call.
This mailbox number is the same as if an extension connected to PBX-1 called extension 102 of PBX-2. This
mailbox number should be programmed as the mailbox number and owner extension number on the VPS.
Multiple VPSs
More than one PBX in the network can have a VPS connected, and each VPS can provide voice mail services
for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
240
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for the
KX-NCP series PBX connected to the VPS, and for all KX-NCP series PBXs that will use this feature.
All PBXs in the network must be KX-NCP series, KX-TDE series, or KX-TDA series PBXs. For information
on the hardware requirements for KX-TDE/KX-TDA series PBXs that share the same VPS, refer to the
corresponding Feature Manual.
Only KX-TVA series VPSs connected using DPT integration support this feature.
Mailboxes for extensions connected to other PBXs in the network must be set up manually.
An extension can receive Message Waiting notifications from multiple VPSs connected to PBXs in the
network. When multiple notifications of the number of unheard messages in an extension user’s message
box are sent from different VPSs, the most recent notification will be displayed.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A flexible button cannot be customized as a Message Waiting button for another extension at a different
PBX.
Whether or not Enhanced QSIG information is transmitted can be set in the TIE table.
When PBXs are connected by PRI23 cards, the card must be set to ISDN Standard mode. If set to T1
mode, the card must be removed and reinstalled to allow the mode to be changed. When the card is
reinserted into the PBX, it is possible to choose whether the card will be set to T1 mode or ISDN Standard
mode. The default is ISDN Standard.
PBX Code Method
The number used in this method must be no more than 8 digits.
When using a mailbox number containing more than 5 digits, the version of the KX-TVA series VPS must
be 2.1 (Main Software Version 2.50) or later.
Transfer to Mailbox
It is possible to transfer calls to a mailbox of a VPS at another PBX, by creating a flexible button containing
the following:
[T] + extension number of VPS at other PBX + [P] + [#] + 6
Then, the extension user can transfer calls to a mailbox by pressing this key, entering the mailbox number,
and going on hook.
The VM Menu feature cannot be used in a Centralized Voice Mail network. When extensions belonging to
a PBX that is not connected to the VPS have a mailbox in the VPS, the VM Menu feature should be disabled
for the mailbox using the Class of Service (COS) setting of the VPS. Otherwise, there may be an answering
delay of about 6 seconds.
PC Programming Manual References
3.40 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Centralized VM
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
→ Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat
Counter
→ Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralized VM Feature—Data Re-transmission : Repeat Timer
13.1 [11-1] Main—Maintenance
→ Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter)
→ Error Log for Centralized VM—Network MSW Transmission (Buffer)
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station
Selection)
Description
When PBXs are networked using ISDN or V-IPGW cards, it is possible to assign flexible buttons as Network
Direct Station Selection (NDSS) buttons. These buttons are used to monitor the status of extensions connected
to up to seven other PBXs in the network, and to make or transfer calls to those extensions with one touch,
like normal DSS buttons. This allows operator functions to be centralized even when there are offices in remote
locations.
NDSS buttons show the status of the monitored extension as follows:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
241
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Light pattern
Status
Off
The monitored extension is idle.
Red on
The monitored extension is busy or has set DND for CO line calls.
[Example Network]
1001 (busy)
PBX-1
Network ID 1
PBX-2
Network ID 2
Monitor
extension
2001 (busy)
2002 (idle)
Extn. 2001
Extn. 2002
Extn. 4001
PBX-3
Network ID 0
PBX-4
Network ID 3
4001 (idle)
Monitor extension
Extn. 1001
Extn. 2002
[Programming Procedure]
1. Routing Table Assignment
TIE Line Routing and Modification tables must have been programmed in advance for all PBXs in the
network, to allow calls to be made and transferred between PBXs (® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK
FEATURES).
In the programming example that follows, the PBXs in the network use the Extension Number method, as
shown in the illustration above. However, the PBX Access Code method can also be used.
2. Network PBX ID Assignment
Assign a Network PBX ID to each PBX in the network.
® 11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator
Feature—Network PBX ID
• IDs 1-8: Can monitor extensions at other PBXs, and transmit monitor data about local extensions. Each
ID number can be assigned to one PBX within the network.
• ID 0: Retransmits monitor data throughout the network. This ID number can be assigned to multiple
PBXs.
3. QSIG Port Setting [Monitored PBX]
ISDN-QSIG (PBX Direct Connection)
Each QSIG port of a PRI card that will be used to transmit extension status information must be set to do
so through system programming. Even if a port is set to not transmit information, it will still receive
information from other PBXs.
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer
Transmit
Enabled
Extension Status Information Functions
•
•
•
242
Feature Manual
Transmit information on own PBX extensions
Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of
the PBX
Re-transmit information received by other QSIG ports of the PBX
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
Transmit
Extension Status Information Functions
•
Disabled
Receive information from other PBXs; forward it to other QSIG ports of
the PBX
Set the transmission setting for each port according to the layout of your network, so that extension status
information can travel between NDSS monitor PBXs.
[Example ISDN Network Port Setting]
PBX-1
OFF
Network ID 1
4001 NDSS
Idle
OFF
PBX-2
Network ID 0
ON
Busy
OFF
4001
Busy
ON
OFF
PBX-3
ON
OFF
ON
PBX-4
Network ID 3
4001
Busy
4001
Idle Busy
4001
Busy
PBX-5
IP-GW-QSIG
IP data is routed through the network according to the routing tables of the V-IPGW cards. When using
VoIP, it is necessary to identify the monitor PBXs, to which to transmit extension status information, for
each card that will be used. This is done by specifying the extension number of any extension (for example,
the PBX operator) at the monitor PBX as a Network Operator extension for that V-IPGW card.
[Example VoIP Network]
PBX-1
PBX-2
Network
ID 1
4001 NDSS
Idle
4001 NDSS
Idle
IP Network
Busy
PBX-3
Busy
V-IPGW
PBX-4
Network
ID 2
4001
Idle Busy
Mixed Network
When using the NDSS feature over a mixed network containing both VoIP portions and ISDN line portions,
it is possible to set whether status information will be transferred between VoIP and ISDN cards within
each PBX. For example, if the monitor PBX is on a VoIP network, and monitored PBXs are on an ISDN
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
243
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
network, the PBX that acts as a gateway between the VoIP and ISDN networks must have this setting
enabled for ISDN to VoIP.
4. Network Monitor Extension Registration [Monitor PBX]
Register the extensions (attached to other PBXs) that will be monitored. A maximum of 250 extensions
can be registered. Only extensions that have been registered here can be assigned to NDSS buttons.
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table— Network Extension No.
Network Monitor Extensions Table
Index No.
Network Extn. No.
Network Extn. Name
001
2001
Branch 1: T. Jones
002
2002
Branch 1: M. Davidson
003
4001
Branch 2: R. Powell
:
:
:
250
When using the PBX Access Code numbering method, the relevant access code must be added before
the extension number registered here.
5. NDSS Button Customization [Monitor PBX]
At any extension attached to a monitor PBX, customize a flexible button as an NDSS button for an extension
registered above. Then go off-hook, press this button once, and go on-hook again. This activates the
monitoring function. The monitored PBX will begin to transmit information about the status of that extension,
and the monitor PBX will begin to receive the information. The button light will display the status of the
extension connected to another PBX.
Removing or Editing a Registered Extension [Monitor PBX]
To monitor a new extension when 250 extensions are already being monitored, it is necessary to remove
the registration of an existing extension.
The NDSS Monitor Release feature is used to stop monitoring a certain extension. When this feature is
performed at a monitor PBX:
• If no other PBXs are monitoring the selected extension, the monitored PBX stops transmitting status
information for that extension.
• The monitor PBX stops receiving status information for the selected extension. All NDSS buttons for
that extension stop displaying status information.
However, the related information is not deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table. Therefore, if
an extension user at a monitor PBX subsequently goes off-hook and presses the NDSS button for that
extension, monitoring will be reactivated. To completely remove monitoring of an extension, the registration
data must also be deleted from the Network Monitor Extensions Table at each monitor PBX.
The monitor destination of each NDSS button is determined by the registration information for a particular
index number in this table. Therefore, if the registration information for an index number is changed (for
example, the Network Extension Number assigned to Index No. 001 in the example above is changed
from "2001" to "4002"), any NDSS buttons that have been set for that extension will automatically point to
the new monitor destination.
Conditions
•
•
244
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all
KX-NCP series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have extensions monitored.
All PBXs in the network must be KX-NCP series, KX-TDE series, or KX-TDA series PBXs. For information
on the hardware requirements for KX-TDE/KX-TDA series PBXs that will monitor extensions or have
extensions monitored, refer to the corresponding Feature Manual.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Each of Network PBX IDs 1-8 can only be assigned to one PBX within a network. Assigning the same
Network PBX ID to two PBXs will cause network data transmission problems.
It is only possible to assign NDSS buttons for extensions that have been previously registered in the
Network Monitor Extensions Table.
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
Type
→
→
Dial (for NDSS)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→
Type
→
Dial (for NDSS)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→
Type
→
Dial (for NDSS)
Extensions connected to one PBX can monitor a maximum of 250 extensions at other PBXs. One extension
can be monitored by multiple extensions at multiple PBXs.
To reduce NDSS data traffic, it is recommended that 8 or less extensions in a single Incoming Call
Distribution Group be monitored.
Activation of an NDSS button is only required the first time that a button for a newly registered extension
is created. Once an NDSS button has been activated by being pressed the first time, any further NDSS
buttons for the same monitored extension will automatically display the extension status without needing
to be activated.
To use the NDSS Monitor Release feature, an extension must be assigned as a manager.
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager
[511] Manager Assignment
Through system programming, it is possible to assign a maximum number of "hops" (transfers between
PBXs) that extension status information can travel. Each time a piece of extension status information is
forwarded to another PBX, its counter is increased by one. When this counter reaches the assigned
maximum, the data is discarded. This is used to prevent data from circling unnecessarily around the
network.
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission— Network Data Transmission for Centralized Operator Feature
—Data Transmission Counter
If it is not possible to remotely turn off transmission of extension status information using the NDSS Monitor
Release feature because of network conditions, it is possible to perform the same operation directly through
system programming at the monitored PBX.
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
When using a VoIP network, if extension status information is lost by the network, in some cases an NDSS
button may not be able to display the status of the relevant extension.
NDSS can not be used when two PBXs are networked using the Common Extension Numbering for 2
PBXs feature (® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES).
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—CO Setting— Networking Data Transfer
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Manager
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
6.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
6.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
245
13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Dial (for NDSS)
11.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission
11.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
11.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table
PT Programming Manual References
[511] Manager Assignment
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
Operating Manual References
1.2.1 Making Calls
2.1.4 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct Station Selection) Monitor Release
13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
Description
An Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group can include up to 4 destinations at other PBXs in a private network,
including the floating extension number of another ICD Group. This is done by assigning a virtual PS as a
246
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
member of the ICD Group, and then setting the number of a destination at another PBX as the forwarding
destination for that virtual PS. This allows multiple ICD groups at remote locations to receive calls together.
Telephone Company
PBX-1
PBX-2
ICD
Group
PBX-3
ICD
Group
PBX-4
ICD
Group
PBX-5
ICD
Group
Private network
ICD Group
Virtual PS 1
Virtual PS 2
Virtual PS 3
Virtual PS 4
Conditions
•
•
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all PBXs that
will support virtual PSs.
The conditions for 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations also apply to this feature.
PC Programming Manual References
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—
Phone
Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when ICD Group with Cellular
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
19.1.2 Virtual PS
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
247
13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD Group
13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD
Group
Description
One PS can be registered to up to 4 PBXs in a private network, and a Network ICD group created for the PS
at each PBX, with virtual PSs set to forward to the other PBXs in the network. When a call to the PS is received
at one of the PBXs, the call rings simultaneously at all PBXs in the network to which that PS is registered.
Telephone Company
PBX-1
PBX-2
Private network
ICD Group
PBX-3
Virtual PS1
Virtual PS2
PBX-4
Virtual PS3
Each virtual PS is set to forward calls to the extension number of the actual PS as registered at one of the
other PBXs.
Then, an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group is created containing the registered PS and the virtual PSs.
When a call is received at one of the PBXs, it is forwarded to all of the other PBXs. One private network channel
is used to forward an incoming call to one other PBX. Therefore, if a PS is registered at 3 other PBXs, 3 private
network channels are needed to forward a single call to all of the PBXs.
Each PBX can store the current communication status of each PS (In Range or Out of Range). If the status of
the PS is set to Out of Range when a call is received, the call will be refused and the private network channel
will be released immediately. Since the PS can only be set to In Range at a single PBX at one time, any other
PBXs to which the call is transferred will refuse the call, releasing the VoIP or ISDN channels.
Conditions
•
•
•
248
The KX-NCS3910 (Activation Key for Software Upgrade to Enhanced Version) is required for all PBXs that
will support Virtual PSs.
If no signal is received from a PS for the preprogrammed length of time when an incoming call is received,
the communication status of the PS is set to Out of Range, if enabled through system programming.
When a PS comes within range of a certain PBX, Out of Range status is automatically released. However,
in some negative wireless network conditions, Out of Range status may not be released automatically. In
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
•
•
this case, the PS user can manually release Out of Range status by pressing the Talk key and confirming
that a dial tone can be heard from the PBX.
If the status of a PS is set to Out of Range at all PBXs that it is registered to, the call will be redirected to
the overflow destination of the ICD Group.
Handover from one PBX to another PBX during a conversation is not possible.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— System Wireless—PS Out of Range Timer
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 4— System Wireless—Out of Range Registration
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main
→ Floating Extension Number
→ Distribution Method
5.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Member List
PT Programming Manual References
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
[622] Incoming Call Distribution Group Floating Extension Number
[624] Incoming Call Distribution Group Distribution Method
Feature Manual References
9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
Description
QSIG is a protocol which is based on ISDN (Q.931) and offers enhanced PBX features in a private network.
The QSIG network supports private communications by the TIE line service method.
The following features are available for an ISDN-QSIG or VoIP private network. For ISDN, system programming
is required to specify whether each feature (excluding Calling Line Identification Presentation [CLIP]) is
available for each port of the private network.
[Standard Service Table]
Service
Calling Line Identification
Presentation (CLIP)
Description & Reference
Sends the caller’s number to the QSIG network when making a call.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Connected Line
Identification Presentation
(COLP)
Sends the number of the answered party to the QSIG network when
answering a call.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
249
13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG
Service
Calling Line Identification
Restriction (CLIR)
Description & Reference
Prevents the caller’s CLI being presented to the called party by the
caller.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Connected Line
Identification Restriction
(COLR)
Prevents COLP being sent by the answered party.
Calling Name Identification
Presentation (CNIP)
Sends the caller’s name to the QSIG network when making a call.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Connected Name
Identification Presentation
(CONP)
Sends the name of the answered party to the QSIG network when
answering a call.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Calling Name Identification
Restriction (CNIR)
Prevents the caller’s name being presented to the called party by
the caller.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Connected Name
Identification Restriction
(CONR)
Prevents CONP being sent by the answered party.
Call Forwarding (CF)—by
QSIG
Forwards a call to the QSIG network.
® 13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP
(Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
® 13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call
Forwarding)
Call Transfer (CT)—by QSIG
Transfers a call to the QSIG network.
® 13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
Completion of Calls to Busy
Subscriber (CCBS)—by
QSIG
Receives callback ringing when a busy called party on the QSIG
network becomes free.
® 13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion
of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
250
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber)
[Enhanced Service Table]
Service
Network Direct Station
Selection (NDSS)
Description & Reference
Allows the extensions connected to up to seven other PBXs in a
network to be monitored, as well as the transferring of calls to those
extensions with one touch.
® 13.1.17 Private Network Features—NDSS (Network Direct
Station Selection)
Centralized Voice Mail
Allows up to 8 PBXs to share the services of a VPS connected to
another PBX in DPT integration. This VPS can provide voice mail
for extensions attached to any of the PBXs in the network.
® 13.1.16 Private Network Features—Centralized Voice Mail
Feature Manual References
9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
13.1.21 Private Network Features—QSIG—CCBS (Completion of
Calls to Busy Subscriber)
Description
If the call has been made to an extension in another PBX in the QSIG network and the called party is busy, an
extension user can set to receive callback ringing when the called party becomes free. When the user answers
the callback ringing, that party’s number is automatically dialed.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
This feature is available under the following conditions:
a. The caller’s PBX is capable of using CCBS.
b. The called party’s PBX is capable of accepting CCBS.
For ISDN, receiving and sending CCBS must be enabled individually on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis through
system programming.
An extension user can set only one CCBS. The last setting is effective.
The CCBS setting is canceled if there is no callback ringing within 60 minutes or callback ringing is not
answered within 10 seconds.
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
3.40 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
251
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)
Description
The PBX forwards the call to a destination extension in another PBX in the QSIG network. The destination can
be set on your own PBX on an extension basis as the forward destination of CO line calls (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding)).
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the forwarded call, the following situation will be
possible.
[Example]
1
Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials
extension number "2000", and the call
is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2
through QSIG network.
2
The call is forwarded to the forward
destination of CO line calls of extension
2000, which is extension "1001" of
PBX-1.
3
The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is
released, and the call is connected
directly to the forward destination of
extension 2000.
QSIG
PBX-1
PBX-2
1 Call to 2000
2 Forwarded
to 1001
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Extn. 2000
(Forward Destination
of CO Line Calls: 1001)
Dials "2000".
QSIG
PBX-1
PBX-2
3
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Extn. 2000
Conditions
•
This feature can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
3.40 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
252
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Operating Manual References
1.3.29 FWD (Call Forwarding)
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/
Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/CONP
(Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
Description
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) and Calling Name Identification Presentation
(CNIP):
The PBX can send a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when an extension
user makes a call. The called party can see the number and/or name on his telephone display before answering
the call.
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) and Connected Name Identification
Presentation (CONP):
The PBX sends a preprogrammed extension number and/or name to the QSIG network when the extension
user answers an incoming call. The caller can see the number and/or name of the answering party on his
telephone display when the call is answered.
[CLIP/CNIP Example]
2) "John
101"
is displayed.
1) Dials "202".
PBX-1
CLIP: 101
CNIP: John
PBX-2
Caller
(Extn. No.: 101
Extn. Name: John)
Called party
(Extn. No.: 202)
[COLP/CONP Example]
1) Dials "203".
PBX-1
PBX-2
Called party
(Extn. No.: 203
Extn. Name: Tom)
FWD, IRNA, etc.
Caller
3) "Paul
204"
is displayed.
COLP: 204
CONP: Paul
Answering party
(Extn. No.: 204
Extn. Name: Paul)
2) Answers the call.
CLIP/COLP Number:
The extension number sent to the QSIG network for CLIP/COLP can be assigned for each extension through
system programming.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
253
13.1.23 Private Network Features—QSIG—CLIP/COLP (Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation) and CNIP/
CONP (Calling/Connected Name Identification Presentation)
CNIP/CONP Name:
The extension name sent to the QSIG network for CNIP/CONP can be assigned for each extension through
system programming.
Calling/Connected Line Identification Restriction (CLIR/COLR):
It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension number to the QSIG network by pressing
the CLIR button, COLR button, or entering the feature number.
Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR) and Connected Name Identification Restriction
(CONR)
It is possible for each extension to restrict the sending of its extension name to the QSIG network. When CLIR
is activated, CNIR becomes active automatically. When COLR is activated, CONR becomes active
automatically.
Conditions
•
•
COLP/CLIR/COLR/CNIP/CONP/CNIR/CONR Assignment for Each Port
Each service can be enabled or disabled on each ISDN (QSIG) port of the PBX.
CLIR Button and COLR Button
It is possible to switch between CLIP and CLIR by pressing the CLIR button, and COLP and COLR by
pressing the COLR button. A flexible button can be customized as the CLIR or COLR button.
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service—
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ COLR Set / Cancel
→ CLIR Set / Cancel
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Number
→ Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main
→ Extension Number
→ Extension Name
COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
PT Programming Manual References
[003] Extension Number
[004] Extension Name
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.52 Private Network Features—CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation)
1.3.53 Private Network Features—CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction)
1.3.55 Private Network Features—COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction)
254
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
13.1.24 Private Network Features—QSIG—CT (Call Transfer)
Description
The PBX transfers the call to a destination extension in another PBX in the QSIG network.
If the same trunk group is used for the incoming call and the transferred call, the following situation will be
possible.
[Example]
1
Extension 1000 of PBX-1 dials
extension number "2000", and the call
is sent to extension "2000" of PBX-2
through QSIG network.
2
The call is transferred from extension
2000 to extension "1001" of PBX-1.
3
The call between PBX-1 and PBX-2 is
released, and the call is connected
directly to the transfer destination of
extension 2000.
QSIG
PBX-1
PBX-2
1 Call to 2000
2 Transferred
to 1001
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Extn. 2000
Dials "2000".
QSIG
PBX-1
PBX-2
3
Extn. 1000 Extn. 1001
Extn. 2000
Conditions
•
•
This feature can be enabled or disabled on an ISDN (QSIG) port basis.
Call Transfer with Announcement and Call Transfer without Announcement is possible (® 3.1.10 Call
Transfer).
PC Programming Manual References
3.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Supplementary Service— COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP,
CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, E911
3.40 [1-3] Option— New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
255
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
Operating Manual References
1.3.11 Call Transfer
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet
Protocol)
Description
The PBX can connect to another PBX via a private IP network. In this case, voice signals are converted into
IP packets (VoIP) and sent through this network.
VoIP networks support private network communications using TIE line service.
[Example]
Telephone Company
TRG 1
PBX-1
PBX-2
Extn.1000
:
Extn.2000
Private IP
Network
V-IPGW
Extn.1999
Router
V-IPGW
Router
Extn.2999
TRG 2
Dials "2999".
:
PBX-3
Extn.3000
V-IPGW
Router
:
Extn.3999
Required Programming
• PBX
For making a call:
ARS programming (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)) or TIE line service programming
For receiving a call:
TIE line service programming
256
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
[TIE Line Routing and Modification Table]
Priority 1
Location
No.
Leading
No.
Priority 2
Dial Modification
TRG
Removed
No. of
Digits
01
2
2 (VoIP
port)
0
02
3
2
0
:
:
:
:
Added
No.
..
Dial Modification
TRG
Removed
No. of
Digits
Added
No.
..
..
..
..
:
:
:
:
:
[Explanation]
•
Calls to destinations with leading number "2" or "3" are automatically routed through the VoIP ports,
designated as trunk group 2.
V-IPGW Card
IP address assignment for the local PBX and other PBXs.
[Programming Example]
Destination
Leading No.
IP Address
2
200.45.11.35
3
199.176.64.1
:
:
[Explanation]
Calls are routed to the IP address of each V-IPGW card based on the leading number dialed.
Gateway Groups
It is possible to automatically reroute outgoing VoIP calls according to preassigned gateway groups.
A gateway device can be assigned a gateway group number based on its IP Address. When a call is made
using a leading number allocated to a gateway group, it is routed to the lowest-numbered available device
within that group. In other words, if the lowest-numbered device is busy or not available, the call slides to the
next available device.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
257
13.1.25 Private Network Features—VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
[Example]
Office A (GW Group-1)
Gateway Settings List
1. IP-GW(1): GW Group-1
2. IP-GW(2): GW Group-1
3. IP-GW(3): GW Group-2
4. IP-GW(4): GW Group-2
PBX-2
IP-GW(1)
Leading Number
List
1. 1xx: GW Group-1
2. 2xx: GW Group-2
Dials "123XXX"
Busy
PBX-1
Private IP
Network
V-IPGW
IP-GW(2)
Office B (GW Group-2)
Rerouted
PBX-3
IP-GW(3)
IP-GW(4)
When "123XXX" is dialed, the call is routed to GW Group-1. However the lowest-numbered device (V-IPGW(1))
is busy or not available, so the call is rerouted to V-IPGW(2).
Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines
When a VoIP call cannot be completed successfully, the PBX can automatically attempt to make the call using
a public CO line instead. This provides a backup method of making calls in cases when IP network transmission
cannot be completed successfully.
[Example]
Telephone Company
(area code: 222)
Telephone Company
(area code: 333)
1-333-123-1011
PBX-1
V-IPGW
Extn.1000
Dials
"7-20-1011".
PBX code: 30
PBX-2
Private IP
Network
V-IPGW
Extn.1011
(333-123-1011)
PBX code: 20
The leading numbers of extensions accessed through the VoIP network are added as entries to the Quick
Dialing table, in addition to being registered as Other PBX Extension Numbers, as shown below:
[Programming Example]
Number to dial to call an extension at another PBX using VoIP network:
7 (TIE line access number) + 20 (PBX Code) + 1011 (extension number)
Number to dial to call that extension using a public CO line:
9 (CO line access number) + 1-333-123-1011
[Quick Dialing Table]
258
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.26 PS Connection
Quick Dialing No.
Destination No.
720
91333123
If the call cannot be completed using the VoIP network, and the dialed leading number is found in the Quick
Dialing Table, the call will be automatically rerouted to a CO line and as specified by the corresponding
destination number.
When a call is made using the VoIP network, if the PBX does not receive a reply from the other PBX within
about 4 seconds of making the call, or an error is returned, the call is rerouted to a public CO line as specified.
Sending Faxes Through the Network
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether faxes are sent using analog or T.38 protocol
signals.
Conditions
•
•
Some QSIG services are available. (® 13.1.20 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES—QSIG)
Toll Restriction (TRS) settings apply to calls rerouted to public CO lines.
Installation Manual References
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
PC Programming Manual References
3.7 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual IP Gateway Port
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial— Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not
work
11.1 [9-1] TIE Table
Feature Manual References
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
13.1.26 PS Connection
Description
A Panasonic portable station (PS) can be used in place of a proprietary telephone (PT), providing wireless
access to PBX features and call handling.
Cell Stations (CSs) allow PSs to receive reception within a designated area.
1. Registration
Before a PS can be used, it must be registered with the PBX through system programming and assigned
an extension number.
® 3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— Registration
® [690] PS Registration
Because a PS transmits radio waves, it is possible that a PS belonging to a neighboring PBX can be
registered to your PBX. To prevent this sort of unauthorized registration, a personal identification number
(PIN) can be programmed for this PBX that must be entered on the PS during registration. This PIN, if
programmed, is only used during the PS registration process.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
259
13.1.26 PS Connection
® 3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— Personal Identification Number
® [691] PS Termination
Each PS can be registered to more than one PBX if necessary, and registration can be canceled if a PS
will no longer be used with one of these PBXs.
® 3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration— De-registration
® [692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration
2. Connection
There are two ways a PS can be used.
As an Extension
A PS is assigned its own extension number when it is registered to a PBX. The PS can use this extension
number to make and receive calls, just as a wired telephone can. A PS can be a member of an incoming
call distribution (ICD) group, can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls, etc., just as a wired
telephone can.
A PS can also be a member of a PS ring group (® 13.1.29 PS Ring Group). A PS ring group is a way for
several PSs to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously, but does not offer all of the features provided
by an ICD group. (® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES)
In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
A PS can share an extension number with a wired telephone, allowing extension users to use their PSs
when they are away from their desks to answer or make calls as if they were using their wired telephones.
(® 20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
3. PS Interaction with CS
Each PS communicates with the PBX wirelessly through a cell station (CS). Each CS is connected to the
PBX and sends and receives radio waves to and from different PSs within its range, using different channels
for different PSs.
A PS must be within range of a CS in order to be used, however, multiple CSs can be used with the same
PBX to offer a greater area of wireless coverage. Additionally, a PS does not need to be used with a specific
CS; any PS can communicate with any CS provided the PS is registered to the PBX, and provided the CS
has at least one channel available.
Handover
If a PS is within range of more than one CS, the PS will communicate with the CS which has the greatest signal
strength and an available channel. When a PS user moves out of range of one CS and moves in range of
another CS, the PS will "hand over" its communications to the new CS. Handover is possible when:
a. The PS is on an intercom call or on a call with an outside party. (The call will not be disconnected during
the handover.)
b. A call is ringing at the PS. (The call will continue to ring after the handover.)
c. The PS is in idle status (i.e., waiting to receive calls).
[Example of Handover]
CS-1
CS-2
CS-1
CS-2
Handover
Moving
Call is not disconnected
Handover is not possible when the PS is:
a. Not within range of another CS.
260
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.27 PS Directory
b. Within range of another CS but that CS is busy.
c. Screening a call via Live Call Screening (LCS) or recording a call via Two-way Record (® 19.1.4 Voice
Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
d. Paging other extensions. (® 13.1.1 Paging)
e. On a doorphone call.
f. Dialing digits to make a CO line call.
g. On a call with an extension which is recording the conversation via PC Console or PC Phone.
IP Cell Station
The IP Cell Station Unit (IP-CS) can be connected to a PBX via a LAN. The IP-CS supports existing DECT 6.0
Portable Stations (PSs) with the same features as using a traditional CS. The IP-CS allows for easy and
cost-saving installation using an existing IP network infrastructure.
The IP-CS provides the following:
– Wireless systems using a converged voice and data network infrastructure.
– Wireless branch offices and wireless solutions by long distance installation on larger premises.
– Reliable wireless communication using DECT 6.0 technology over an IP network.
For more information about IP-CSs, refer to the IP-CS Quick Installation Guide.
Conditions
•
•
•
If every CS that a PS is in range of is busy when that PS is called, the call will not be connected and the
caller will hear a busy tone.
For more information about connecting PSs to CSs, see the Quick Installation Guide for the relevant CS.
The number of digits allowed for a PS extension number is determined by the PS model. See your PS
documentation for details.
PC Programming Manual References
3.39 [1-2] Portable Station
PT Programming Manual References
[690] PS Registration
[691] PS Termination
[692] Personal Identification Number (PIN) for PS Registration
Feature Manual References
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
13.1.27 PS Directory
Description
A portable station (PS) user can make a call or access PBX features using information stored in the PS and
PBX.
Refer to the Operating Instructions supplied with your PS for available directories and usage.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
261
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Directory Type
Description
Programming
PS Dialing Directory
A list of names and telephone numbers. Used to
make a call to one of the stored parties.
Stored in the PS by the
PS user.
Quick Dialing
A list of frequently dialed feature numbers as well as
names and telephone numbers. Used to quickly
access one of the stored features, or quickly make a
call to one of the stored parties.
Stored in the PS by the
PS user.
System Speed
Dialing Directory
A system-wide list of names and telephone numbers.
Used to make a call to one of the stored parties.
Stored in the PBX.
PBX Extension
Dialing Directory
A system-wide list of extension names. Used to make
a call to one of the stored extensions.
Stored in the PBX.
PC Programming Manual References
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
→ Name
→ CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Name
PT Programming Manual References
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[004] Extension Name
13.1.28 PS Feature Buttons
Description
Although a portable station (PS) does not feature as many buttons as a proprietary telephone (PT), a PS can
be customized to give a PS user access to PBX features, just as the flexible buttons on a PT can be customized.
(® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons)
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Description
A PS ring group is a way for several portable stations (PSs) to be notified of an incoming call simultaneously,
while using only one channel of a cell station (CS).
Normally when a PS receives a call, one channel of a CS is used to ring the PS (® 13.1.26 PS Connection).
If several PSs are members of an incoming call distribution (ICD) group, the available channels of a CS will
become busy just by ringing each PS. Assigning a group of PSs to a PS ring group alleviates this strain on the
CS because only one channel is needed to ring a PS ring group’s members.
PS ring group members and related parameters are assigned through system programming, as explained
below.
a. Floating Extension Number: When this number is called, all PSs in the group ring.
262
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
b. Group Name: Can be displayed on a ringing PS to indicate that the incoming CO line call is a group call,
and not a call directed to the PS’s extension number. This is only available when Incoming CO Line Call
Information Display is set to "Called Number".
c. Incoming CO Line Call Information Display: Determines which information is shown on the PS display
when a group call is received. Select "Caller ID" to display the caller’s telephone number or name,
or "Called Number" to display the name of the PS ring group which is receiving the call.
d. Member PSs: Select each PS that will be a member of the corresponding PS ring group. Note that a PS
can belong to more than one PS ring group.
[Programming Example: PS Ring Group]
Floating Extension No.
Group Name
Incoming CO Line
Information Display
PS 1
PS 2
PS 3
PS 4
PS 5
PS 6
PS 7
PS 8
PS Ring Group 1
301
Sales 1
PS Ring Group 2
302
Sales 2
PS Ring Group 3
303
Customer Service
Caller ID
Called Number
Caller ID
PS Ring Group Member
[Example of PS Ring Groups 1 and 2]
PS Ring Group 1
Floating Extension No. 301
Name: Sales 1
PS 1
Extn. 601
PS 2
Extn. 602
PS Ring Group 2
Floating Extension No. 302
Name: Sales 2
PS 3
Extn. 603
PS 4
Extn. 701
PS 5
Extn. 702
Explanation:
PS Ring Group 1
PS 1, PS 2, and PS 3 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 301, and,
in the case of a CO line call, will display the Caller ID information for the call.
These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming not
shown here).
PS Ring Group 2
PS 3, PS 4, and PS 5 will ring simultaneously when a call is directed to floating extension number 302, and,
in the case of a CO line call, will display "Sales 2".
These PSs will ring individually when a call is directed to their assigned extension numbers (programming not
shown here).
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
263
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
ICD Groups vs. PS Ring Groups
Assigning PSs to either an ICD group or a PS ring group will allow multiple PSs to receive group calls
simultaneously. The differences between the two are highlighted below:
Features
PS Ring Group
ICD Group
Members can ring simultaneously when a call is received
Calls can be distributed to member extensions using
different methods
The CS is less likely to be busy; ringing all member PSs
uses only one CS channel
Members can log-in, log-out, and use Wrap-up time, ICD
Group button
Both PTs and PSs can belong to the same group
Each member can belong to more than one group
Calls can wait in a queue if they cannot be answered
[Example of CS Channels Used for PS Ring Group Calls and ICD Group Calls]
PS Ring Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
Incoming call
Incoming call
PS Ring Group
ICD Group
ICD Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
PS Ring Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
ICD Group
Member
Explanation:
The PS ring group has six members which are in range of two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS
uses one channel to ring all member PSs within its range.
The ICD group has one proprietary telephone (PT) member, as well as six PS members which are in range of
two different CSs. When a call arrives, each CS uses three channels to ring each of the member PSs within
its range.
264
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.29 PS Ring Group
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed.
Each member of a PS ring group must be a PS, but each member does not need to be in range of the
same CS. When a call is directed to a PS ring group, all CSs connected to the PBX will try to ring members
of the group.
PS ring groups do not have Log-in or Log-out features. There is no way for a PS to log-in to or log-out from
a PS ring group.
A PS ring group may be assigned as a member of an ICD group, but the PS ring group cannot log-in to or
log-out from an ICD group. The PS ring group (and therefore its members) will always be logged-in.
When a PS is assigned to a PS ring group, the following settings are used if it receives a call directly, but
are disregarded when it receives a group call:
a. Delayed Ringing (All PSs will ring simultaneously.)
b. The incoming call display preference assigned to the PS through system programming.
c. Features set on the PS, such as Call Forwarding (FWD). Note, however, that if a PS user has set Do
Not Disturb (DND), that PS will not ring for group calls either.
When a call is directed to a PS ring group, the PBX will try to ring the group’s members regardless of
whether or not they are already on another call. If all members of a PS ring group are busy when the group
is called, their PSs will not ring but the caller will hear a ringback tone.
A PS ring group will only ring one call at a time on its member PSs. If a PS ring group is ringing one call
when another call is directed to the group, the group will appear busy to the caller. If a call is directed to a
specific PS within the group in this situation and the PS is available to answer calls, the PS will ring as
usual.
The PBX will ring calls for only two PS ring groups at a time. In other words, if two calls directed to two
different PS ring groups are ringing, no other PS ring group calls will ring until one of the other ringing calls
is answered.
If a PS in a PS ring group has set the DND feature for CO line calls, the PS will not ring for CO line calls
as well as intercom calls directed to the group.
Compatible PSs
The following PSs can be assigned to PS ring groups:
– KX-TD7680
– KX-TD7684
– KX-TD7685
– KX-TD7690
– KX-TD7694
– KX-TD7695
PC Programming Manual References
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—
5.24 [3-9] PS Ring Group
5.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List
Distribution Method
PT Programming Manual References
[620] Incoming Call Distribution Group Member
Feature Manual References
4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb)
9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
265
13.1.30 PT Programming
13.1.30 PT Programming
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) can be used to customize the settings of the PBX or of an extension, using the
following programming features:
Programming
Type
Authorized
Programmer
Description
Example
Personal
Programming
Used by an extension user to
customize the extension’s settings.
PT Display Language,
Call Waiting Tone, etc.
Extension user
System
Programming
Used by an authorized party to
customize the PBX.
Intercept Destination,
ARS Mode, Date and
Time, etc.
Authorized
administrator or
extension user
Manager
Programming
Used by an extension assigned as a
manager to customize the current
state of an extension, or to grant
special privileges temporarily to an
extension user.
Switching the current
time mode, Remote
Extension Dial Lock,
Remote PIN Clear, etc.
Extension assigned
as a manager
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines the level of programming an extension user is authorized
to perform:
– System programming and personal programming
– Personal programming only
– No programming may be performed
The extension which is connected to the lowest numbered port on the card installed in the lowest numbered
slot can perform both personal programming and system programming regardless of the extension’s COS.
COS programming determines which extensions are manager extensions and can therefore perform
manager programming.
During programming, the PT is considered to be busy and will not receive calls.
Only one system programming (including PC programming) or manager programming session is permitted
at a time, i.e., these two programming features cannot be performed simultaneously by two users. The
maximum number of simultaneous programmers that each PBX supports is as follows:
– one system programmer + 63 personal programmers
– one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers
– 64 personal programmers
System Programming Password Level
To access system programming, a valid password must be entered. (® 13.1.3 Password Security)
Personal Programming Data Reset
A PT user can return settings made through personal programming (Preferred Line Assignment, Live Call
Screening Mode, etc.) to their default settings all at once.
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Programming Mode Level
13.1 [11-1] Main—Password
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level
→ System Password - PT Programming—Prog *# : Administrator Level
→ Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1
266
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
13.1.30 PT Programming
PT Programming Manual References
2.1 PT Programming
[516] Programming Mode Limitation
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
11.1.1 Manager Features
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
3.1 Personal Programming
3.2 Manager Programming
3.3 System Programming
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
267
13.1.30 PT Programming
268
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 14
Features and Configurations—Q
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
269
14.1.2 Quick Setup
14.1 Q
14.1.1 Quick Dialing
Description
An extension user can make a call or access a feature easily. This is enabled by storing the number (extension
number, telephone number, or feature number etc.) for Quick Dialing.
Quick Dialing is convenient in situations such as the following:
– Room service calls in a hotel
– Calling your company’s headquarters via the public network. Extension users can think of the Quick Dialing
number as an extension number.
[Programming Example: Quick Dialing]
Location No.
Quick Dialing No.
Desired Number
Quick Dialing 01
110
9110 (CO Line Call)
Quick Dialing 02
5
3016 (Room Service)
Quick Dialing 03
2011
90123456789 (Headquarters)
Conditions
•
Quick Dialing numbers follow the flexible numbering plan.
(® 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering)
PC Programming Manual References
4.10 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.57 Quick Dialing
14.1.2 Quick Setup
Description
Basic PBX parameters can be programmed the first time the PBX is accessed with a PC using the Maintenance
Console software.
When the PBX is accessed with the Installer Level Programmer Code and default password (®
13.1.3 Password Security), for the first time (i.e., accessed after the PBX’s settings have been initialized or
when the PBX’s settings are still set to their default values), Quick Setup will launch automatically. From here
the following basic parameters can be programmed as desired:
270
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
14.1.2 Quick Setup
Item
Parameter
Description
Date & Time Set
Year/Month/Date/
Hour/Minute
The date and time set on the PC can be used by default.
System Password for
Installer
4–10 characters
Enter the system password for installer (®
13.1.3 Password Security).
Manager Extension
and Operator
Extension Number
Assign an extension as a manager extension (®
11.1.1 Manager Features) and an extension as a PBX
operator (® 12.1.5 Operator Features).
Flexible Numbering—
Feature
1. Pattern 1
Select whether or not the prefix " " must be entered
before dialing feature numbers.
[Example] Call Pickup feature number
Pattern 1 (with ): 41
Pattern 2 (without ): 41
Note that certain feature numbers (Line Access
numbers, Operator Call, etc.) never need this prefix.
(with )
2. Pattern 2
(without )
For a list of the default flexible numbers, refer to the
[Flexible Numbering Table (available while a dial tone
is heard)] (® 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed
Numbering).
Flexible Numbering—
Extension
From 101/from 201
Determines the number from which default extension
numbers begin.
Flexible Numbering—
Operator
0/9
The feature number for Operator Call can be selected.
Flexible Numbering—
CO Access
0/1/9
The feature number for Idle Line Access can be
selected.
DHCP Client
Enable/Disable
Determines whether to use a DHCP server to assign IP
address information automatically or not.
LAN Connection*1
•
Manually enter the LAN information when not using a
DHCP server.
•
•
•
Virtual Card
*1
–
IP Address for
IPCMPR Card
IP Address for
VoIP-DSP
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Select whether to install a V-IPEXT, V-SIPEXT, or
V-SIPGW card.
If the DHCP Client setting is set to Enable, this parameter can not be set.
Note that the programmable items may vary depending on the version of Maintenance Console being used.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
271
14.1.2 Quick Setup
272
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 15
Features and Configurations—R
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
273
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
15.1 R
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
Description
Every extension automatically saves the last external telephone number dialed, allowing the same number to
be dialed again.
Outgoing Call Log
Information on outgoing CO line calls is automatically logged at each extension. Users of display PTs can view
details of a preset number of recently dialed telephone numbers, and easily call the same outside party again.
Automatic Redial
If Last Number Redial is performed in hands-free mode and the called party is busy, the number will be
automatically redialed a preprogrammed number of times.
This feature is available only on certain proprietary telephone (PT) models which have the SP-PHONE button.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Memorized telephone numbers are replaced by new ones.
Interrupt Redial
When an outside party or seized CO line is busy, a user can attempt to redial the number by pressing the
REDIAL button without going on-hook. This can be performed several times without having to go on-hook.
Outgoing Call Log Display by REDIAL Button
The REDIAL button can be programmed through system programming to display the Outgoing Call Log.
This feature is available for display PT users while on-hook.
If the Outgoing Call Log is used to redial an outside party, or a number already stored in the Outgoing Call
Log is manually redialed again, the number will be stored in the call log multiple times. However, calls made
using the REDIAL button are not stored in the Outgoing Call Log again.
It is possible to change the number of records that can be stored at each extension through system
programming.
Automatic Redial is canceled if any dialing operations are performed, an incoming call is answered during
Automatic Redial, or the Redial Call No Answer Ring Time is expires.
The Redial Call No Answer Ring time is programmable.
Automatic Redial is only available for calls that are dialed using a PRI line.
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone
→ Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter
→ Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration
→ Automatic Redial—Analog CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Redial
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 2
→ Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
→ Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory
→ Redial—Call Log by Redial key
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 7— Outgoing Call Log Memory
274
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
PT Programming Manual References
[205] Automatic Redial Repeat Times
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.58 Redial, Last Number
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection
Description
It is possible to select the type of ring tone pattern that arrives at an extension for each type of incoming call,
etc.
[Ring Tone Patterns]
1 280 ms
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
* The duration of a ring tone may vary by country/area.
[Ring Tone Pattern Table]
The ring tone pattern table is categorized into three parts, each containing a specified number of pattern plans.
The ring tone pattern table is categorized as follows:
•
Incoming CO Line Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each trunk group.
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO
• Incoming Doorphone Calls: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for each doorphone.
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone
• Others: each pattern plan can assign a ring tone pattern for incoming intercom calls as well as ring tones
assigned to certain features (e.g., timed reminder).
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others
The ring tone patterns that arrive at an extension are determined by the pattern plan that is assigned to that
extension through system programming.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
275
15.1.3 Room Status Control
[Programming Example of Ring Tone Pattern Table]
CO Line Call/
Hold Recall
Doorphone
Call
Table
No.
Intercom
Call/Hold
Recall
1
Double
Single
Single
2
Single
Double
Double
:
:
:
TRG1
...
Port 1
:
:
...
:
Timed
Reminder
Call Back
LCS
External
Sensor
:
:
:
:
Conditions
•
•
"PT Ring Off Setting" can be enabled or disabled through system programming. If disabled, PT users
cannot turn incoming call ringing off for their extension.
For the S-CO, G-CO, L-CO, ICD Group, INTERCOM, PDN and SDN buttons, one of 30 ring tones can be
assigned through personal programming.
PC Programming Manual References
4.15 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.16 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone— Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Extension—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings
→Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
→Option 6— ICM Tone
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop
CO, Single CO, Group CO, G-DN, SDN)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Ring Pattern Table
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group
CO, G-DN, SDN)
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
3.1.4 Customizing the Buttons
15.1.3 Room Status Control
Description
A proprietary telephone (PT) with a 6-line display designated as the hotel operator extension can be used to
view and set the Check-in/Check-out/Cleaned-up (Ready or Not Ready) status of guest rooms associated with
extensions.
Any wired extension can be used as a room extension without special programming.
Flexible buttons on the hotel operator’s extension can be set as Room Status Control buttons. The three types
of Room Status Control buttons are as follows:
276
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
15.1.3 Room Status Control
•
Check-in
Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-out to Check-in.
Remote Extension Dial Lock is turned off, allowing calls to be made from the extension.
•
Check-out
Switches the status of selected room extensions from Check-in to Check-out.
Room extension data, such as Timed Reminder or Last Number Redial data, is cleared, and Remote
Extension Dial Lock is turned on, restricting some calls. This can be useful to prevent the room extension
from being used when no guest is checked in.
•
Cleaned-up
Switches the status of selected room extensions between Ready and Not Ready.
When a guest checks out of a room, the room status becomes Checked-out and Not Ready. After the room
has been cleaned, the status can be changed to Checked-out and Ready using this button. It is also
possible to change the status back to Checked-out and Not Ready if necessary.
Room Status Control Mode
Pressing a Room Status Control button when the PT is idle allows the hotel operator extension to enter Room
Status Control mode. When in Room Status Control mode, the corresponding Room Status Control button’s
light flashes red. The Room Status Control button that was pressed determines which room status each room
extension can be switched to. For example, if the Check-in button was pressed, the Check-in button’s light
flashes red and the hotel operator can select which room extensions to check-in.
In addition, DSS buttons on the hotel operator’s extension or a paired DSS Console show the room status of
each extension as follows:
Light Pattern
Status
Off
Checked-out and Ready
Flashing Red
Checked-out and Not Ready
Red on
Checked-in
[Example Use: Checked-in Mode]
DSS button
Room101
Room102
Room103
Rooms 101 and 103
are currently in
checked-in status.
Room104
Check-in button
Room105
Check-out button
Cleaned-up button
When in Room Status Control mode, the hotel operator’s extension is treated as a busy extension, similar to
when performing PT programming. Callers to that extension will hear a busy tone.
All other operations, including pressing other Room Status Control buttons, will be ignored. In addition, the
lights of fixed and flexible buttons do not show their normal display pattern. In order to perform other operations,
the hotel operator must exit Room Status Control mode.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
277
15.1.3 Room Status Control
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
SVM voice messages and messages left on the extension’s Voice Mail (VM) will be cleared at Check-out.
A maximum of four hotel operators can be assigned.
Only one of each type of Room Status Control button can be assigned.
Extensions associated with rooms must be one of the following types:
PT (including IP-PT), SLT, T1-OPX
PSs cannot be checked in and out as room extensions.
When using extensions to represent guest rooms, it is recommended to set the extension number of a
room extension is the same as the room number, for convenience.
If enabled through system programming, check-in and check-out information is recorded by SMDR.
PC Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button— Type
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Type
8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4
Feature Manual References
5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock
15.1.1 Redial, Last Number
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Operating Manual References
1.3.59 Room Status Control
278
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 16
Features and Configurations—S
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
279
16.1.1 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)
16.1 S
16.1.1 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)
Description
The KX-NT366 IP-PT features 12 flexible buttons, with an LCD screen next to the buttons. Each item can be
named on the LCD screen through personal/system programming to reflect the function of its corresponding
flexible button. Additionally, the flexible buttons can be organized into 4 "pages", allowing you to assign a total
of 48 items to the 12 flexible buttons. You can toggle between pages by pressing the NEXT PAGE key, as
follows:
CO 12
Bank
CO 11
Home
CO 10
London offc.
CO 09
NY offc.
CO 08
Sales
CO 07
Chris Walace
CO 06
Andre Romel
CO 05
Sean Carter
CO 04
Keith Murray
CO 03
Log-in/out
CO 02
LCS
CO 01
CO 13
NEXT PAGE is pressed
Conditions
•
•
•
Up to 12 characters can be assigned to the LCD of each flexible button through personal/system
programming.
When an incoming CO line call is answered or a CO line is seized, the corresponding CO button will turn
Green and the LCD display will switch to the page that the corresponding CO button is registered in.
It is not recommended to assign a System Alarm button when using this feature, because if an alarm occurs
when the System Alarm button is not on the visible page, the alarm will not be noticed.
PC Programming Manual References
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—
280
Feature Manual
Label Name
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
Operating Manual References
1.3.60 Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only)
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
Description
This PBX supports the connection of SIP supported IP telephones (hardphones and softphones). SIP
extensions make and receive calls using Internet Protocol (IP).
For information about SIP extension compatibility with feature numbers, see 6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed
Numbering.
Below are some features supported by SIP extensions:
– Account Code Entry (® 1.1.2 Account Code Entry)
– Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
– Call Forwarding (FWD) (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
– Call Hold (® 3.1.4 Call Hold)
– Call Transfer with Announcement (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer)
– Conference*1 (® 3.1.18 Conference)
– Direct Inward System Access (DISA) (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
– Doorphone Call (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call)
– Emergency Call (® 5.1.2 Emergency Call)
– Idle Line Access (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
– Operator Call (® 12.1.5 Operator Features)
– Personal Speed Dialing (® 16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal)
– Quick Dialing (® 14.1.1 Quick Dialing)
– S-CO Line Access (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
– System Speed Dialing (® 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System)
– TIE Line Call (® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)
– Trunk Group Access (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access)
*1
As a member only (not as originator).
KX-HGT100 extensions support the following additional features:
– Message Waiting
– Personal Speed Dialing (Internal)
– Voice Mail
– Automatic Date and Time Adjustment
– Showing/preventing the telephone number when making outside calls
– SVM
– Call Transfer without Announcement
For details, refer to the Quick Reference Guide of the KX-HGT100.
Conditions
•
•
This PBX supports SIP devices that use RFC 3261, 3264, 3310, 2327, or 4028.
Some SIP phones may not be compatible with this PBX.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
281
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
•
•
•
Before a SIP extension can be used with the PBX, the IP address of the IPCMPR card, password, and
extension number must be assigned on the SIP extension and on the PBX.
For details on how to register, refer to the Information on IP Networking Guide.
When registering the SIP extension, the user ID must be the extension number of the SIP extension.
When a SIP extension uses the Call Hold feature, the target call is put on Consultation Hold.
Installation Manual References
3.4.1 Virtual Cards
PC Programming Manual References
3.17 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Virtual SIP Extension
3.18 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port
3.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Virtual SIP Extension Port—Connection Command
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Description
Automatically logs detailed information for each extension.
1. SMDR Output Port
The following output methods can be selected through system programming:
13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Port
Output Method
Description
Serial Interface (RS-232C) port
SMDR information is sent to a connected PC, printer, etc.
Telnet compatible terminal emulator
SMDR information is sent to a Telnet compatible terminal
emulator via LAN.
2. SMDR Output Data
The following data can be recorded and sent to the SMDR output port:
a. CO line call information (incoming/outgoing)
b. Intercom call information (outgoing)
c. Log-in/Log-out information
d. PBX error log (® 10.1.4 Local Alarm Information)
e. Hospitality feature information (® 8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES)
f. Printing Message information (® 13.1.13 Printing Message)
Memory for SMDR: A specified number of records (data) can be remembered by the PBX. When memory
is full, the oldest data is overwritten by new data.
3. SMDR Format Type and Contents
The following three types of output format can be selected through system programming:
282
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Pattern A: 80-column text without call charge information
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(5)
CO Dial Number
(2) (25)
Ring Duration ACC Code
(10)
(4)
(8)
01/02/02 10:03AM
01/02/02 10:07AM
01/02/02 10:15AM
01/02/02 10:30AM
1200
1200
1200
*123
01
01
01
01
<I>12345678901234567890
<I>
1234567890123456
1234567890123456
5'15
0'05
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 01:07PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
01
01
01
01
01
<I>ABC COMPANY12345678 0'05
<D>CDE9876<I>Q COMPANY 0'05
ABC COMPANY12345678
123..............
123456XX
01/02/02 08:33AM
01/02/02 01:07PM
01/02/02 03:35PM
01/02/02 03:45PM
01/02/02 03:50PM
01/02/02 03:55PM
01/02/02 04:00PM
01/02/02 04:01PM
01/02/02 04:01PM
01/02/02 04:05PM
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
1234
(1)
(2)
(3)
NA
00:00'00
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210 TR
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05 9876543210
00:01'05
00:01'05
00:12'05 98765
In the office
LOG IN
LOG OUT
EXT1235
Check in
Check out
Timed Reminder/Start
Timed Reminder/No Answer
Timed Reminder/Answer
<I>S003
(4)
CD
(3)
RC
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ACC Code
(10)
CD
(3)
Pattern B: 80-column text with call charge information
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(5)
CO Dial Number
(2) (20)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1210 01
01/02/02 10:07AM 2005 01
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
<I>
1234567890123456789
(5)
Duration Cost
(8)
(8+2)
NA
00:00'05 00560.00EU 9876543210
(7)
(10)
(8)
(9)
120 column text
Date
Time
(8 digits) (7)
Ext
(5)
CO
(4)
Dial Number
(50)
Ring Duration Cost
(4) (8)
(8+3)
ACC Code CD
(10)
(3)
01/02/02 10:03AM 1230 0001 123456789012345678901234567890
00:00'05 00560.00EUR 9876543210 TR
01/02/02 10:07AM 1230 0001 <I>ABC COMPANY123456789012345 0'05 00:00'05
9876543210 TR
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(10)
(8)
(9)
[Explanation]
The following table explains the types of data logged by SMDR. Each description below refers to data
indicated above by the numbers in the parentheses.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
283
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Number in
the Pattern
284
Data
Description
(1)
Date
Shows the date of the call.
(2)
Time
Shows the end time of a call as hour/minute/AM or PM.
(3)
Ext
(Extension)
Shows the extension number, floating extension number, etc.,
which was engaged in the call.
Also shows the following codes:
Dxxx: Outgoing CO line call from a doorphone (xxx=doorphone
number) (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call)
Txxx: Outgoing CO line call by TIE line service (xxx=trunk group
number)
*xxx: Verified call (xxx=verification code) (® 19.1.1 Verification
Code Entry)
(4)
CO
Shows the CO line number used for the call.
For patterns A and B, "00" will be shown for CO line numbers over
hundred.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Number in
the Pattern
(5)
Data
Dial Number
Description
[CO Line Call]
Outgoing CO Line Call
Shows the dialed telephone number.
Digits shown are as follows:
0 through 9, , #
P: Pause
F: External Feature Access (EFA) signal
=: Host PBX Access code (® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code
(Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
. (dot): Secret dialing
–: Transferred call
If the transfer destination extension enters additional digits, those
digits will be added after "–".
Incoming CO Line Call
Shows <I> + the caller’s identification name/number.
It is also possible to show the DID call information. In this case,
<D> + DID name/number is added before <I>.
[Outgoing Intercom Call]
Shows the dialed extension number followed by "EXT".
[Log-in/Log-out]
Shows the Log-in or Log-out status.
[Check-in/Check-out]
Shows the check-in or check-out status. (® 15.1.3 Room Status
Control)
[Timed Reminder]
Shows the status of a timed reminder, either "Start", "No
Answer", or "Answer". (® 17.1.4 Timed Reminder)
[Printing Message]
Shows the selected message. (® 13.1.13 Printing Message)
[Sensor Call]
Shows calls from an external sensor as follows:
<I> S + sensor number. (® 5.1.9 External Sensor)
(6)
Ring
Shows the ring duration before the call was answered in minutes/
seconds.
(7)
Duration
Shows the duration of the CO line call in hours/minutes/seconds.
(8)
Acc Code
(Account
Code)
Shows the account code appended to the call. (® 1.1.2 Account
Code Entry)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
285
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Number in
the Pattern
(9)
Data
CD (Condition
Code)
Description
Shows other call information using the following codes:
TR: Transfer
FW: Call Forwarding (FWD) to CO line
D0: Call using Direct Inward System Access (DISA) or TIE line
service
RM: Remote maintenance (modem) (® 13.1.6 PC
Programming)
NA: Not answered call
RC: Received call
AN: Answered call
VR: Received call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
VA: Answered call with Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID)
(10)
Cost
Shows the call charge. This is not available if your telephone
company does not provide a call charge reporting service.
The following data can be controlled through system programming to adjust whether (or how) they are
printed or displayed by SMDR.
[Programmable Items]
Item
286
Description
Outgoing CO line call
Controls whether outgoing CO line calls are shown. This setting
is common throughout the PBX. COS programming is also
required.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Outgoing
Call
® [804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
Incoming CO line call
Controls whether incoming CO line calls are shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Incoming
Call
® [805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing
Outgoing intercom call
Controls whether outgoing intercom calls are recorded.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Intercom
Call
Log-in/Log-out status
Controls whether the Log-in/Log-out status of extensions is
recorded.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— Print Information—Log-in /
Log-out
ARS dial
Controls whether the user-dialed number or the ARS-modified
number is shown.
The Host PBX Access code ("=" followed by the access code) can
be shown (as supplementary information) only when the modified
number is selected in this setting. (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic
Route Selection))
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—ARS Dial
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Item
Description
Caller’s identification
Controls whether the caller’s identification number, name,
number and name, or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, <I>
will not be shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Caller ID
Number & Name
DID number
Controls whether the DID numbers, names, numbers and names,
or nothing is shown. If "none" is selected, <D> will not be shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—DID Number
& Name
Secret dialing
Controls the display of secret dialing, when ARS dial above, is set
to show ARS-modified numbers. If enabled, numbers dialed
secretly will be shown as dots.
If ARS dial is set to show the user-dialed numbers, secretly dialed
numbers are always shown as dots in SMDR, regardless of this
setting.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Secret Dial
Date order
Controls the date format (MM-DD-YY, DD-MM-YY, YY-MM-DD,
YY-DD-MM)
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Date Format
Received call
Controls whether the time of receiving an incoming CO line call
is shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition
Code "RC/VR"
Answered call
Controls whether the time of answering an incoming CO line call
is shown.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR Options— Option—Condition
Code "AN/VA"
Room status
Controls whether room status changes are shown.
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel
Application 1—Room Status Control
Timed Reminder call
Controls whether Timed Reminder calls are shown (®
17.1.4 Timed Reminder).
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel
Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
Printing Message
Specifies the messages that can be selected from an extension
(® 13.1.13 Printing Message).
® 8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel
Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
Time format
Controls whether time is displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour format.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Time Format
(12H / 24H)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
287
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
Conditions
[General]
• SMDR Format
The following SMDR format parameters can be set through system programming in order to match the
paper size being used by the printer:
a. Page Length: determines the number of lines per page.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Page Length (Number of Lines)
® [802] SMDR Page Length
b. Skip Perforation: determines the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—SMDR— SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines)
® [803] SMDR Skip Perforation
The page length should be at least four lines longer than the skip perforation length.
Explanation:
Page
Length
Skip
Perforation
Machine
Perforation
•
•
•
•
•
288
SMDR data is not deleted even if the PBX is reset.
If the PBX is reset during a conversation, the call will not be logged by SMDR.
The following calls are regarded as two separated calls in the SMDR:
– Calls before and after the flash/recall/EFA signal is manually sent during a conversation
– CO-to-CO line calls by Call Transfer, FWD or DISA (each is logged as both an "incoming call" and
an "outgoing call")
The PBX waits for a preprogrammed time period after the end of dialing before starting the SMDR timer
for outgoing CO line calls. When the PBX has sent out all dialed digits to the telephone company and this
timer expires, the PBX begins measuring the duration of the call. A display proprietary telephone (PT)
shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and the total duration of the call are logged by SMDR.
® 4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
® [208] Call Duration Count Starting Time for LCOT
Serial Interface (RS-232C) Parameters
The following communication parameters can be assigned for the Serial Interface (RS-232C port).
a. New Line Code: Select the code appropriate for the PC or printer. If the PC or printer automatically
feeds lines with carriage return, select "CR." If not, select "CR+LF."
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—NL Code
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
b. Baud Rate: Baud rate indicates the transmission speed of data from the PBX to the PC or printer.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
c. Word Length: Word length indicates how many bits compose each character.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Word Length
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
d. Parity Bit: Parity bit indicates what type of parity is used to detect errors in the string of bits composing
a character. Make an appropriate selection depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
•
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
e. Stop Bit Length: Stop bit indicates the end of a bit string which composes a character. Select an
appropriate value depending on the requirements of the PC or printer.
® 13.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C— Communication—Stop Bit
® [800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
If a call is transferred to an ICD group using Automatic Transfer, the condition code "TR" will not be recorded
on SMDR (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer).
[Host PBX Access Code]
• The dialed number including the Host PBX Access code will be recorded on SMDR only if the modified
•
•
number setting is selected in the ARS setting for SMDR.
When a Host PBX Access code is assigned to a trunk group, calls to extensions of the host PBX are not
recorded on SMDR.
A Host PBX Access Code can be used to record only long distance calls on SMDR when a CO line port is
connected directly to the telephone company (not a host PBX). This is allowed when the long distance
code (e.g., "0") is assigned as the Host PBX Access code. All local calls (e.g., calls that do not require
a "0" to be dialed first) are treated as extensions of the telephone company and do not get recorded on
SMDR, because in this case this PBX recognizes the telephone company as the host PBX. Therefore, only
long distance calls are recorded on SMDR.
[Output to a Telnet compatible Terminal Emulator]
• In order to activate a connection to a terminal emulator, the IP address of the IPCMPR card, port number,
•
•
•
user ID ("SMDR"), and password must be entered.
If a terminal emulator user incorrectly enters the user ID or password 3 times consecutively, an alarm will
be sent and connection will not be possible for 10 minutes.
Through system programming, it is possible to assign the PBX port number and password.
The terminal emulator application must be running constantly. If the application is terminated, call records
that occur after the termination will be recorded in the PBX's memory. However, if the number of call records
exceeds the PBX's capacity, older records will be deleted. Also, when the application restarts or is
reconnected, duplicated call records may be output.
[Using SMDR with applications]
SMDR data can also be monitored by applications such as Panasonic Communication Assistant (CA). For
more information, see your application's documentation.
Installation Manual References
3.10.1 Connection of Peripherals
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Dial—Analog CO Call Duration Start
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR— Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR)
8.2 [6-2] Hotel—Main— SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8
13.1 [11-1] Main
→SMDR
→SMDR Options
→RS-232C— Communication—Baud Rate
→RS-232C— Communication—NL Code
→RS-232C— Communication—Word Length
→RS-232C— Communication—Parity Bit
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
289
16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor
→RS-232C—
Communication—Stop Bit
PT Programming Manual References
[800] RS-232C Parameter—New Line Code
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Baud Rate
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Word Length
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Parity Bit
[800] RS-232C Parameter—Stop Bit Length
[802] SMDR Page Length
[803] SMDR Skip Perforation
[804] SMDR Outgoing Call Printing
[805] SMDR Incoming Call Printing
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)
9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System
Monitor
Description
It is possible for a PC assigned as an SNMP manager to manage and receive PBX system status information,
such as alarm information and general system activity using SNMP. Management Information Bases (MIBs)
are sent to a PC (i.e., the SNMP manager) connected to the PBX over a LAN and can then be stored and
analyzed using SNMP manager software.
The two features for managing information using SNMP are as follows:
– Polling:
A bilateral transaction of information. Polling allows the manager to request information from the PBX.
PBX
Request
Response
PC
Manager
– TRAP:
290
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.4 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System Monitor
An automatic relay of information from the PBX when a status change occurs or an alarm is detected.
PBX
Sends Information
PC
Manager
TRAP Implementation
The PBX will send the two types of TRAP as follows:
Type
Standard TRAP
Enterprise Specific
TRAP*1
*1
TRAP Name
Description
coldStart
Information is sent after turning on the power of the PBX
or resetting the PBX.
Authentication Failure
Information is sent when an unregistered Community
Name and/or Manager IP address is entered.
Major Alarm
Information is sent when a major alarm is detected.
Minor Alarm
Information is sent when a minor alarm is detected.
Enterprise Specific TRAPs are original KX-NCP-exclusive information (Enterprise Specific MIB)
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Through system programming, it is possible to enable or disable this feature.
Up to 2 SNMP managers can be assigned.
This PBX supports SNMP Protocol Version 1.0 and SNMP Version 1.0-TRAP.
This PBX can only receive read-only MIBs. Write MIBs are not supported.
This PBX supports MIB II.
For more information regarding major and minor alarms, refer to the Installation Manual.
For a list of the MIB object groups supported by this PBX, refer to 21.3 Supported Management Information
Base (MIB) Table in the Appendix.
Through system programming, it is possible to select whether each type of TRAP (e.g., ColdStart) is sent
to the SNMP manager or not.
Installation Manual References
5.1.5 Troubleshooting by Error Log
PC Programming Manual References
13.4 [11-4-1] SNMP—System Setting
13.5 [11-4-2] SNMP—Manager
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
291
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code
Description
If the PBX has access to multiple telephone companies, a Special Carrier Access code assigned through
system programming is required every time a CO line call is made without using ARS.
A pause of a preprogrammed length will be automatically inserted between the user-dialed Special Carrier
Access code and the subsequent digits. (® 13.1.4 Pause Insertion)
Conditions
•
•
•
TRS
Toll Restriction (TRS) checks only the dialed telephone number excluding the Special Carrier Access code.
(® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))
ARS
A pause is not automatically inserted between the user-dialed access code and the subsequent digits when
ARS mode is enabled. (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection))
If this PBX is installed behind an existing host PBX:
A Special Carrier Access code and a Host PBX Access code should be assigned separately—these codes
cannot be assigned together as one code. (® 8.1.5 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the
Telephone Company from a Host PBX))
PC Programming Manual References
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
PT Programming Manual References
[303] Special Carrier Access Code
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
16.1.6 Speed Dialing, Personal
Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored in
the extension’s Personal Speed Dialing.
Personal Speed Dialing is also known as Station Speed Dialing.
Conditions
•
•
•
292
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name can
be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to each
System Speed Dialing number.
Call Directory—Speed Dialing
Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting a stored name shown on the display.
Display Lock
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
An extension user can lock the Personal Speed Dialing number display to prevent the numbers from being
viewed at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock). In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing
Call Log displays and the SVM Log display are also locked, and the voice messages in the user’s message
box cannot be played back. An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this
feature. (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number))
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
→ Personal Speed Dialing - Programming
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.61 Speed Dialing, Personal
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
1.4.3 Directories
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.3 System Programming
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
Description
An extension user can make calls using abbreviated dialing for frequently dialed numbers which are stored in
the PBX as System Speed Dialing numbers.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Any number, such as a telephone number or feature number, can be stored in Speed Dialing. A name can
be assigned to each Personal Speed Dialing number through personal programming, and also to each
System Speed Dialing number.
Call Directory—Speed Dialing
Display proprietary telephone (PT) users can make a call by selecting a stored name shown on the display.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
It is possible to override Toll Restriction (TRS) when dialing a number using System Speed Dialing. (®
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction))
System Speed Dialing Display by AUTO DIAL/STORE Button
Pressing the AUTO DIAL/STORE button on a display DPT or KX-T7735 while on-hook can display the
System Speed Dialing Directory.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— System Speed Dialing / Personal Speed Dialing
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
6.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
293
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial
PT Programming Manual References
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[002] System Speed Dialing Name
[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.62 Speed Dialing, System
1.4.1 Call Log, Incoming
1.4.3 Directories
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.3 System Programming
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Description
This feature provides simple answering machine features for extensions.
Features for an extension user with a message box:
An extension user can record a personal greeting message to greet a caller and ask him to leave a voice
message. The user can also play back and clear greeting messages and the voice messages left by callers.
Feature for a caller:
A caller can leave a voice message after hearing the greeting message.
SVM/OGM Block on the IPCMPR Card
This block can be used either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature (® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing
Message)), or both.
When used for the SVM feature, this block is assigned a floating extension number (default: 591). Two channels
are available, allowing two users to access this feature at the same time.
When an extension is assigned to this feature through system programming, a message box is created for that
extension. This message box is used to store greeting messages and voice messages for the extension. Each
proprietary telephone (PT), single line telephone (SLT), and portable station (PS) can be assigned its own
message box.
[Example]
IPCMPR
SVM : Floating Extension No. 591 (default)
Message Box for
Extn. 101
Message Box for
Extn. 102
Message Box for
Extn. 103
Message Box for
Extn. 210
2 CH
ESVM4 Card
294
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Like the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR card, an ESVM4 card, mounted on an OPB3 card, can be used
either for the SVM feature, for the OGM feature, or both.
An ESVM4 card (4 channels) contains two blocks of data. Up to four ESVM4 cards (max. 16 channels) can be
installed in the PBX.
Only up to 2 ESVM4 cards (max. 8 channels) can be used for the SVM feature per system. In this case, each
card is assigned a floating extension number rather than the SVM/OGM block on the IPCMPR card. The rest
of the channels must be used for OGM feature purposes.
When using an ESVM4 card for the SVM feature, it must be mounted on sub-slot 3 (leftmost slot) of the
OPB3 card.
[Example]
PBX
SVM Card 1 (ESVM4): Floating Extension No. 591 (default)
Block A
Message Box for
Extn. 101
Message Box for
Extn. 102
Message Box for
Extn. 103
2 CH
Message Box for
Extn. 210
Block B
Message Box for
Extn. 104
Message Box for
Extn. 105
2 CH
SVM Card 2 (IPCMPR): Floating Extension No. 592 (default)
2 CH
Message Box for
Extn. 301
Message Recording Limit
Up to 125 (IPCMPR)/250 (ESVM4) messages (greeting messages and voice messages for extensions) with
a maximum total recording time of 60 minutes (default) can be recorded per card/block. This memory is shared
between the message boxes of all extensions assigned to that card/block. The recording quality, which can
be selected through system programming, determines the total recording time as follows:
Recording Quality
Recording Time with the IPCMPR/ESVM4 Card
High
about 20 minutes
Middle
(default)
about 60 minutes
Low
about 120 minutes
When a card/block is used for the OGM feature, the recording quality can be set separately (®12.1.2 OGM
(Outgoing Message)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
295
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
When using a card/block for both the SVM feature and OGM feature, the first 64 messages in the card/block
are saved for OGM use and the remaining 186 messages will be for SVM use, as shown below:
SVM Use: Disabled
OGM Use: Enabled
SVM Use: Enabled
OGM Use: Enabled
SVM Use: Enabled
OGM Use: Disabled
ESVM4 Card
ESVM4 Card
ESVM4 Card
Block A
Block A
Block A
OGM Use:
64 Messages
OGM Use:
64 Messages
2 CH
SVM Use:
186 Messages
2 CH
Block B
Block B
OGM Use:
64 Messages
2 CH
Block B
OGM Use:
64 Messages
2 CH
SVM Use:
250 Messages
SVM Use:
186 Messages 2 CH
SVM Use:
250 Messages
2 CH
If the sum length of all recorded voice messages exceeds 90 % of total recording space, the display informs
all extension users that the total capacity has almost been reached. Users will hear dial tone 3 when going
off-hook.
Floating Extension No. and Destination
An extension user can set incoming calls to be redirected to his message box when he cannot answer them.
The user can set the floating extension number of this feature as the destination for redirected calls. Then, this
feature answers redirected calls, plays back the relevant greeting message, and records a voice message.
Incoming calls can be redirected to this feature by the following methods:
– Call Forwarding (FWD) (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding))
– Intercept Routing—No Answer/Busy/DND (® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)
[Programming Example for Intercept Routing]
Extension No.
Intercept Destination
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
101
102
591
591
591
102
103
591
591
591
301
(Operator)
–
–
–
591
In this example:
If a call is received at extension 101 and cannot be answered:
a. In day mode: the call will be redirected to extension 102.
b. In lunch/break/night mode: the call will be redirected to this feature card, and a voice message will be
recorded to the message box.
If a call is received at extension 301 (operator), the call will only be redirected to this feature in night mode.
If both FWD and Intercept Routing features are set for an extension, the FWD setting has priority. So, for
example, it is possible for extension 101 to temporarily set FWD settings from his extension to forward calls
to the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature even during day mode.
296
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Greeting Message for Each Time Mode
When a call is redirected to this feature, the caller hears the designated greeting message. In addition to the
normal greeting message, an extension user can record a different greeting message for each time mode (day/
lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service).
[Recording Example]
• Normal Greeting Message: "You have reached John. I am sorry I cannot take your call right now. Please
leave a message."
• Greeting Message for lunch mode: "You have reached John. I am sorry I am out for lunch right now. Please
leave a message."
If both the greeting message for a certain time mode and the normal greeting message have been recorded,
callers will hear the greeting message for that time mode. However, if no greeting message has been recorded
for a certain time mode, the normal greeting message will be played instead.
If neither the normal greeting message nor the greeting message for a certain time mode have been recorded,
incoming calls will not be redirected to this feature in that time mode. For example, if a greeting message has
only been recorded for night mode, and no normal greeting message has been recorded, incoming calls can
only be redirected to this feature in night mode. No incoming calls will be redirected to this feature in day/lunch/
break mode.
Direct Recording
An extension user can leave a voice message directly in the message box of an extension. In this case, the
target extension will not ring. It is also possible to transfer a caller directly to the message box of an extension.
Message Notification
If a new voice message has been left in a message box, and distinctive dial tones are enabled, the user will
hear dial tone 4 when going off-hook. If a message box contains only voice messages that have previously
been listened to, dial tone 2 is heard instead. In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button or
Message/Ringer Lamp, the corresponding button or lamp will light when a voice message has been left.
Pressing the lit button while on-hook shows the caller’s information.
SVM Log
When a caller leaves a voice message on the Simplified Voice Message (SVM) feature, the following
information is also recorded (as available):
a. Caller’s Name
b. Caller’s Telephone Number
c. Time recording started
d. Voice Message Status
– "New" is displayed for voice messages which have not previously been listened to.
– "Old" is displayed for voice messages which have previously been listened to.
This information can be viewed with the display of a PT or PS.
Please note that the information shown on the display may vary depending on the information that was received
and the type of telephone used. Only users of a 6-line display PT can view all of the above information.
Checking Voice Messages Left by Callers
When an extension user accesses his message box, the most recent unplayed voice message is played first.
When one voice message finishes playing, the next most recent voice message will begin playing
automatically. After the last voice message in a message box has finished playing, the voice messages will
begin playing from the most recent voice message again. When all voice messages have been played this
time, the extension user will hear dial tone 4, and the line will be disconnected automatically.
SVM Remote Access from CO Line
An extension user can remotely access his message box through a CO line by calling his own extension and
using the Walking COS feature. This allows the user to, for example, check the voice messages left in his
message box when he is out of the office.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
297
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension
An extension user can access the message box of another extension by using the Walking COS feature to,
for example, record a greeting message in a message box for an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group as
described below.
In addition, if the user’s telephone has a Message button for another extension, the user can easily access the
message box of that extension and listen to the voice messages left by callers.
Message Box for Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group
When a call is redirected to this feature from an ICD Group using Intercept Routing—Overflow (® 9.1.5 ICD
Group Features—Overflow) or Call Forwarding (FWD), the greeting message for the first extension assigned
to that ICD Group will be played, and the voice message from the caller will be recorded in that extension’s
message box.
A virtual PS can be assigned as the first extension of the ICD Group. This provides the ICD Group with a
dedicated message box that is not shared with an actual extension. (® 19.1.2 Virtual PS)
Conditions
[General]
• This feature will function using the preinstalled IPCMPR card. To increase the capacity of the feature it is
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
298
possible to add an ESVM4 card mounted on an OPB3 card.
The maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be recorded for an
extension can be set between 1 and 100 through system programming. (Default: 10)
The Message button or Message/Ringer Lamp will light when an incoming call is answered by this feature.
However, if a message is not left by the caller, the light will turn off when the call has ended.
It is not possible to back up the SVM Log, recorded voice messages or greeting messages. If the PBX is
initialized, all this information is cleared.
When the ESVM card to which an extension belongs is changed through system programming, all the
recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.
When using the IPCMPR card, this feature can be disabled for each extension through system
programming. This can be useful for only allowing certain users (e.g., bosses, executives, etc.) access to
the limited capacity of recorded voice messages for this feature. When this feature is disabled, all the
recorded voice messages and greeting messages for the extension will be cleared.
The voice messages for an extension will be cleared when the extension is checked out using the
Hospitality feature (® 8.1.4 HOSPITALITY FEATURES). However, greeting messages will not be cleared.
An extension is able to receive calls even while a voice message is being recorded in that extension’s
message box.
If an extension user tries to access this feature when it is already being accessed by two other users, the
user will hear a busy tone.
If an extension user tries to clear a voice message shown on the display while the message box is already
in use, the extension user will hear a notification tone.
Voice message recording will stop when:
a. a caller hangs up.
b. the recording time for the voice message reaches the preprogrammed limit. (Default: 120 seconds)
c. the recording space reaches the limit.
In cases b) and c), the caller will hear a notification tone, and the line will be disconnected.
New voice messages cannot be recorded in a message box when:
a. the total recording time or number of voice messages exceeds the limit.
b. the number of voice messages for an extension exceeds the limit.
c. the destination of a call has been changed more than once.
d. the desired message box is already in use by another user.
e. a call is received at an ICD Group, and the message box of the first extension assigned to that group
is not available, or no extension is assigned as the first member of the group.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
•
•
•
•
This feature does not answer calls that are forwarded using the Call Forwarding by QSIG feature (®
13.1.22 Private Network Features—QSIG—CF (Call Forwarding)).
Display Lock
A display PT user can lock the SVM Log display to prevent the user’s information from being viewed and
voice messages from being played back at any extension through personal programming (Display Lock).
In this case, the Incoming/Outgoing Call Log displays and the Personal Speed Dialing number display are
also locked. An extension personal identification number (PIN) (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal
Identification Number)) is required to lock/unlock the display.
Accessing the Message Box of Another Extension
Listening to voice messages left by callers using a Message button for another extension is available only
when voice messages have been left in the message box.
Moving From SVM to DISA
When a call is answered by SVM but the caller wants to call another extension instead of leaving a
message, it is possible to access DISA (DISA OGM 01 will be played) by dialing the Operator Call feature
number. This allows the caller to call another extension via DISA or access the DISA AA service. The OGM
feature for the card/block to which the SVM mailbox belongs must be enabled via system programming.
[Recording Greeting Messages]
• If an extension user tries to record a new greeting message to his message box when the total recording
•
time or number of messages has reached its limit, the user will hear a reorder tone.
It is not recommended to record music when creating a greeting message.
[SVM Remote Access from CO Line]
• Whether Walking COS is available or not can be set through system programming.
•
•
If the PBX uses analog CO lines without the CPC service, it is strongly recommended to prohibit Walking
COS access. If an extension user who is accessing his message box through an analog line goes on-hook
while the voice messages are being played, the line will remain connected until all voice messages finish
playing. This is because a reorder tone cannot be detected from an analog line while playing voice
messages.
The first digit of the Walking COS feature number must be entered before the greeting message finishes
playing.
When accessing SVM through a CO line, it is possible to change message boxes (e.g., to leave a message
in another user’s message box after listening to one’s own messages). However, a user can only access
the message boxes of other extensions assigned to the same card/block. For example, if the user accesses
a message box belonging to card/block 1 first, then the user can only access the message boxes of other
extensions belonging to card/block 1. If the user tries to access the message box of another extension
belonging to a different card, the user will hear a reorder tone. While a reorder tone is heard, it is possible
to retry another call by pressing " ".
Installation Manual References
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
3.7.1 OPB3 Card (KX-NCP1190)
3.7.6 ESVM4 Card (KX-TDA0194)
PC Programming Manual References
2.5.4 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording
2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage
3.5 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
3.36 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Card Property— SVM Feature
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous
→ SVM—Recording Time
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
299
16.1.9 Syslog Record Management
→ SVM—Dial Tone Continuous Time
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Simplified Voice Message Access
5.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings—Tone Detection
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Continuous
→ Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Cyclic
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 6— Display Lock / SVM Lock
6.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 6— SVM Lock
6.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message
7.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM
Feature Manual References
4.1.4 Dial Tone
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
20.1.1 Walking COS
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.63 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
3.1.2 Personal Programming
16.1.9 Syslog Record Management
Description
By connecting this PBX to a Syslog server over a LAN, it is possible to output local alarm information (major
alarms/minor alarms) to a external PC.
Conditions
•
To be able to use this feature, through system programming, it is required to enable this feature, register
the IP address of the Syslog server, and to select whether major/minor are sent.
PC Programming Manual References
13.1 [11-1] Main—Syslog
Feature Manual References
10.1.4 Local Alarm Information
300
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 17
Features and Configurations—T
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
301
17.1.1 T1 Line Service
17.1 T
17.1.1 T1 Line Service
Description
A T1 line carries twenty-four 64 kbps-voice channels at 1.5 Mbps, and can be used as a public or private line.
Voice is digitized by Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
1. Channel Type
[LCOT/GCOT/DID/TIE/OPX]
The T1 card supports five different channel types to provide connection at minimum expense. One of the
five channel types can be assigned to any one of the T1 card’s 24 channels individually, according to usage
rates and customer needs.
2. T1 Features
The following table shows the features available for each channel type:
Feature
(1) TIE
(2) DID
(3) DIL
(4) OPX
(5) ANI
Channel Type
LCOT
GCOT
DID
TIE (E & M)
OPX
Available
[Explanation]
Feature
302
Description
(1) TIE
TIE Line Service
Refer to the TIE Line Service feature. (®
13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES)
(2) DID
Direct Inward Dialing
(DID)
Refer to the DID feature. (® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward
Dialing))
(3) DIL
Direct In Line (DIL)
Refer to the DIL feature. (® 4.1.7 DIL (Direct In
Line))
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
(4) OPX
Feature
Description
Off Premise Extension
(OPX)
A single line telephone (SLT) which is installed off site
can perform as if it were installed locally. The SLT
makes and receives calls through the PBX. An
extension number can be given to the OPX, and
extension data such as Class of Service (COS) is also
applied.
[Example]
Telephone Company
SLT
T1-LCOT T1-OPX
T1 Card
Extn.103
PBX
Dials "103".
Extn.101
(5) ANI
Automatic Number
Identification (ANI)
Extn.102
Receives the caller’s number from a T1 line.
When the ANI number is received, it can be treated the
same as a Caller ID number. (® 3.1.3 Caller ID)
Conditions
•
If a T1 line is used as a public line, the channel type depends on the contract with the telephone company.
PC Programming Manual References
3.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port
3.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command
17.1.2 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
Description
A ring tone is sent through an external pager (loudspeaker) when an incoming call is received. Any extension
user can answer the call.
Conditions
•
•
•
Hardware Requirement: A user-supplied external pager
Floating Extension Number
A floating extension number can be assigned to an external pager (default: 600). An external pager is
accessed by dialing its floating extension number.
Pager Volume
It is possible to change the volume level of an external pager through system programming.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
303
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Installation Manual References
3.10 Connection of Peripherals
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— TAFAS Answer
4.20 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH— Paging—EPG (External Pager)
7.2 [5-2] External Pager
PT Programming Manual References
[700] External Pager Floating Extension Number
Operating Manual References
1.3.64 TAFAS (Trunk Answer From Any Station)
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Description
Tenant service is a cost-effective method of providing PBX services to different offices or companies located
in the same building, while using only one PBX.
1. Tenant Configuration
Tenant Members
Extensions are assigned to a tenant indirectly; they are assigned to extension user groups, and these
extension user groups are assigned to tenants. An extension can belong to only one extension user group
and an extension user group can belong to only one tenant, therefore an extension can belong to only one
tenant. (® 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES)
Time Service
Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of
day (® 17.1.5 Time Service). The start and end times of each time mode (day/lunch/break/night) for each
day of the week are programmed in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to
the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1, etc.)
[Example of Tenant Configuration]
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
Extn. User
Group 1
Extn. User
Group 5
Extn. User
Group 2
Extn. User
Group 6
Extn. User
Group 3
Extn. User
Group 4
Uses Time Table 1
Uses Time Table 2
2. System Management
304
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.3 Tenant Service
Each of the following system management items can be assigned to each tenant.
a. Tenant Operator: Determines the destination for calls directed to the tenant’s operator. If no operator
is designated, the PBX operator will serve as the tenant’s operator (® 12.1.5 Operator Features).
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Operator (Extension Number)
b. ARS Mode: Determines under which circumstances Automatic Route Selection (ARS) operates for
calls made by the tenant’s extensions — either when a call is made using the Idle Line Access method,
or when any CO Line Access method is used (® 3.1.16 CO Line Access). The ARS mode for each
tenant can also be programmed to be the same ARS mode assigned to the entire PBX, or turned off
(® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)).
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— ARS Mode
c. Audio Source for Music on Hold: Determines the audio source for the Music on Hold heard by the
tenant’s callers. Either a tone or a specific background music (BGM) number can be used. The audio
source for each tenant can also be programmed to use the same audio source used for Music on Hold
assigned to the entire PBX (® 11.1.4 Music on Hold).
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— Music On Hold
d. System Speed Dialing: Determines whether each tenant uses the original set of common System
Speed Dialing numbers or that tenant’s private set (® 16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System).
® 8.6 [6-6] Tenant— System Speed Dial
Hardware Requirement: An EMEC or MEC card
3. Call Blocking
Through Class of Service (COS) programming, it is possible to:
1. Prevent extensions of one tenant from calling extensions of another tenant. (Tenant-to-Tenant Call
Block)
2. Limit the trunk groups which can be used by the extensions of each tenant. (External Call Block)
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block
Using Internal Call Block, certain features, such as making intercom calls, can be restricted based on the
COS assigned to extensions (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block). Well-planned COS programming can prevent
extensions of one tenant from:
– Calling an extension or doorphone which belongs to another tenant
– Picking up calls ringing at extensions belonging to another tenant (® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)
– Retrieving calls being held by another tenant (® 3.1.4 Call Hold)
[Programming Example: Internal Call Block]
Caller
Called Party
COS 1 COS 2 COS 3 COS 4 COS 5 COS 6
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
Block
Block
COS 4
Block
Block
COS 5
Block
Block
Block
Block
COS 6
Block
Block
Block
Block
In this example:
Internal Call Block is employed to block calls between certain tenants.
Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to extensions which belong to another
tenant.
a. Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants 1, 2, and
3.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
305
17.1.3 Tenant Service
b. Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can make calls to extensions in Tenants 1 and 2,
but not 3.
c. Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can make calls to other extensions in Tenant 3
only.
Tenant 1
Tenant 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extension User
Group 5
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS 1
COS 2
COS 5
Tenant 2
Extension User
Group 2
COS 6
Extension User
Group 6
Extension User
Group 3
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
COS 3
COS 4
Extension User
Group 4
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
External Call Block
If multiple tenants are using the PBX, the External Call Block feature should be programmed to control
which COS numbers are allowed to access which trunk groups. By preventing certain COS numbers from
accessing certain trunk groups, each tenant can be given its own trunk groups which no other tenant can
access.
[Programming Example: External Call Block]
COS
COS 1
COS 2
COS 3
COS 4
COS 5
COS 6
Trunk
Group 1
Trunk
Group 2
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 3
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 4
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 5
Block
Block
Block
Block
Trunk
Group 6
Block
Block
Block
Block
In this example:
External Call Block is employed to prevent tenants from accessing all trunk groups except the ones
designated to them. Each extension in a tenant is assigned a COS that is not assigned to extensions which
belong to another tenant.
a. Extensions in Tenant 1 are either COS 1 or 2. They can access trunk groups 1 and 2.
b. Extensions in Tenant 2 are either COS 3 or 4. They can access trunk groups 3 and 4.
306
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.3 Tenant Service
c. Extensions in Tenant 3 are either COS 5 or 6. They can access trunk groups 5 and 6.
Trunk
Group 1
Trunk
Group 2
Trunk
Group 3
Trunk
Group 4
Trunk
Group 5
Trunk
Group 6
PBX
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
Extension User
Group 3
Extension User
Group 1
Extn. 100 Extn. 101
COS 1
Extension User
Group 5
Extn. 104 Extn. 105
COS 2
COS 3
Extn. 108 Extn. 109
COS 4
Extension User
Group 4
Extension User
Group 2
Extn. 102 Extn. 103
Tenant 3
Extn. 106 Extn. 107
COS 5
COS 6
Extension User
Group 6
Extn. 110 Extn. 111
Conditions
•
The following features used by incoming call distribution (ICD) group are determined by the tenant number
assigned to them (® 9.1.1 ICD GROUP FEATURES):
– The Music on Hold heard by a caller while waiting in a queue.
– The Time Table used by the ICD group to determine the current time mode. An overflow destination
and Queuing Time Table can be assigned for each time mode.
PC Programming Manual References
4.4 [2-2] Operator & BGM
→ PBX Operator—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ BGM and Music on Hold—Music on Hold
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.13 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block
4.14 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block
5.6 [3-2] Extension Group
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main— Tenant Number
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension Group
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— Tenant Number
7.7 [5-5] External Sensor— Tenant No.
8.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial
8.6 [6-6] Tenant
Section 10 [8] ARS
10.6 [8-5] Carrier—Authorization Code for Tenant
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL— Tenant Number
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
307
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
12.3 [10-3] DID Table—
Tenant Number
PT Programming Manual References
[001] System Speed Dialing Number
[006] Operator Assignment
[320] ARS Mode
[711] Music on Hold
Feature Manual References
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
17.1.4 Timed Reminder
Description
An extension can be preset to ring at a certain time, to act as a wake-up call or reminder. This feature can be
programmed to activate only once, or daily. If the user answers the alarm call, a prerecorded voice message
will be heard. If a message is not assigned, a special dial tone (dial tone 3) will be heard.
Timed reminders can be set in one of two ways:
• By the extension user, from his or her own extension (Timed Reminder).
• Remotely, by the hotel operator (Remote Wake-up Call).
Conditions
•
•
•
•
Be sure that the PBX clock is set to the correct time.
Only one timed reminder can be set for an extension at a time. Setting a new reminder clears the previous
reminder. If both the extension user and the hotel operator set a timed reminder for the same extension,
the timed reminder that was set most recently is effective.
Programmable Time
The Alarm Ringing time, the number of alarm repeat times, and Interval time are programmable through
system programming.
To use the voice message feature:
An extension assigned as a manager can record messages (® 12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)). A
different message can be assigned for each time mode (® 17.1.5 Time Service).
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf
→ Timed Reminder—Repeat Counter
→ Timed Reminder—Interval Time
→ Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features
→ Remote Timed Reminder (Remote Wakeup Call)
→ Timed Reminder Set / Cancel
4.17 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others— Timed Reminder—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8
4.18 [2-9] System Options—Option 1— PT LCD—Time Display
7.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 2— Timed Reminder Message—Day, Lunch, Break,
Night
8.2 [6-2] Hotel— SMDR for External Hotel Application 1—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call)
308
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.5 Time Service
Feature Manual References
15.1.3 Room Status Control
Operating Manual References
1.3.65 Timed Reminder
1.3.72 Wake-up Call
17.1.5 Time Service
Description
Time modes are used by many PBX features to determine how they will function during different times of day.
For example, incoming calls can be directed to sales staff during the day and to a Voice Processing System
(VPS) at night, extension users can be prohibited from making long distance calls during lunch time, etc.
There are four time modes—day, lunch, break, and night. The start and end times of each time mode are
programmed for each day of the week in a Time Table. Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to
the tenant it serves, i.e., Tenant 1 uses Time Table 1, etc.
1. Time Service Switching Mode
The current time mode can switch automatically to another time mode at the preprogrammed time assigned
in the Time Table. It is possible, however, to switch time modes manually.
Whether time modes are normally switched manually or automatically is determined through system
programming. Each tenant is assigned a switching mode.
Time Mode
Switching
Description
Condition
Automatic
The current time mode will switch
automatically to another time mode
at the time programmed in the
tenant’s Time Table, and can be
switched manually by pressing the
Time Service button or by dialing the
Time Service Switch feature
number.
The current time mode (day/lunch/
break/night) and the switching mode
(automatic/manual) can be switched
manually by an extension assigned
as a manager, or by an extension
whose Class of Service (COS) is
authorized.
Manual
The current time mode will switch
only when the Time Service button
is pressed or when the Time Service
Switch feature number is dialed.
2. Time Table
Each tenant has a Time Table that is used when the tenant is in Automatic Time Service Switching mode.
Each Time Table has four basic modes—day, lunch, break, and night—and also provides for
multiple "breaks", such as morning breaks and afternoon breaks, and multiple "days", such as the morning
shift and the afternoon shift following lunch.
A tenant’s Time Table is programmed to control when each time mode starts (and therefore, ends) and
can be programmed separately for each day of the week.
Each Time Table has a number which corresponds to the tenant number of the tenant it serves. (Tenant
1 uses Time Table 1, etc.)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
309
17.1.5 Time Service
[Programming Example: Time Table]
Time Table No. (Tenant No.)
Time Schedule
1
2
3
4
MON Day 1
09:00
15:00
11:00
12:00
Lunch
12:00
18:30
15:00
Day 2
13:00
19:00
18:00
Break 1 start
15:00
20:30
06:00
Break 1 end
15:15
20:45
TUE
Break 2 start
22:30
21:00
Break 2 end
22:45
21:15
Night
18:00
01:00
22:00
Day 1
09:00
15:00
11:00
06:15
[Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1]
Monday
00:00
Tuesday
03:00
06:00
09:00
12:00
15:00
18:00
21:00
00:00
Time Table No. 1
Night
Day 1
Lunch Day 2 Break 1
Night
Note that in this example, the day mode (Day 2) resumes automatically when the break mode (Break 1)
ends.
[Visualization of Time Schedule for Other Tenants]
Monday
00:00
Tuesday
03:00
06:00
09:00
12:00
15:00
18:00
21:00
00:00
Time Table No. 2
Time Table No. 3
Time Table No. 4
Day
Lunch
Night
Break
Note that time modes can be arranged as they are needed (for example, night mode can occur in the
morning and afternoon, if necessary) and not all time modes need to be used in a tenant’s time schedule.
Also note that Tenant 4’s Break 1 is followed by the night mode because no end time is programmed for
the break.
3. Features Using Time Service
The following features can be programmed separately for each time mode:
a. Destination of incoming CO line calls (Direct In Line (DIL)/Direct Inward Dialing (DID)) (® 4.1.7 DIL
(Direct In Line), ® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing))
b. Destination of calls handled by Intercept Routing (® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)
c. Destination of calls that are overflowed while waiting in a queue for an available agent of an incoming
call distribution (ICD) group (® 9.1.5 ICD Group Features—Overflow)
d. Destination of incoming doorphone calls (® 4.1.12 Doorphone Call)
310
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.5 Time Service
e. Destination of Operator Calls (® 12.1.5 Operator Features)
f. Toll Restriction (TRS) level of each COS
g. COS numbers which are permitted/restricted to access certain trunk groups (External Call Block) (®
h.
i.
j.
k.
3.1.16 CO Line Access)
Outgoing Message (OGM) for Timed Reminder (® 17.1.4 Timed Reminder)
Queuing Time Table used by an ICD group (® 9.1.6 ICD Group Features—Queuing)
Intercept time for Intercept Routing—No Answer (® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing)
Intercept time for DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System
Access))
[Programming Example: DID Table]
The DID Table can be programmed to direct calls to a different destination for each time mode based on
the number dialed by the caller. Calls can, for example, be directed to an ICD group during the day mode,
or to the Voice Mail (VM) service of a VPS during the lunch and night modes.
Location
DID No.
DID Destination
Tenant
(Time
Table) No.
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
1
123-4567
1
105
150
105
150
2
123-2468
2
210
200
210
200
Explanation:
A CO line call with the DID number "123-4567" is received at 20:00.
1. The call will be handled by Time Table 1.
2. The current time mode is "night" (shown in "Programming Example: Time Table", above).
3. The call is directed to extension 150, which is a floating extension number used by the VPS
(programming not shown here).
[Programming Example: DIL Table]
The DIL Table can be programmed to direct calls to a different destination for each time mode based on
the CO line receiving the call. Calls can, for example, be directed to an ICD group during the day mode,
or to the Voice Mail (VM) service of a VPS during the lunch and night modes.
DIL Destination
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
Tenant (Time
Table) No.
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
01
1
105
150
105
150
02
2
210
200
210
200
Explanation:
A call is received at 20:00 on CO line 01.
1. The call will be handled by Time Table 1.
2. The current time mode is "night" (shown in "Programming Example: Time Table", above).
3. The call is directed to extension 150, which is a floating extension number used by the VPS
(programming not shown here).
4. Holiday Mode
The PBX can also accommodate 24 different holidays. The start and end date of each holiday can be
programmed, and all holidays are assigned a single time mode. For example, if the "night" mode is assigned
as the time mode for holidays, and a holiday begins December 31st and ends January 1st, all PBX features
will use their "night" settings from 0:00 A.M. on December 31st until 0:00 A.M. on January 1st.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
311
17.1.5 Time Service
5. Time Service Button
A flexible button can be customized as one of the following Time Service buttons:
a. Day/Night button
b. Day/Night/Lunch button
c. Day/Night/Break button
d. Day/Night/Lunch/Break button
These buttons can be used to switch the current time mode: pressing the Day/Night button will toggle
between the day and night modes, for example.
Each Time Service button will display the current time mode using a different light pattern or color, as
shown below.
Light Pattern
Current Time Mode
Off
Day
Red on
Night
Green on
Lunch
Slow green flashing
Break
Slow red flashing
Holiday
Note
Pressing a Time Service button will change the current time mode only if the COS assigned to the
extension is authorized to do so or if the extension is assigned as a manager. All other extension users
can press this button on their proprietary telephones (PTs) to display the current time mode.
Conditions
•
•
The start times of the following time modes can be specified through PC programming as well as PT
programming.
– Day 1 and 2
– Lunch
– Night
The start and end times of the following break modes can be specified through PC programming only.
– Break 1
– Break 2
– Break 3
Note that if an end time is programmed for a break, the day mode will start or resume at this time, as shown
previously in "Visualization of Time Schedule for Tenant 1" example. If no end time is programmed, the
break will continue until the start of the next time mode, as shown in Time Table 4 in "Visualization of Time
Schedule for Other Tenants".
Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) Button
Any flexible button can be customized as the Time Service Switching Mode (Automatic/Manual) button.
PC Programming Manual References
4.6 [2-4] Week Table
4.8 [2-5] Holiday Table
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature— Time Service Switch
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
312
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service)
→ Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual)
→ Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service)
PT Programming Manual References
[101] Time Service Switching Mode
[102] Time Service Starting Time
[514] Time Service Manual Switching
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
17.1.3 Tenant Service
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.66 Time Service
2.1.6 Time Service Mode Control
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Description
Toll Restriction (TRS) can prohibit extension users from making certain CO line calls, based on the Class of
Service (COS) assigned to them.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
® [602] Class of Service
Each COS is assigned a TRS level for each time mode; level 1 grants the highest level of authorization, allowing
all CO line calls to be made, and level 7 grants the lowest level of authorization, prohibiting all CO line calls
from being made. TRS levels 2 through 6 are used to restrict calls by combining preprogrammed Denied and
Exception Code Tables, explained below.
Each COS can also have a separate TRS level applicable to calls made using System Speed Dialing.
A TRS check is applied each time a dialed number is sent to a CO line after an extension user goes off-hook
and seizes a line.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
313
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
[Flowchart]
An extension user tries to
make a CO line call.
Was the number dialed using
System Speed Dialing?
Yes
No
No
Is TRS Override by
System Speed Dialing enabled?
Yes
Checks the TRS level of
the extension's COS in
the current time mode.
Level 7
What is the TRS level?
Checks the TRS level of
the extension's COS for
System Speed Dialing.
Level 1
Levels 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
Is the dialed number found in an
applicable Denied Code Table?
No
Yes
Is the dialed number found in an
applicable Exception Code Table?
Yes
No
The call is denied.
The user hears a reorder tone.
The call is permitted.
Denied Code Tables
Denied Code Tables are preprogrammed lists containing the first few digits (leading number) of telephone
numbers which may not be called. All outgoing CO line calls made by TRS level 2 through 6 users are compared
to at least one Denied Code Table, and when the leading number of a dialed telephone number (not including
the CO Line Access number) matches an entry found in the applicable table, the call is denied.
There are five Denied Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the level(s)
preceding it, as explained below.
314
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Exception Code Tables
Exception Code Tables are preprogrammed lists of leading digits or complete telephone numbers which are
checked against every dialed number prohibited by a Denied Code Table. When a user dials a number
prohibited by a Denied Code Table, it is compared to at least one Exception Code Table. If the dialed number
matches an entry found in the applicable Exception Code Table, the call is permitted.
There are five Exception Code Tables. Each table applies to a corresponding TRS level as well as the level(s)
preceding it, as explained below.
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
When TRS Override by System Speed Dialing is enabled for the PBX, each COS has an additional TRS level
applicable only to calls made using System Speed Dialing.
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
® [300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
This allows extension users to use System Speed Dialing to make CO line calls which are normally prohibited
by the TRS level of their assigned COS. If, for example, a user’s TRS level is 7, that user normally cannot
make any CO line calls. However, if the same user’s TRS level for System Speed Dialing is level 1, the user
can make a CO line call to any number stored in System Speed Dialing.
TRS Level
The TRS level is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code
Tables.
As shown in the table below, the Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it,
and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.
Denied Code Tables*1
*1
*2
Exception Code Tables*2
Level 1
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
Table for Level 2
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Level 3
Tables for Levels 2 and 3
Tables for Levels 3 through 6
Level 4
Tables for Levels 2 through 4
Tables for Levels 4 through 6
Level 5
Tables for Levels 2 through 5
Tables for Levels 5 and 6
Level 6
Tables for Levels 2 through 6
Table for Level 6
Level 7
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code— Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [301] TRS Denied Code
® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code— Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [302] TRS Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, certain outgoing CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular phone/long
distance) can be restricted as in the example below:
Restricted
Level 1
Level 2
(Boss)
Allowed
No restriction
•
International Calls
•
•
•
•
Document Version 2009-12
Countries where Clients are
Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
Feature Manual
315
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Restricted
Allowed
Level 3
(Secretary)
•
•
International Calls
Cellular Phone Calls
•
•
•
Boss’s Cellular Phone
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
Level 4
(Operator)
•
•
•
International Calls
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
•
Local Calls
:
:
:
In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can make international calls to the
countries where clients are located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3 user
cannot make international/cellular phone calls apart from to the boss’s cellular phone, but can make long
distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international/cellular phone/long distance calls, but can
make local calls.
To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code Tables
as follows:
Denied Code Tables
Exception Code Tables
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 1
Level 2
011
Leading number to deny
international calls
011xx
Leading number for
countries to be allowed
Level 3
1123755
Leading number to deny
cellular phone calls
1123755xx
xx
Boss’s cellular phone
number
Level 4
1
Leading number to deny
long distance calls
–
Not required
:
:
:
[Programming Example: COS Settings]
*1
*2
TRS Level*1
Day
Lunch
Break
Night
TRS Level for System
Speed Dialing*2
1
1
1
1
6
1
2
2
2
2
6
1
COS
® 4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS— TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
® [501] TRS Level
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
® [509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
TRS Settings for Each Level
Through system programming, it is possible to select a different method of TRS. With this method, each level
has its own separate set of denied codes and exception codes, which are only applied to that level.
® 9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6)
316
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Denied Code Tables*1
*1
*2
Exception Code Tables*2
Level 1
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Level 2
Table for Level 2
Table for Level 2
Level 3
Table for Level 3
Table for Level 3
Level 4
Table for Level 4
Table for Level 4
Level 5
Table for Level 5
Table for Level 5
Level 6
Table for Level 6
Table for Level 6
Level 7
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
® 9.1 [7-1] Denied Code— Denied Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [301] TRS Denied Code
® 9.2 [7-2] Exception Code— Exception Code Tables—Level 2–Level 6
® [302] TRS Exception Code
[Usage Example] Using this method, it is possible to restrict certain CO line calls (e.g., international/cellular
phone/long distance) on a department basis, as follows:
Restricted
Level 1
Level 2
(Engineering)
Allowed
No restriction
•
International Calls
•
•
•
•
Country where Factory is
Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
Level 3
(Overseas Sales)
•
Cellular Phone Calls
•
•
•
•
Company Cellular Phone
International Calls
Long Distance Calls
Local Calls
Level 4
(Accounting)
•
•
International Calls
Long Distance Calls
•
Cities where Clients are
Located
Cellular Phone Calls
Local Calls
:
:
•
•
:
In this example, a level 1 user can make any CO line calls. A level 2 user can only make international calls to
the country where the factory is located, and can also make cellular phone/long distance/local calls. A level 3
user can only make cellular phone calls to the company cellular phone, and can also make any international/
long distance/local calls. A level 4 user cannot make any international calls or most long distance calls, but
can make long distance calls to cities where clients are located, cellular phone calls and local calls.
To set TRS as in the example above, it is necessary to program the Denied Code and Exception Code Tables
as follows:
Level 1
Document Version 2009-12
Denied Code Tables
Exception Code Tables
Not Programmable
Not Programmable
Feature Manual
317
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Denied Code Tables
Exception Code Tables
Level 2
011
Leading number to deny
international calls
011xx
Leading number for
country to be allowed
Level 3
1123755
Leading number to deny
cellular phone calls
1123755xx
xx
Number for cellular
phones to be allowed
Level 4
011
Leading number to deny
international and long
distance calls
1315
Long distance numbers
for states/cities to be
allowed, and leading
number of cellular
phones
1
:
1530
1123755
:
:
Conditions
CAUTION
The software contained in the TRS feature to allow user access to the network must be upgraded to
recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.
Failure to upgrade the on-premise PBXs or peripheral equipment to recognize the new codes as they are
established will restrict the customer and the users of the PBX from gaining access to the network and to
these codes.
KEEP THE SOFTWARE UP TO DATE WITH THE LATEST DATA.
•
•
•
•
TRS checks are performed for all calls made by:
– Any CO line access (Idle Line Access, Trunk Group Access, S-CO Line Access)
– Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
The PBX can also be programmed to perform a TRS check for numbers that contain non-digits ( or #).
By default, the PBX ignores ("No Check") any non-digits that are dialed, which is useful in preventing
unauthorized calls which could possibly be made using certain telephone company exchanges.
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check for Dial "* #"
TRS can also be programmed to check digits that are dialed after External Feature Access, such as when
trying to transfer a call to an outside party. (® 5.1.1 EFA (External Feature Access))
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— TRS Check after EFA
Host PBX Access Code/Special Carrier Access Code
TRS checks can be carried out on telephone numbers dialed using a Host PBX Access code (® 8.1.5 Host
PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX)) or Special Carrier Access
code (® 16.1.5 Special Carrier Access Code).
Access Code is stored in the PBX
Access Code Type
•
318
Access Code is not
stored in the PBX
Access Code is
dialed
Access Code is not
dialed
Host PBX Access
Code
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
Number dialed is not a
CO line call, so TRS
does not check the
number.
TRS checks the entire
number.
Special Carrier
Access Code
TRS ignores the code
and checks the
remaining digits.
TRS checks the entire
number.
TRS checks the entire
number.
ARS
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
•
•
•
If ARS is applied to a dialed number, TRS will check the user-dialed number, not the modified number
produced by ARS. You do not need to program ARS-modified numbers in any of the TRS Tables.
Additionally, when using ARS, TRS will ignore the Host PBX Access code or Special Carrier Access code.
Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation
TRS can also limit the number of digits which may be dialed by an extension user while the user is engaged
on a received CO line call. If the number of dialed digits exceeds the limit, the line will be disconnected.
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits
It is possible to select through system programming whether the CO line is disconnected when the
Inter-digit time expires without the TRS check being completed.
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous— Mode when Dial Time-out before TRS Check
– If no disconnection is chosen, the TRS check will also be performed after the Inter-digit time expires.
– If disconnection is chosen, the line will be disconnected when the CO line Inter-digit time expires. This
also prevents EFA from being used.
This setting applies to all CO lines.
When one of the following features is used, the TRS level of the extension can be temporarily changed. If
two or more of these features are used simultaneously (Dial Tone Transfer is used while the extension is
locked, for example), the TRS level of the feature with the highest priority is applied for the duration of the
call. The numbers below (1 through 4) indicate the priority of each feature, with 1 having the highest priority,
and 4 having the lowest.
1. Dial Tone Transfer (® 4.1.5 Dial Tone Transfer)
2. TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
3. Verification Code Entry/Walking COS (® 19.1.1 Verification Code Entry, ® 20.1.1 Walking COS)
4. Extension Dial Lock (® 5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)
PC Programming Manual References
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS
→ TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night
→ TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— COS
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change)
9.1 [7-1] Denied Code
9.2 [7-2] Exception Code
9.3 [7-3] Special Carrier
9.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous
PT Programming Manual References
[300] TRS Override by System Speed Dialing
[301] TRS Denied Code
[302] TRS Exception Code
[501] TRS Level
[509] TRS Level for System Speed Dialing
[602] Class of Service
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
319
17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
3.1.16 CO Line Access
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
16.1.7 Speed Dialing, System
17.1.5 Time Service
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
320
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 18
Features and Configurations—U
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
321
18.1.1 Upgrading the Software
18.1 U
18.1.1 Upgrading the Software
Description
It is possible to upload software from a PC to the PBX to upgrade the following:
Data File
Storing Area
Main Processing (IPCMPR) software data
Operating system data area on IPCMPR card.
Default system programming data for each
country/area
Country/area data area on the IPCMPR card.
Language data for PT display
Each language data area on the IPCMPR card.
There are two types:
Type 1: Proprietary Telephone (PT) display except for PT
system programming (® 13.1.30 PT Programming) (five
languages max.)
Type 2: PT system programming data (one language
max.)
LPR (software on a slot card) software data
Flash ROM on the appropriate optional services card (e.g.,
DHLC, DLC, T1, PRI, etc.)
Cell Station (CS) software data
Flash ROM on the CS
Conditions
•
The software version of the IPCMPR card can be confirmed through system programming.
Installation Manual References
3.3.1 IPCMPR Card
PC Programming Manual References
3.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary
PT Programming Manual References
[190] Main Processing (MPR) Software Version Reference
322
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 19
Features and Configurations—V
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
323
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
19.1 V
19.1.1 Verification Code Entry
Description
An extension user can enter a verification code when calling from his own or any other extension, to change
the Toll Restriction (TRS) level (® 17.1.6 TRS (Toll Restriction)) or to identify the call for accounting and billing
purposes. A verification code personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature.
Conditions
CAUTION
There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification
number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX. The cost of such calls will be billed to
the owner/renter of the PBX. To protect the PBX from this kind of fraudulent use, we strongly recommend:
a. Keeping PINs secret.
b. Selecting complex, random PINs that cannot be easily guessed.
c. Changing PINs regularly.
•
•
•
•
When a CO line call is made using Verification Code Entry:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))
– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
+ verification code is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension number of
–
the actual extension used (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)).
Verification Code Entry through DISA
This feature is also available through DISA. (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
Verification Code PIN
A verification code PIN must be assigned for each verification code through system programming or
through manager programming.
Verification Code PIN Lock
If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected. If the wrong PIN is entered a
preprogrammed number of times successively, the PIN for the verification code will be locked. Only an
extension assigned as the manager can unlock it. In this case, the PIN will be unlocked and cleared.
[Example of Verification Codes and Their Programming]
*1
*2
*3
*4
324
Location
Code*1
Name*2
PIN*3
COS*4
Itemized Billing
Code for ARS*5
0001
1111
Tom Smith
1234
1
2323
0002
2222
John White
9876543210
3
4545
:
:
:
:
:
:
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Verification Code
® [120] Verification Code
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— User Name
® [121] Verification Code Name
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Verification Code PIN
® [122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— COS Number
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.2 Virtual PS
*5
® [123] Verification Code COS Number
® 8.3 [6-3] Verification Code— Itemized Billing Code for ARS
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Extension PIN—Lock Counter
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— ARS Itemized Code
8.3 [6-3] Verification Code
PT Programming Manual References
[120] Verification Code
[121] Verification Code Name
[122] Verification Code Personal Identification Number (PIN)
[123] Verification Code COS Number
Feature Manual References
1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
11.1.1 Manager Features
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Operating Manual References
1.3.67 Verification Code Entry
3.2.2 Manager Programming
19.1.2 Virtual PS
Description
An extension number can be assigned for a portable station (PS) without registering the PS unit itself. This is
known as temporary registration. If a forward destination is then assigned for this PS, all calls to that extension
number will be forwarded to the assigned destination. Using this setting to forward calls to outside destinations
or destinations at another PBX allows those destinations to receive calls as if they were within the PBX. In
addition, depending on system programming, the forward destination can use some of the features of the PBX.
This can be especially useful for a cellular phone user, who can use his cellular phone as if it were his extension
when he is away from his desk.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
325
19.1.2 Virtual PS
[Example]
Telephone Company
Outside Caller
TIE Line Network
PBX-1
PBX-2
TIE Line
Dials "201"
Virtual PS 1
Extn. 201
Fwd to outside
destination
Virtual PS 2
Extn. 202
Fwd to destination
at other PBX
The following features can be accessed using this method:
Feature
Outside Destinations in
Incoming Call Distribution
Group
Description & Reference
A virtual PS allows calls to an Incoming Call Distribution (ICD) Group
to be answered by outside destinations or extensions at another PBX.
® 9.1.4 ICD Group Features—Outside Destinations
Network ICD Group
Using virtual PSs in an ICD Group, up to 4 other PBXs can be called
at the same time.
® 13.1.18 Private Network Features—Network ICD Group
PS Roaming by Network ICD
Group
One PS can be registered at up to 4 PBXs. Using virtual PSs in an
ICD Group, all 4 PBXs can be called simultaneously to search for the
PS.
® 13.1.19 Private Network Features—PS Roaming by Network ICD
Group
Automatic Fax Transfer
A virtual PS can be used to forward fax calls to a fax machine at
another PBX connected by TIE line.
® 1.1.6 Automatic Fax Transfer
Simplified Voice Message
Registering a virtual PS as the first extension of an ICD Group
provides the ICD Group with a dedicated message box that is not
shared with an actual extension.
® 16.1.8 SVM (Simplified Voice Message)
326
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Conditions
•
To use this feature, call forwarding to CO lines must be enabled through COS programming.
PC Programming Manual References
3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
PT Programming Manual References
[690] PS Registration
Feature Manual References
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Description
A VPS can be connected to extension ports of the PBX. The extension ports make a group, called a VM group.
This group has a floating extension number. The VM group can be the destination for redirected calls and
incoming calls. When receiving a call, the VPS can greet the caller offering them the option to leave a message
or dial a number to reach the desired party. The VPS can record the message for each extension and leave
notification on the corresponding extension, if the called extension is not able to answer calls.
1. VM Group Type
Type
Description
VM (DTMF) Group
A group of SLT ports which use the Voice Mail DTMF
Integration features.
A maximum of 2 groups can be assigned.
VM (DPT) Group
A group of DPT ports which use the Voice Mail DPT (Digital)
Integration features.
• A maximum of 2 KX-TVS/KX-TVP systems can be
connected to the PBX.
• A maximum of one VM (DPT) group per KX-TVS/
KX-TVP can be assigned.
• A maximum of 12 ports (24 channels) of the VPS can
form each group.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
327
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
[Example]
PBX
DPT
Port
VM (DPT) Group
Floating extn. no. 500 (default)
VM (DTMF) Group
Floating extn. no. 200
Extn.101 Extn.102 Extn.103 Extn.104
Extn.201 Extn.202 Extn.203 Extn.204
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
DPT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
SLT
Port
VPS
(DTMF Integration)
VPS
(DPT [Digital] Integration)
VM (DTMF) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the SLT ports of the PBX. These SLT ports, as well as VM (DTMF) Group settings,
must be configured to allow DTMF Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of
Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group].
VM (DPT) Group Assignment:
The VPS is connected to the DPT ports of the PBX. These DPT ports, as well as VM (DPT) group settings,
must be configured to allow DPT (Digital) Integration, as shown in the following [Programming Example of
Extension Port] and [Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group].
[Programming Example of Extension Port]
Slot
*1
*2
*3
328
Port Port Type Extn. No.
Type*1
DPT Property
Port No.
Unit No.
of VPS*3
of VPS*2
1
1
2
1
3
3
1
2
DPT
DPT
101
102
VM (DPT)
VM (DPT)
4
4
1
2
S-Hybrid
S-Hybrid
201
202
VM (DPT)
VM (DPT)
2
2
1
2
5
5
1
2
SLT
SLT
301
302
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
6
6
1
2
SLT
SLT
401
402
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
Not assignable
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
® [601] Terminal Device Assignment
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
® 3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—
Feature Manual
VM (DPT) Group 1
VM (DPT) Group 2
VM (DTMF) Group 1
VM (DTMF) Group 2
DPT Type—Type
DPT Type—VM Unit No.
DPT Type—VM Port No.
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
[Programming Example of VM (DTMF) Group]
VM (DTMF)
Group No.
Floating
Extension
No.
Group
Name
Service
Mode
1
2
300
400
Company C
Company D
AA
VM
Extension No. of
Port Connected to
VPS Port
1
2
3
301
302
303
401
402
403
® 5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
[Programming Example of VM (DPT) Group]
VM (DPT) Group No.
1
2
*1
*2
Floating Extension No.*1
500
200
® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—
® [660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
® 5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—
Group Name*2
Company A
Company B
Floating Extension No.
Group Name
2. Incoming Calls to VM Group
When incoming calls are received at the floating extension number of the VM group, calls will hunt starting
at the lowest VM port number. In this case, the FWD and DND settings (® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb),
® 6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)) for each extension port are disregarded.
It is programmable whether the calls queue when all extension ports in the group are busy through system
programming. If the queuing is disabled through system programming, the call will be redirected to the
destination, assigned on the trunk group which receives the call, by the Intercept Routing feature.
Conditions
•
•
•
It is possible to call an extension (extension port) in a VM group directly. If the calls are routed directly to
the extension in the group, it is possible to enable some features (e.g., FWD, Idle Extension Hunting) on
the extension in the group.
The Voice Mail DTMF/DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., command transmit) is also available on the extension.
One-touch Voice Mail Feature Access
It is possible to assign a One-touch Dialing button for direct access to a Voice Mail feature. (®
12.1.4 One-touch Dialing) For example, to access a mailbox (mailbox number 123) of the VPS (extension
number 165) directly, assign "165#6123" to a One-touch Dialing button. When pressing this button, the
outgoing message (OGM) of the mailbox will be heard.
All ports in a VM (DPT) group must be connected to a single DHLC or DLC card.
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port
→ DPT Type—Type
→ DPT Type—VM Unit No.
→ DPT Type—VM Port No.
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
329
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PT Programming Manual References
[601] Terminal Device Assignment
[660] VM Group Floating Extension Number
Feature Manual References
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Description
A Panasonic VPS that supports DPT (Digital) Integration (e.g., the KX-TVP200) can be connected to this PBX
in a tightly integrated fashion.
DPT (Digital) Integration features can be used when the VPS is connected through DPT ports of the PBX.
Feature Explanation
1. Automatic Configuration—Quick Setup
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
330
The PBX informs the VPS of its extension numbers and the floating extension numbers of the incoming
call distribution groups so that the VPS can create mailboxes with this data automatically.
FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, incoming calls are forwarded to the VPS. (® 6.1.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding)) The PBX sends a mailbox number of the forwarding extension to the VPS. Therefore the
caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.
Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be redirected to
the VPS (® 9.1.11 Intercept Routing). If the "Intercept to Mailbox" setting is enabled through system
programming, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the intercepted extension to the VPS. Therefore the
caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the extension without knowing the mailbox number.
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Intercept to Mailbox
Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message in the
mailbox of the desired extension. (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer) The extension user should use the Voice Mail
(VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension user presses
this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the VM group and
dial the mailbox number of the desired extension number with the required command (after the VPS
answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
Transfer Recall to a Mailbox of the VPS
If a call is transferred to an extension via the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS and the call is
not answered within a preprogrammed Transfer Recall time, the PBX sends the mailbox number of the
transfer destination extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message in the mailbox of the
extension without knowing the mailbox number. The "Transfer Recall to Mailbox" setting should
be enabled through system programming to use this feature.
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings— Transfer Recall to Mailbox
® [201] Transfer Recall Time
Listening to a Recorded Message (Direct Mailbox Access)
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning on the Message
button light, and showing the number of messages waiting on the display of a 6-line display PT) on the
corresponding telephone as notification. (® 11.1.3 Message Waiting) Thereby, the VPS notifies the
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on,
pressing the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without
dialing such as a mailbox.
When the extension user dials an extension number of the VM (DPT) extension port or the floating
extension number of the VM (DPT) group from his extension, he can listen to the messages stored in his
mailbox without dialing his mailbox number (Direct Mailbox Access). It is possible to disable this feature
by COS programming on the VPS.
7. VPS CO Line Service & Automatic Time Mode Notification for Incoming Call*1
Multiple tenants can share a single VPS; each tenant does not require a dedicated VPS port. If the
destination of the incoming CO line call is a VM (DPT) group, the PBX sends the VM trunk group number
and time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the tenant (® 17.1.5 Time Service) assigned for the call to the
VPS. Therefore the VPS can send the assigned message (company greeting) to the caller. Corresponding
VM trunk group number and tenant number are determined by the setting of the incoming CO line call as
follows:
a. DIL/TIE: the setting of each CO line port (® 4.1.7 DIL (Direct In Line), ® 13.1.15 PRIVATE NETWORK
FEATURES)
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
Tenant Number
→
→
VM Trunk Group No.
b. DID: the setting of each location number for DID (® 4.1.6 DID (Direct Inward Dialing))
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
Tenant Number
→
→
VM Trunk Group No.
[Example]
For DIL Calls:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
331
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Each location number can have its VM trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.
[DIL Programming Example]
DIL Destination
Night
VM Trunk Group
No.
Tenant No.
105
100
1
1
100
102
100
2
2
:
:
:
:
:
Port No.
(CO Line No.)
Day
Lunch
Break
01
105
100
02
102
:
:
[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]
Trunk Group No.
1
2
:
Company Greeting No.
Incoming Call Service
··
Day
1
Custom Service 11
··
Lunch
2
Custom Service 29
··
Break
3
Custom Service 31
··
Night
4
Custom Service 12
··
Day
5
Custom Service 21
··
Lunch
6
Custom Service 15
··
Break
7
Custom Service 42
··
Night
8
Custom Service 30
··
:
:
:
··
Explanation:
A CO line call handled by DIL distribution reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing
feature. According to the [DIL Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example
of Trunk Group Assignment], a caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.
Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DIL destination and
company greeting number.
[Example]
For DID Calls:
332
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Each location number can have its VM trunk group number (message number) and tenant number.
[DID Programming Example]
DID Destination
VM Trunk Tenant
Location DID No.
DID Name
Group
No.
No.
No.
Day Lunch Break Night
0001
123-4567 105
100
105
100
John White
1
1
0002
123-2468 102
100
102
100
Tom Smith
2
3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
[VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment]
Trunk Group No.
1
2
:
Company Greeting No.
Incoming Call Service
··
Day
1
Custom Service 11
··
Lunch
2
Custom Service 29
··
Break
3
Custom Service 31
··
Night
4
Custom Service 12
··
Day
5
Custom Service 21
··
Lunch
6
Custom Service 15
··
Break
7
Custom Service 42
··
Night
8
Custom Service 30
··
:
:
:
··
Explanation:
A DID call reaches a VM (DPT) group directly or by the Intercept Routing feature. According to the [DID
Programming Example] and [VPS Programming—Programming Example of Trunk Group Assignment], a
caller will hear a corresponding company greeting of the VPS.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
333
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Time mode (day/lunch/break/night) of the preprogrammed tenant is applied to the DID destination and
company greeting number.
CO Line Call
CO Line Call
123-4567
123-2468
Sends the following information:
· VM Trunk Group: 1
· Time mode: Day
PBX
Intercept
Sends the following information:
· VM Trunk Group: 2
· Time mode: Lunch
Tenant 1
Tenant 2
(Company A)
(Company B)
VPS
(Floating Extn. No. 500)
Extn. 105
Extn. 102
8. Caller’s Identification Notification to the VPS
When receiving a CO line call, the PBX sends the caller’s identification number/name to the VPS.
9. DID Number Notification to the VPS
When receiving a CO line call with a DID number, the PBX sends the DID number to the VPS. The number
will be sent to the VPS even if the call reaches the VPS after redirection by, for example, the Intercept
Routing feature.
10. Status Notification to the VPS
After the call is redirected by the VPS, the PBX sends the status of the redirected extension (e.g., busy)
to the VPS.
11. Paging by the VPS
The VPS can perform the Paging feature using the recorded message. (® 13.1.1 Paging)
12. Live Call Screening (LCS)
A PT or PS user can monitor his own mailbox while a caller is leaving a message and, if desired, answer
the call by pressing the LCS button. When the caller is leaving a message in the mailbox, monitoring can
be carried out in two ways: each PT user can choose which through personal programming (Live Call
Screening Mode Set). PS users cannot choose the way: only Private mode is available for them.
Hands-free mode: The user can monitor the call automatically through the built-in speaker.
Private mode: The user will hear a warning tone. To monitor the call, the user goes off-hook with the
handset, MONITOR button, or SP-PHONE button. However, PS users cannot monitor the call with the
speakerphone.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— LCS Answer Mode
13. Two-way Recording into the VPS
A PT user can record a conversation into his own mailbox or another mailbox, while talking on the phone.
The Two-way Record button is used to record into one’s own mailbox. The Two-way Transfer button is
used to record into someone else’s mailbox.
334
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
Note
Before recording a Two-way telephone conversation, you should inform the other party that the
conversation will be recorded.
14. VPS Data Control by the PBX*1
The date and time settings of the VPS are controlled by the PBX.
15. Remote FWD Setting by the VM*1
Extension FWD settings can be programmed using the VPS.
*1
This feature may not be supported depending on the software version of the VPS.
Conditions
[General]
• When programming a KX-TVA series VPS, if there is no option to connect to a KX-NCP500/
•
KX-NCP1000 PBX, select the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 PBX.
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
[Live Call Screening (LCS)]
• This feature is not available for SIP extensions.
• If an SLT is connected in parallel to a PT, and if LCS is activated for the PT in Private mode, both the PT
•
•
•
•
and SLT can be used to monitor calls while in idle status. The SLT will ring to indicate a message is being
recorded. The call can be monitored with the SLT by going off-hook. To intercept the call, press the FLASH/
RECALL button or flash the hookswitch. (® 13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone)
LCS Button
A flexible button can be customized as the LCS button.
Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
To prevent unauthorized monitoring, it is recommended the LCS user assign an extension PIN. This PIN
will be required when setting LCS (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number)). If the user
forgets the PIN, it can be cleared by an extension assigned as the manager.
Each extension can be programmed to either end recording or continue recording the conversation after
the call is intercepted, through personal programming (LCS Mode Set [After Answering]).
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
To use the LCS feature on a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, LCS can only be turned on or off from the
wired telephone. In Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, setting LCS on/off from the PS has no effect. (®
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode)
[Two-way Recording into the VPS]
• Two-way Record/Two-way Transfer Button
•
A flexible button can be customized as the Two-way Record or the Two-way Transfer button. An extension
number can be assigned to the Two-way Transfer button so that it can be used as a one-touch record
button for the mailbox of the specified extension. (One-touch Two-way Transfer Button).
When all of the VPS ports are busy:
a. Pressing the Two-way Record button sends a warning tone
b. Pressing the Two-way Transfer button followed by an extension number sends a warning tone.
[Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS]
• When transferring a CO line call to a mailbox of the VPS, users should use the VM Transfer button.
If using a standard Transfer button, users must dial "#6" after accessing the VPS, and confirm that the
desired mailbox has been reached, before going on hook to complete the transfer.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
335
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone— Recall—Transfer Recall
5.18 [3-7-1] VM(DPT) Group—System Settings
5.19 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4
→ LCS Recording Mode
→ LCS Answer Mode
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4— LCS Recording Mode
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Record)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer)
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
→ Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer)
7.1 [5-1] Doorphone— VM Trunk Group Number
12.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group No.
12.3 [10-3] DID Table
→ Tenant Number
→ VM Trunk Group No.
PT Programming Manual References
[201] Transfer Recall Time
Feature Manual References
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Operating Manual References
1.3.69 Voice Mail Features—LCS (Live Call Screening)
1.3.70 Voice Mail Features—Two-way Record
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
3.1.2 Personal Programming
3.2.2 Manager Programming
336
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Description
The PBX and the VPS connected to the PBX can transmit commands using DTMF signals to each other. The
PBX sends preprogrammed commands using DTMF to the VPS automatically to change the answering service
between Voice Mail (VM) service mode and Automated Attendant (AA) service mode or to inform the extension
status (e.g., busy). The VPS sends the commands to the PBX like an SLT.
The following answering services and features are available:
1. Voice Mail (VM) Service Mode
When a caller reaches the VPS, the VPS greets and guides the caller to leave a voice message for a
specified mailbox.
[Example]
The VPS sends the message to the caller, "Thank you for calling Panasonic. Please enter the mailbox
number of the person you wish to leave your message for."
¯
The caller dials the mailbox number. Then, the dialed number is sent to the VPS via the PBX.
¯
The VPS sends the personal greeting to the caller, "You have reached Mike’s voice mail. I am sorry
I cannot take your call right now. Please leave a message and I will call you back."
¯
The caller leaves a message.
If the call reroutes to the floating extension number of the VM (DTMF) Group or the extension in the VM
(DTMF) group by such as the FWD feature, when the VPS answers the call, the PBX will dial the mailbox
number of the corresponding group or extension and any other digits required to the VPS automatically
using the caller-dialed number (Follow on ID). In this case, the caller can reach a mailbox without knowing
the mailbox number.
[Available Features for Follow on ID]
a. FWD to a Mailbox
b. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox
c. Call Transfer to a Mailbox
d. Listening to a Message in a Mailbox
2. Automated Attendant (AA) Service Mode
The VPS greets and guides the caller to the desired extension directly without operator assistance.
3. VM ® AA Service, AA ® VM Service
It is possible to switch the service mode assigned on the VPS port, from the VM service to AA service or
vice versa.
System Explanation
1. Service Mode Assignment
Assign the service mode, VM service or AA service, to the VM (DTMF) group to correspond with the
assignment of the VPS.
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings— Type
2. DTMF Command Assignment
Assign the DTMF command to suit the VPS settings.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
337
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→
VM DTMF Command—Recording Message
→
VM DTMF Command—Listening Message
→
VM DTMF Command—Switching to AA
→
VM DTMF Command—Switching to VM
Command (Default)
Switching to VM
#6
Switching to AA
#8
Recording message
H
Listening message
H
Note
H = Mailbox Number
3. VM Service
a. FWD to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a call is forwarded
from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called extension without
knowing the mailbox number.
[FWD to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets FWD to the VPS, any incoming call will be forwarded to the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are forwarded
so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by
selecting "AA" through system programming.
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—FWD to the VPS Sequence
Transmitted Command
Parameter
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Answer by Mailbox
(Default)
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command
(H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA
Switching to AA command (#8)
Switching to AA command (#8)
None
(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
b. Intercept Routing to a Mailbox of the VPS
The PBX sends a mailbox number of the corresponding extension to the VPS when a CO line call is
intercepted from an extension to the VPS. Therefore the caller can leave a message for the called
extension without knowing the mailbox number.
[Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Selection]
If an extension user sets Intercept Routing to the VPS, the intercepted CO line calls will be redirected
to the VPS.
It is also possible to send the AA command, even in the VM service mode, when calls are intercepted
so that the caller can be directed to an extension rather than a mailbox. This can be performed by
selecting "AA" through system programming.
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS
Sequence
338
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
Transmitted Command
Parameter
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Answer by Mailbox
Switching to VM command +
Recording message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command
(H [H = Mailbox No.])
AA
Switching to AA command (#8)
Switching to AA command (#8)
None (Default)
(DTMF commands are not sent. Work with default of the VPS.)
[Example of a) & b)]
CO Line Call
Sent "#6" + "102".
PBX
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
FWD, Intercept
Transfer
VPS (In AA service mode)
Operator
Extn. 102
VM Port 1
VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port X
VM Port 3
c. Transferring to a Mailbox of the VPS
An extension user can transfer a call to a mailbox of the VPS so that the caller can leave a message
in the mailbox of the desired extension (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer). The extension user should use the
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button, when transferring a call to the mailbox of the VPS. When the extension
user presses this button and enters the desired extension number, the PBX will transfer the call to the
VM group and dial the mailbox number of the desired extension with the required command (after the
VPS answers the call). Therefore the caller can leave a message without knowing the mailbox number.
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→
Type
→
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→
Type
→
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→
Type
→
Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
339
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
[Performance of Pressing the VM Transfer Button and Entering an Extension Number]
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode
In VM Service Mode
Switching to VM command + Recording
message command (#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
Recording message command (H [H =
Mailbox No.])
[Example]
CO Line Call
Sent "#6" + "103".
mailbox number
Switching to VM command
PBX
Transfer with VM Transfer
button + extension number (103)
Extension
(Operator)
VPS (In AA service mode)
VM Port 1
VM Port 2
VM (DTMF)
Group
VM Port 3
VM Port X
d. Listening to a Recorded Message
If the VPS receives a message, the VPS will set the Message Waiting feature on the corresponding
telephone to notify the extension user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. The Message
button light of the extension will turn on (® 11.1.3 Message Waiting), thereby notifying the extension
user that there is a message waiting in his mailbox. When the Message button light turns on, pressing
the button allows the extension user to play back the messages stored in his mailbox without dialing
such as a mailbox number. It is programmable whether the PBX or the VPS cancels the Message
Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the Message button light).
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control
When the PBX is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the extension user has
accessed the VPS. When the VPS is selected, the Message Waiting feature is canceled after the
extension user has listened to messages stored in his mailbox.
[Performance of Pressing the MESSAGE Button]
Transmitted Command
In AA Service Mode
Switching to VM command + Listening
message command
(#6 + H [H = Mailbox No.])
340
Feature Manual
In VM Service Mode
Listening message command ( H [H =
Mailbox No.])
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
[Example]
PBX
Pressing the
MESSAGE
button
Extn. 102
Sent "#6" + " ", "102".
Listening message
command, mailbox number
Switching to VM command
VPS (In AA
service mode)
Mailbox for
Extn. 102
4. AA Service
If the VPS transfers the call using the AA service, the PBX will inform the VPS of the status of the called
destination with the preprogrammed DTMF status signal so that the VPS can confirm the status of the
extension without listening to the system tones (e.g., ringback tone).
Assign the DTMF status signal to suit the VPS settings.
[DTMF Status Signals and Conditions]
Status
Condition
Default Command
RBT (ringback tone)
The PBX is ringing the corresponding extension.
1
BT (busy tone)
The called extension is busy.
2
ROT (reorder tone)
The dialed number is invalid.
3
DND (DND tone)
The called extension has set DND. (® 4.1.10 DND
(Do Not Disturb))
4
Answer
The called extension has answered the call.
5
FWD VM RBT (FWD to
Voice Mail ringback
tone)
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and the
PBX is calling another port of the VPS.
6
FWD VM BT (FWD to
Voice Mail busy tone)
The called extension has set FWD to VPS and all
ports of the VPS are busy.
7
FWD EXT RBT (FWD to
extension ringback
tone)
The PBX is calling an extension other than the one
dialed. FWD or Idle Extension Hunting (® 9.1.9 Idle
Extension Hunting) may be assigned by the called
extension.
8
Confirm (confirmation
tone)
The PBX receives confirmation that the feature has
been successfully set or canceled (e.g., Message
Waiting) on the extension.
9
Disconnect
The caller has hung up.
#9
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
→
VM DTMF Status Signal—Ringback Tone
→
VM DTMF Status Signal—Busy Tone
→
VM DTMF Status Signal—Reorder Tone
→
VM DTMF Status Signal—DND Tone
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
341
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
→
→
→
→
→
→
VM DTMF Status Signal—Answer
VM DTMF Status Signal—Confirm
VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Ringback Tone
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone
VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to Extension Ringback Tone
[Example]
1
An incoming call reaches the VPS. The VPS
greets the caller: "Thank you for calling
Panasonic. If you know the extension
number of the person you wish…".
2
The caller dials the extension number (extn.
102). The VPS will transfer the call to the
extension via the PBX.
3
If the extension is not available, the PBX
sends DTMF status signal of the extension
(busy status) to the VPS.
4
The VPS receives the DTMF status signal
and send the appropriate message to the
caller: "Sorry. The extension is busy. Would
you like to leave a message…".
1
PBX
2
Transfer
3
Sent "2".
Busy
Status
Busy
Extn.
102
4
VPS
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
342
Voice Mail (VM) Transfer Button
A flexible button can be customized as the Voice Mail (VM) Transfer button with the floating extension
number of the VM group as the parameter.
It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS answers the call and the PBX sends the
Follow on ID to the VPS.
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—Waiting Time before Sending Follow on
ID
It is possible to assign the time period between when the VPS transfers the call using the AA service to
the PBX and the PBX sends the DTMF status signal to the VPS.
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings— Timing—DTMF Length for VM
It is possible to select whether the mailbox number is the same as the extension number, or the mailbox
number is programmable for each extension number and incoming call distribution group (Mailbox Access
ID).
® 5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed
Mailbox No.
® 6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
® 6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
The Inter-digit time for the DTMF command and for DTMF status signal is programmable.
® 5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
Timing—Inter-digit Time
→
→
Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal
Data Line Security is set automatically on the extensions in the VM (DTMF) group to achieve proper
recording. (® 4.1.1 Data Line Security)
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
PC Programming Manual References
4.5 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous— Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time
5.12 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Miscellaneous— Programmed Mailbox No.
5.21 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings
5.22 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1— Programmed Mailbox No.
6.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console
→ Type
→ Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer)
Feature Manual References
3.1.10 Call Transfer
6.1.3 Flexible Buttons
6.1.6 FWD (Call Forwarding)
9.1.11 Intercept Routing
19.1.3 Voice Mail (VM) Group
Operating Manual References
1.3.71 Voice Mail Features—Voice Mail Integration
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
343
19.1.5 Voice Mail DTMF Integration
344
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 20
Features and Configurations—W
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
345
20.1.1 Walking COS
20.1 W
20.1.1 Walking COS
Description
A user can enter his extension number and extension personal identification number (PIN) (® 5.1.6 Extension
PIN (Personal Identification Number)) at another extension, to make the following types of call using his Class
of Service, including TRS level, overriding the other extension’s Class of Service.
• CO line call
• TIE line call
• Intercom call
• External Relay Control (® 5.1.8 External Relay)
After performing Walking COS, the following features are also available for the specified extension:
• Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) setting (® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD
(Call Forwarding))
• Incoming Call Distribution Group Log-in/Log-out (® 9.1.3 ICD Group Features—Log-in/Log-out)
• Absent Message setting (® 1.1.1 Absent Message)
• Extension Dial Lock (®5.1.4 Extension Dial Lock)
• Time Service—Changing the Time Mode (day/lunch/break/night) (® 17.1.5 Time Service)
• CLIP number setting (CLIP ID) (® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))
Conditions
•
•
•
•
When a CO line call is made using Walking COS:
– the Class of Service of the specified extension is applied (® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))
– the Itemized Billing code of the specified extension is applied (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
– the specified extension number is recorded on SMDR as the call originator, instead of the extension
number of the actual extension used (® 16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)).
Walking COS is also available through DISA. (® 4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access))
Extension PIN
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number)). If the wrong PIN is entered three times, the line will be disconnected.
This feature can not be used for extensions which the extension being operated is prevented from calling
by Internal Call Block. (® 9.1.14 Internal Call Block)
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Remote Operation
by Other Extension
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
6.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
PT Programming Manual References
[005] Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN)
346
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
Operating Manual References
1.3.73 Walking COS
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Description
It is possible for an extension user to trade extension settings with another extension.
When Walking Extension is executed, all extension settings (extension number, Class of Service (COS),
One-touch Dialing memory, etc.) of the "old" extension are exchanged with the "new" extension.
This feature is useful when an extension user moves desks, or when an extension user has no permanent
desk.
This feature is also known as Walking Station.
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
•
This feature allows extension settings to be switched between PTs (including IP-PTs) and SLTs. Moving
between tenants is also possible.
Incoming calls to your extension will reach you at your new location.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number))
If a DSS Console is connected to a PT and the DSS Console is continuously used with the PT after the
Walking Extension has been performed, the new extension number of the PT must be assigned as the
paired extension through system programming.
If the Walking Extension feature is performed at the same time that the target extension is being
programmed by PC, the Walking Extension feature may not work properly. (® 13.1.6 PC Programming)
If this feature is performed using an extension with a Bluetooth wireless headset connected, the Bluetooth
device cannot be used with the new extension. To use the Bluetooth wireless headset, register it to the
new extension.
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Walking Extension
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main— Extension PIN
6.17 [4-3] DSS Console— Pair Extension
PT Programming Manual References
[007] DSS Console Paired Telephone
Feature Manual References
9.1.15 IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone)
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
347
20.1.3 Walking Extension, Enhanced
Operating Manual References
1.3.74 Walking Extension
20.1.3 Walking Extension, Enhanced
Description
It is possible to use the Walking Extension feature with extensions in Service-in (functions normally) and
Service-out (cannot make CO line calls or receive calls) modes, allowing extensions and locations (i.e.,
telephones) to be utilized more efficiently. Extensions can be set to Service-out mode when the extension user
is not using the extension or to prevent calls from being made or received when no one is using the location.
The extension can then be changed to Service-in mode when the extension user wishes to use the extension.
Enhanced Walking Extension can be utilized as follows:
– When a single extension user uses multiple telephones
Extension users can switch locations with a Service-out extension. This allows extension users to use their
settings at another location while the previous location is in service-out mode. This is ideal for when
extension users need to work at multiple locations, such as another department, branch office, or at home.
– When multiple extension users use the same telephone
Extension users can change the service status of their Service-out extension to Service-in mode and switch
locations with another extension with a simple operation. This is ideal for when the same telephone is used
by multiple extension users who work in shifts.
Service-out mode
When an extension is in Service-out mode, the DND and Extension Lock features are set on the extension,
preventing the extension from making CO line calls and receiving calls.
[Example]
Extension settings can be used at other locations as follows:
Main Office
Extn. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. 101
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Service-out
Service-out
Service-out
Service-out
Service-in
Branch Office
Extn. 102
Service-out
Extn. 102
Service-out
Extn. 101
Service-in
Explanation:
The extension user of extension 101 changes to Service-out mode at the main office. He then changes his
extension to Service-in mode and switches extension settings at the branch office.
Virtual Locations
Instead of assigning all extensions to telephones, it is possible to store unused extensions (i.e., Service-out
mode) on a preinstalled extension card (i.e., settings are made but no physical location is utilized). When the
348
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
extension needs to be used, the extension can switch locations and service status with an extension on a
physical location (i.e., a location with a telephone).
[Example]
Extension settings can be switched allowing multiple extension users to use the same telephone as
follows:
Virtual
Location
Extn. 101
Service-in
Service-out
Extn. 101
Service-out
Service-in
Service-out
Virtual
Location
Extn. 102
Service-out
Extn. 101
Service-out
Service-in
Virtual
Location
Extn. 102
Service-out
Service-in
Extn. 102
Service-in
Explanation:
The extension user of extension 101 changes to service out mode. The extension user of extension 102
switches extension settings and changes his extension to Service-in mode.
Conditions
•
•
This feature is not available for PSs, T1 OPX extensions, and SIP extensions.
An extension personal identification number (PIN) is required to use this feature. (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN
(Personal Identification Number))
PC Programming Manual References
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—
Walking Extension
Feature Manual References
20.1.2 Walking Extension
Operating Manual References
1.3.75 Walking Extension, Enhanced
20.1.4 Whisper OHCA
Description
An extension user can speak to a busy extension through the handset.
Conditions
•
•
Class of Service (COS) programming determines which extensions can use this feature.
This feature is available when the calling and called extension use one of the following telephones:
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
349
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
–
–
–
–
•
•
•
•
•
KX-DT300 series
KX-T7600 series
KX-T7400 series
IP-PT
If the Whisper OHCA feature cannot be used due to COS or telephone type, a call waiting tone will be sent
to the called extension. (® 3.1.12 Call Waiting Tone)
If the called extension does not use a KX-DT300, KX-T7600, or KX-T7400 series telephone or an IP-PT,
but forces Whisper OHCA, the announcement may be heard by the other party.
It is possible to enable Whisper OHCA on any telephone, however, it may not function properly (the
caller’s voice may be heard by both callers, for example).
While an extension is receiving a Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current CO line call on
hold or transfers the current intercom call or CO line call, the Whisper OHCA will become disabled and the
calling extension will hear a ringback tone.
While an extension is receiving a Whisper OHCA, if the extension user places the current intercom call on
hold, the called extension can talk to the calling extension through the handset.
PC Programming Manual References
4.11 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override
→ BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Extension Feature—
OHCA / Whisper OHCA
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
Operating Manual References
1.3.13 Call Waiting Tone
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Description
A portable station (PS) can be used in parallel with a wired telephone, i.e., a digital proprietary telephone (DPT),
analog proprietary telephone (APT), or single line telephone (SLT), allowing an extension user to make or
receive calls with either the wired telephone or the PS. The PS will use the same extension number as the
wired telephone, and many of the wired telephone’s extension settings (Call Forwarding [FWD], Class of
Service [COS], etc.) are also used by the PS.
This mode is similar to XDP Parallel mode used to pair DPTs with SLTs. (® 5.1.7 Extension Port
Configuration)
In order to use a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode, the mode must be turned on using the PS.
350
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
[Example of Wireless XDP Parallel Mode, XDP Parallel Mode]
PBX
DHLC Card
DPT
Wireless Phone
(or any SLT)
Cell Station
CSIF Card
Extension Card
Wired Telephone
(APT, DPT, SLT)
XDP Parallel Mode
Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode
Extn. 102
Extn. 103
PS
Conditions
•
•
•
•
•
Whether or not a PS is allowed to pair itself with a wired telephone is determined by the COS assigned to
the extension number of the wired telephone.
Wireless XDP Parallel mode can be turned on or off using the PS only.
To switch between the wired telephone and the PS during a conversation, simply go off-hook with the other
telephone. Alternatively, to seize a separate line, use another method, such as pressing a CO or
INTERCOM button.
In addition, going off-hook with the other telephone seizes a separate line when the extension is:
a. Engaged in a conference call. (® 3.1.18 Conference, ® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override, ®
13.1.14 Privacy Release)
b. Screening a call using Live Call Screening (LCS) or when recording a conversation using Two-way
Record. (® 19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration)
c. Receiving an Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA). (® 12.1.3 OHCA (Off-hook Call
Announcement))
d. Being monitored by another extension. (® 3.1.6 Call Monitor)
e. When the extension has a call on consultation hold. (® 3.1.20 Consultation Hold)
When a PS in Wireless XDP Parallel mode is on a call, other extension users cannot perform the following
features when they call this extension:
– Executive Busy Override (® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)
– Whisper OHCA (® 20.1.4 Whisper OHCA)
When a PS is paired with a wired telephone, most of the extension settings assigned to the wired telephone
(extension number, extension name, etc.) will be used by the PS, and the PS will use its own extension
settings once again when Wireless XDP Parallel mode is canceled. Note, however, that the following
extension settings of the wired telephone are copied to the extension settings of the PS when Wireless
XDP Parallel mode is activated, and will remain in effect for the PS after the mode is canceled.
– Call Waiting Setting (® 3.1.11 CALL WAITING FEATURES)
– FWD/Do Not Disturb (DND) Setting (® 4.1.10 DND (Do Not Disturb), ® 6.1.6 FWD (Call
Forwarding))
– Call Pickup Deny Setting (® 3.1.8 Call Pickup)
– Executive Busy Override Deny Setting (® 5.1.3 Executive Busy Override)
– Itemized Billing Code for Automatic Route Selection (ARS) (® 1.1.3 ARS (Automatic Route
Selection))
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
351
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
– Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) Number and CLIP Number Selection (® 3.1.15 CLIP
(Calling Line Identification Presentation))
– Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) and Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)
•
•
•
Settings (® 3.1.15 CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation))
– Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) (® 5.1.6 Extension PIN (Personal Identification
Number))
– COS Programming (® 3.1.21 COS (Class of Service))
– Extension User Group (® 7.1.1 GROUP FEATURES)
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (® 3.1.7 Call Park, ® 3.1.10 Call
Transfer)
The PS will retain its original settings for the following items even when in Wireless XDP Parallel mode.
These settings can be set on the wired telephone and PS independently, and the settings can be different.
– Ring Tone Pattern Table Selection (® 15.1.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Incoming (® 10.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming)
– Preferred Line Assignment—Outgoing (® 10.1.3 Line Preference—Outgoing)
– Hot Line Setting (® 8.1.6 Hot Line)
– Display Language (® 4.1.9 Display Information)
– ISDN Bearer Mode (® 9.1.16 ISDN (INTEGRATED SERVICES DIGITAL NETWORK) FEATURES)
– Flexible Button Assignment (® 6.1.3 Flexible Buttons)
– Transfer Recall Destination for Call Transfer and Call Park (The setting assigned to the wired telephone
will first be copied to the PS’s extension settings, then can be changed for the PS if necessary.) (®
3.1.7 Call Park, ® 3.1.10 Call Transfer)
If an extension number is required when changing any PS settings while in Wireless XDP Parallel mode,
use the original extension number assigned to the PS, not the extension number of the paired (wired)
telephone.
If the Extension Feature Clear is performed, the corresponding extension data for both the wired telephone
and the PS will be cleared. (® 5.1.5 Extension Feature Clear)
When a call arrives, both the wired telephone and the PS will ring. However, when one of the following
settings is made, only the telephone which was used to make the setting will ring.
– Automatic Callback Busy (® 1.1.4 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on))
– Transfer Recall (® 3.1.10 Call Transfer)
– Hold Recall (® 3.1.4 Call Hold)
– Call Park Recall (® 3.1.7 Call Park)
PC Programming Manual References
3.24 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port— DPT Type—Type
3.39 [1-2] Portable Station—PS Registration and De-registration
4.9 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features— Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Set / Cancel
4.12 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Optional Device & Other Extensions— Accept Wireless XDP
Parallel Mode Set by PS
6.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1— Wireless XDP
PT Programming Manual References
[515] Wireless XDP Parallel Mode for Paired Telephone
Feature Manual References
3.1.21 COS (Class of Service)
13.1.2 Paralleled Telephone
352
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Operating Manual References
1.3.77 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
353
20.1.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode
354
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Section 21
Appendix
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
355
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
System
Item
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Absent Message—Extension
1 x 16 characters
Absent Message—System
8 x 16 characters
Call Park Zone
100
Conference
3-8 parties per conference (32 parties total)
COS
64
DID Table
32 digits, 1000 entries
Extension number
1 – 5 digits
Extension Personal Identification Number
(PIN)
10 digits, 1 entry/extension
Host PBX Access Code
10 digits, 10 entries/trunk group
Number of Characters of Name
20
Printing message
8
Queuing Time Table
64
Ring Tone Pattern Plan
8
Simultaneous Programmers
SMDR Call Storage
•
•
•
one system programmer + 63 personal programmers
one manager programmer + 63 personal programmers
64 personal programmers
200 calls
Special Carrier Access Code
16 digits, 20 entries
Tenant
8
Time Service Holiday
24
Verification Code
4 digits, 1000 entries
Verification Code Personal Identification
Number (PIN)
10 digits, 1000 entries
Dialing
Item
Emergency Call
Hot Line
Personal Speed Dialing
Quick Dialing
356
Feature Manual
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
32 digits, 10 entries
32 digits
32 digits, 100 entries/extn.
8 digits, 4080 entries
Document Version 2009-12
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Item
Redial
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
32 digits
System Speed Dialing
32 digits, 1000 entries/tenant
Groups
Item
Call Pickup Group
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
64
Idle Extension Hunting Group
64 (16 extensions/group)
Incoming Call Distribution Group
128 (32 extensions/group)
Paging Group
32
PS Ring Group
32
Trunk Group
64
VM (DPT) Group
2 groups x 12 ports (24 channels)
VM (DTMF) Group
2 groups x 32 channels
TRS
Item
TRS Level
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
7
TRS Denied Code
16 digits, 100 entries/level
TRS Exception Code
16 digits, 100 entries/level
ARS
Item
Routing Plan Table
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
16 entries
Leading Number Table
16 digits, 1000 entries
Leading Number Exception Table
16 digits, 200 entries
ARS Carrier
10
Itemized Billing Code
10 digits
Authorization Code for Tenant
16 digits
Authorization Code for Trunk Group
10 digits
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
357
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
Call Log and Message Waiting
Item
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Outgoing Call Log—PT
100 records/extn.
840 records/system
Outgoing Call Log—PS
100 records/extn.
320 records/system
Incoming Call Log—PT
100 records/extn.
1680 records/system
Incoming Call Log—PS + Incoming Call
Distribution Group
100 records/extn. or group
Total 1536 records/system
Message Waiting—PS + Incoming Call
Distribution Group
192
Message Waiting—PT + SLT
512
Voice Message
Item
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Outgoing Message (OGM)
64
OGM Total Recording Time
MSG4 Card: 8 minutes; ESVM4/IPCMPR Card: 20 minutes
(at High recording quality)
Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
SVM Total Recording Time
IPCMPR Card: 125 messages; ESVM4 Card: 250 messages
per card/block
20, 60, or 120 minutes
(depending on the recording quality)
Hospitality Features
Item
Hotel Operator
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
4
Networking
Item
TIE Line Routing and Modification Table
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
32 entries
Leading Number
3 digits
PBX Code
7 digits
NDSS: Monitored PBXs
NDSS: Registered Extensions for Monitor
PBX
358
Feature Manual
8
250
Document Version 2009-12
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
CTI
Item
KX-NCP500
PC Console
KX-NCP1000
8
PC Phone
20
36
Password
Item
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
System Password for Installer
4 – 10 characters
System Password for Administrator—for PC
Programming
4 – 10 characters
System Password for User—for PC
Programming
4 – 10 characters
System Password for Administrator—for PT
Programming
4 – 10 digits
System Password for User—for PT
Programming
4 – 10 digits
Manager Password
4 – 10 digits
Programmer Code
Item
KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000
Installer Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
Administrator Level Programmer Code
4 – 16 characters
User Level Programmer Code
0 – 16 characters
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
359
21.2 Tones/Ring Tones
21.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
1s
Confirmation Tone 1
Confirmation Tone 2
Confirmation Tone 3
Confirmation Tone 4
Confirmation Tone 5
Dial Tone 1
Dial Tone 2
Dial Tone 3
Dial Tone 4
Busy Tone
Reorder Tone
Ringback Tone 1
Ringback Tone 2
DND Tone
CO Line Call Limit
Warning Tone
360
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
21.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Tone Patterns (Default)
15 s
Hold Alarm Tone
Call Waiting Tone 1
1s
Call Waiting Tone 2
OR
Ring Tone Patterns (Default)*
1s
Single
Double
Triple
S-Double
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
361
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB)
Table
System Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.1)
Object ID
Item
Description
1
sysDescr
Information of Hardware type and Software version of the Device.
2
sysObjectID
Object identifier of this product.
3
sysUpTime
Elapsed time since the system was restarted.
4
sysContact
Device Administrator.
5
sysName
Name of Device.
6
sysLocation
Installation Location of Device.
7
sysService
Support Layer.
Interface Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.2)
Object ID
362
Item
Description
1
ifNumber
The number of Network Devices.
2
IfTable (NA)
Management Table by each Network Device.
2.1
IfEntry (NA)
Components of ifTable.
2.1.1
ifIndex
Each interface identifier.
2.1.2
ifDescr
Explanation of Interface.
2.1.3
ifType
Type of Interface.
2.1.4
ifMtu
Maximum Datagram Length which can be sent/received.
2.1.5
ifSpeed
Maximum Transfer Speed.
2.1.6
ifPhysAddress
Physical Address (MAC Address).
2.1.7
ifAdminStatus
The desired state of the interface.
2.1.8
ifOperStatus
The current operational state of the interface.
2.1.9
ifLastChange
The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current
operational state (up or down).
2.1.10
ifInOctets
The number of Octets received.
2.1.11
ifInUcastPkts
The number of Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
2.1.12
ifInNUcastPkts
The number of Non Unicast Packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
2.1.14
ifInErrors
The number of inbound Packets that contained errors.
2.1.15
ifInUnKnownProtos
The number of Packet received which are discarded because of an
unknown/unsupported protocol.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
Object ID
Item
Description
2.1.16
ifOutOctets
The number of Octets transmitted.
2.1.17
ifOutUcastPkts
The number of Unicast Packets which are received from upper
protocol.
2.1.18
ifOutNUcastPkts
The number of Non Unicast Packets which are received from upper
protocol.
2.1.21
ifOutQLen
The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
2.1.22
ifSpecific
Relevant MIB object identifier.
IP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.4)
Object ID
Item
Description
1
ipForwarding
The value which indicates operation availability as a router
(whether Datagram is transferred or not).
2
ipDefaultTTL
Default value for IP Packet TTL (Time to Live).
3
ipInReceives
The total number of Packets received (including packet received in
error).
4
ipnHdrErrors
The number of Packets discarded due to errors in their header.
5
ipInAddrError
The number of Packets discarded because IP Address of the
destination was invalid.
7
ipInUnknownProtos
The number of Packets discarded because the protocol was
unknown/unsupported.
8
ipInDiscards
The number of incoming Packets discarded because of an
insufficient reception buffer.
9
ipInDelivers
The total number of Packets received (including ICMP) normally.
10
ipOutRequests
The total number of IP Packets (ICMP) which are tried to be
transmitted (relay Packet is not included).
13
ipReasmTimeout
The maximum number of seconds required in the buffer to rebuild
a fragmented Packet.
14
ipReasmReqds
The number of Packets that required rebuilding from a fragmented
state.
15
ipReasmOKs
The number of Packets that were rebuilt correctly from a
fragmented state.
16
ipReasmFails
The number of Packets that could not be rebuilt correctly from a
fragmented state.
17
ipFragOKs
The number of Packets that were fragmented correctly.
18
ipFragFails
The number of Packets that could not be fragmented correctly.
19
ipFragCreates
The number of IP datagrams created due to fragmentation.
20
ipAddrTable (NA)
Management Table of addressing information relevant to this
entity’s IP addresses.
20.1
IpAddrEntry (NA)
Components of ipAddrTable.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
363
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
Object ID
Item
Description
20.1.1
IpAdEntAddr
IP Address.
20.1.2
IpAdEntIfindex
Index value of the Interface which is assigned to IP address.
20.1.3
IpAdEntNetMask
The Subnet Mask associated with IP address.
20.1.4
ipAdEntBcastAddr
Broadcast Address Value associated with IP Address.
20.1.5
IpAdEntReasmMaxSiz
e
The size of the largest IP Datagram which can be sent/received
through IP Address.
ICMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.5)
Object ID
Item
Description
1
cmpInMsgs
The total number of ICMP messages received (excluded, with
error).
2
icmpInErrors
The total number of ICMP messages received which contained
error.
8
icmpInEchos
The total number of ICMP echo request messages received.
9
icmpInEchoReps
The total number of ICMP echo answering messages received.
14
icmpOutMsgs
The number of ICMP messages which were sent.
15
icmpOutErrors
The number of ICMP messages which were not sent because of
error.
21
icmpOutEchos
The number of ICMP Echo request messages sent.
22
icmpOutEchoReps
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent.
TCP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.6)
Object ID
364
Item
Description
1
tcpRtoAlgorithm
The algorithm used to determine the timing of retransmitting when
a response was unacknowledged.
2
tcpRtoMin
Minimum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in
milliseconds).
3
tcpRtoMax
Maximum value permitted for retransmission timeout (in
milliseconds).
4
tcpMaxConn
Maximum number of TCP connections which can be supported.
5
tcpActiveOpens
The total number of Active open TCP connections.
6
tcpPassiveOpens
The total number of Passive open TCP connections.
7
tcpAttemptFails
The total number of connections error.
8
tcpEstabResets
The total number of resets.
10
tcpInSegs
The total number of segments received.
11
tcpOutSegs
The total number of segments sent.
12
tcpRetransSegs
The total number of segments retransmitted.
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
Object ID
Item
Description
14
tcpInErrs
The total number of segments received in error.
15
tcpOutRsts
The total number of TCP segments sent containing the RST flag
(reset connection).
UDP Group (1.3.6.1.2.7)
Object ID
Item
Description
1
udpInDatagrams
The total number of UDP Datagrams received.
2
udpNoPorts
The total number of received UDP Datagrams for which there was
no application at the destination port.
3
udpInError
The total number of received UDP Datagrams which contained
error.
4
udpOutDatagrams
The total number of UDP Datagrams sent.
SNMP Group (1.3.6.1.2.1.11)
Object ID
Item
Description
1
snmpInPkts
The total number of SNMP messages received.
2
snmpOutPkts
The total number of SNMP messages sent.
3
snmpInBadVersions
The total number of received SNMP messages of which version is
unsupported.
4
snmpInBadCommunity
Names
The total number of SNMP messages with unknown Community
Name.
6
snmpInASNParseErrs
The total number of SNMP messages with incorrect OID type.
13
snmpInTotalReqVars
The total number of Objects which have been retrieved value
successfully.
15
snmpInGetRequests
The total number of Get-Request which have been accepted and
processed (e.g. Data extract by using snmpget/snmpwalk
command).
16
snmpInGetNexts
The total number of Get-Next which have been accepted and
processed (for at the time of following a layer-tree by using
snmpwalk command).
20
snmpOutTooBigs
The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
of "TooBig".
21
snmpOutNoSuchNam
es
The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
of "NoSuchName".
24
snmpOutGenErrs
The total number of sent SNMP messages which returned an error
of "GenErr".
28
snmpOutGetResponse
s
The total number of GetResponse sent.
29
snmpOutTraps
The total number of TRAP sent.
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
365
21.3 Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table
Object ID
30
366
Item
snmpEnableAuthenTr
aps
Feature Manual
Description
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to
generate authentication failure traps.
Document Version 2009-12
21.4.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.02xx
21.4 Revision History
21.4.1 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version
1.01xx
Changed Contents
•
14.1.2 Quick Setup
•
19.1.4 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration
21.4.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version
2.02xx
New Contents
•
13.1.26 PS Connection
IP Cell Station
Changed Contents
•
3.1.1 CA (Communication Assistant)
•
3.1.23 CTI (Computer Telephony Integration)
•
4.1.8 DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
– Walking COS Through DISA
– DISA Call Transfer from Outside Destination
•
6.1.4 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering
Added support for SIP extensions
•
11.1.4 Music on Hold
OGM features added
•
12.1.2 OGM (Outgoing Message)
BGM and Music on Hold features added
•
16.1.2 SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension
•
16.1.3 SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording)
•
21.1 Capacity of System Resources
System capacity for PT call logs increased
•
21.2 Tones/Ring Tones
Cyclic Tone deleted
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
367
21.4.2 KX-NCP500/KX-NCP1000 PBMPR Software File Version 2.02xx
368
Feature Manual
Document Version 2009-12
Index
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
369
Index
A
AA ® Automated Attendant 77, 337
Absent Message 14
Account Code Entry 15
Alarm Information, Local 174
Alternate Calling—Ring/Voice 163
Alternate Receiving/Calling Mode (Ring/Voice)
Override 128
Alternate Receiving—Ring/Voice 163
Appendix 355
ARS ® Automatic Route Selection 16
Authorization Code 20
Automated Attendant (AA) 77, 337
Automatic Call Hold 37
Automatic Call Park 42
Automatic Call Waiting 48
Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) 22
Automatic Extension Release 23
Automatic Fax Transfer 23
Automatic Log-out 144
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) 32
Automatic Privacy 215
Automatic Redial 274
Automatic Rerouting of VoIP Calls to Public CO Lines
Automatic Rerouting to Secondary PBX 166
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 16
Automatic Station Release ® Automatic Extension
Release 23
Automatic Time Adjustment 24
B
Background Music (BGM) 28, 183
BGM ® Background Music 28, 183
BGM—External 28
Bluetooth Module 166
Boss & Secretary feature 117
Busy on Busy 148
Busy Override Deny, Executive 91
Busy Override, Executive 91
Busy Station Signaling (BSS) ® Call Waiting
Buttons, Fixed 102
Buttons, Flexible 105
C
CA ® Communication Assistant 30
Call Directory—Extension Dialing 163
Call Directory—Speed Dialing 293
Call Distribution Port Group 30
Call Forwarding (FWD) 114
Call Forwarding—QSIG (CF—QSIG) 252
Call Hold 36
Call Hold Retrieve Deny 37
Call Hold, Automatic 37
Call Log, Incoming 38
Call Log, Outgoing 274
Call Monitor 41
Call Park 42
Call Park Recall 42
Call Park Retrieve Deny 42
Call Pickup 43
Call Pickup Group 44, 122
370
Feature Manual
48
258
Call Pickup, Directed 43
Call Splitting 44
Call Transfer 45
Call Transfer with Announcement 45
Call Transfer without Announcement 45
Call Transfer—QSIG (CT—QSIG) 255
Call Transfer—Screened ® Call Transfer with
Announcement 45
Call Transfer—Unscreened ® Call Transfer without
Announcement 45
Call Waiting Caller ID (Visual Caller ID) 49
CALL WAITING FEATURES 48
Call Waiting Tone 50
Callback Busy, Automatic (Camp-on) 22
Caller ID 32
Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 51, 155
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP) 32, 53
Calling Line Identification Presentation (CLIP)—QSIG 253
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR) 53
Calling Line Identification Restriction (CLIR)—QSIG 254
Calling Name Identification Presentation (CNIP)—
QSIG 253
Calling Name Identification Restriction (CNIR)—QSIG 254
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection 62
Capacity of System Resources 356
Carrier Access Code, Special 292
CCBS—QSIG ® Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber—
QSIG 251
CDPG ® Call Distribution Port Group 30
CELLULAR PHONE FEATURES 51
Cellular Phone XDP Parallel 145
Centralized Voice Mail 237
CF—QSIG ® Call Forwarding—QSIG 252
Circular Hunting 154
Class of Service (COS) 61
CLI ® Calling Line Identification Distribution 51, 155
CLIP ® Calling Line Identification Presentation 32, 53
CLIP—QSIG ® Calling Line Identification Presentation—
QSIG 253
CLIR ® Calling Line Identification Restriction 53
CLIR—QSIG ® Calling Line Identification Restriction—
QSIG 254
CNIP—QSIG ® Calling Name Identification Presentation—
QSIG 253
CNIR—QSIG ® Calling Name Identification Restriction—
QSIG 254
CO Line Access 55
CO Line Call Limitation 57
Code Entry, Verified 324
COLP ® Connected Line Identification Presentation 53
COLP—QSIG ® Connected Line Identification Presentation
—QSIG 253
COLR ® Connected Line Identification Restriction 53
COLR—QSIG ® Connected Line Identification Restriction—
QSIG 254
Communication Assistant (CA) 30
Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)—
QSIG 251
Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 62
Conference 58
Confirmation Tone 59
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP) 53
Document Version 2009-12
Index
Connected Line Identification Presentation (COLP)—
QSIG 253
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR) 53
Connected Line Identification Restriction (COLR)—
QSIG 254
Connected Name Identification Presentation (CONP)—
QSIG 253
Connected Name Identification Restriction (CONR)—
QSIG 254
CONP—QSIG ® Connected Name Identification
Presentation—QSIG 253
CONR—QSIG ® Connected Name Identification Restriction
—QSIG 254
Consultation Hold 60
COS ® Class of Service 61
CO-to-CO Line Call Duration 57
CPC ® Calling Party Control Signal Detection 62
CTI ® Computer Telephony Integration 62
CT—QSIG ® Call Transfer—QSIG 255
D
Data Line Security 66
Delayed Ringing 140
Denied Code Tables 314
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Assignment 66
DHCP ® Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 66
Dial Mode Selection 66
Dial Tone 67
Dial Tone Transfer 69
Dialing Digit Restriction during Conversation 57
Dialing, One-touch 192
DID ® Direct Inward Dialing 70, 155
Digital XDP 198
DIL ® Direct In Line 72, 155
Direct CO Line Access 55
Direct In Line (DIL) 72, 155
Direct Inward Dialing (DID) 70, 155
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) 74
Direct Recording 297
Directed Call Pickup 43
Directory, Call—Extension Dialing 163
Directory, Call—Speed Dialing 293
DISA ® Direct Inward System Access 74
DISA AA Service ® DISA Built-in Automated Attendant
Number 77
DISA Automatic Walking COS 79
DISA Intercept Routing—Busy 78
DISA Intercept Routing—DND 79
DISA Intercept Routing—No Answer 79
DISA Intercept Routing—No Dial 77
DISA Security Mode 78
Display Information 84
Display Lock 40, 292, 299
Distribution, Group Call 139
DND ® Do Not Disturb 85
DND Override 85
DND, Paging 85, 197
Do Not Disturb (DND) 85
Door Open 86
Doorphone Call 87
Document Version 2009-12
E
EFA ® External Feature Access 90
Electronic Station Lockout ® Extension Dial Lock 92
Emergency Call 91
Enhanced Walking Extension 348
Exception Code Tables 315
Exclusive Call Hold 36
Executive Busy Override 91
Executive Busy Override Deny 91
Extension Dial Lock 92
Extension Feature Clear 93
Extension PIN (Personal Identification Number) 94
Extension PIN Lock 95
Extension Port Configuration 95
Extension Release, Automatic 23
Extension User Group 122
Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration 57
External Feature Access (EFA) 90
External Relay 96
External Sensor 97
EXtra Device Port (XDP) 96
F
Fax Transfer, Automatic 23
Feature Clear, Extension 93
Fixed Buttons 102
Fixed Numbering 107
Flash/Recall/Terminate 104
Flexible Buttons 105
Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering 107
Floating Extension 113
Floating Station ® Floating Extension 113
Full One-touch Dialing 192
FWD ® Call Forwarding 114
FWD, Multiple 116
FWD/DND Button, Group FWD Button 118
FWD/DND Setting by Fixed FWD/DND button
FWD—All Calls 114
FWD—Busy 114
FWD—Busy/No Answer 114
FWD—Follow Me 114
FWD—No Answer 114
119
G
Gateway Groups 257
Group Call Distribution 139
Group Call Pickup 43
GROUP FEATURES 122
Group FWD Button Types 118
Group, Call Distribution Port 30
Group, Call Pickup 43, 122
Group, Extension User 122
Group, Idle Extension Hunting 123, 154
Group, Incoming Call Distribution 123
Group, Paging 123, 196
Group, PS Ring 124, 262
Group, Trunk 122
Group, Voice Mail (VM) 124, 327
Feature Manual
371
Index
H
Handover 260
Handset/Headset Selection ® Headset Operation 129
Hands-free Answerback 128
Hands-free Operation 129
Headset Operation 129
Hold Recall 36
Hold Retrieve Deny, Call 37
Hold, Call 36
Hold, Exclusive Call 36
Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone
Company from a Host PBX) 130
Hot Line 132
Hotel Operator 276
Hunting, Circular 154
Hunting, Idle Extension 154
Hunting, Priority 140
Hurry-up Transfer ® Manual Queue Redirection 150
I
ICD Group ® Incoming Call Distribution Group 123, 136
Idle Extension Hunting 154
Idle Extension Hunting Group 123, 154
Idle Line Access (Local Access) 55
Idle Line Preference 173
Incoming Call Distribution Group 123
INCOMING CALL FEATURES 155
Incoming Call Log 38
Incoming Call Queue Monitor 151
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) 167
Intercept Routing 158
Intercept Routing, DISA—Busy 78
Intercept Routing, DISA—DND 79
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Answer 79
Intercept Routing, DISA—No Dial 77
Intercept Routing—Busy 158
Intercept Routing—DND 158, 159
Intercept Routing—No Answer (IRNA) 158
Intercept Routing—No Destination 162
Intercept Routing—Overflow in an Incoming Call Distribution
Group 147
Intercom Call 163
Internal Call Block 164
Interrupt Redial 274
IP Cell Station 261
IP-PT (IP Proprietary Telephone) 165
IP-PT ® IP Proprietary Telephone 165
IRNA ® Intercept Routing—No Answer 158
ISDN ® Integrated Services Digital Network) 167
Itemized Billing Code 21
L
LCS ® Live Call Screening 334
LED Indication 170, 207
Line Preference Override 174
Line Preference—Incoming 172
Line Preference—Outgoing 173
Live Call Screening (LCS) 334
Local Alarm Information 174
Lock, Display 40, 292, 299
Lock, Extension Dial 92
372
Feature Manual
Lock, Extension PIN 95
Lock, Remote Extension Dial
Log-in/Log-out 142
Log-in/Log-out Monitor 144
92
M
Making Calls with an SDN Button 207
Manager Features 178
Manual Queue Redirection 150
Message Waiting 181
Message, Absent 14
Message, Outgoing (OGM) 188
Message, Printing 214
Modem—On-site/Remote Programming
Monitor, Call 41
Multiple FWD 116
Multiple VPSs 240
Music on Hold 183
Music Source Assignment 183
Music, Background (BGM) 28
Mute 185
204
N
NDSS ® Network Direct Station Selection 241
Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) 241
Network ICD Group 246
No Line Preference 172, 173
Numbering, Flexible/Fixed 107
O
Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 191
Off-hook Monitor 188
OGM ® Outgoing Message 188
OHCA ® Off-hook Call Announcement 191
OHCA, Whisper 349
One-touch Dialing 192
One-touch Dialing, Full 192
One-touch Transfer 47
On-site Programming 204
Operator Call 193
Operator Features 192
Operator, Hotel 276
Outgoing Call Log 274
Outgoing Message (OGM) 188
Outside Destinations in Incoming Call Distribution
Group 145
Overflow 147
P
Paging 196
Paging Deny 196
Paging DND 85, 197
Paging Group 123, 196
Paralleled Telephone 198
Password Security 200
Pause Insertion 201
PC Console/PC Phone 202
PC Programming 204
PDN ® Primary Directory Number
Peer-to-Peer Connection 212
206
Document Version 2009-12
Index
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Extension 94
Personal Identification Number (PIN), Verification
Code 324
Personal Speed Dialing 292
Pickup Dialing ® Hot Line 132
Pickup, Group Call 44, 122
PIN ® Extension Personal Identification Number 94
PIN ® Verification Code Personal Identification
Number 324
PIN Lock, Extension 95
PING (Packet Internet Groper) Confirmation 212
PING ® Packet Internet Groper 212
Port Configuration, Extension 95
Portable Station (PS) Connection 259
Power Failure Connections 213
Power Failure Restart 213
Power Failure Transfer 213
Predialing 214
Primary Directory Number (PDN) 206
Prime Line Preference 173, 174
Printing Message 214
Priority Hunting 140
Privacy Release 215
PRIVATE NETWORK FEATURES 215
Programming, PC 204
Programming, PT 266
PS Connection 259
PS Directory 261
PS Feature Buttons 262
PS Ring Group 124, 262
PS Roaming by Network ICD Group 248
PT Programming 266
Pulse to Tone Conversion 67
Q
QSIG 249
Queue Redirection, Manual
Queuing 149
Quick Dialing 270
Quick Setup 270
S-CO Line Access 55
Screening, Live Call (LCS) 334
SDN ® Secondary Directory Number 206
SDN Direct Dial 207
SDN Walking COS 207
Secondary Directory Number (SDN) 206
Security Mode, DISA 78
Self Labeling (KX-NT366 only) 280
Sending Faxes Through the Network 259
Sensor, External 97
Service-out mode 348
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) 25
Simplified Voice Message (SVM) 294
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) Extension 281
SMDR ® Station Message Detail Recording 282
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) System
Monitor 290
SNMP ® Simple Network Management Protocol 290
SNTP ® Simple Network Time Protocol 25
Software Upgrading 322
Special Carrier Access Code 292
Speed Dialing, Personal 292
Speed Dialing, System 293
Splitting, Call 44
Station Hunting ® Idle Extension Hunting 154
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 282
Station Password Lock ® Extension PIN Lock 95
Station Program Clear ® Extension Feature Clear 93
Station Speed Dialing ® Personal Speed Dialing 292
Supervisory 151
Supported Management Information Base (MIB) Table 362
SVM ® Simplified Voice Message 294
SVM Log 297
Syslog Record Management 300
System Speed Dialing 293
150
R
Recall 104
Recording into the VPS, Two-way 334
Recording, Direct 297
Redial, Automatic 274
Redial, Interrupt 274
Redial, Last Number 274
Relay, External 96
Remote Control 151
Remote Extension Dial Lock 92
Remote Programming 205
Remote Station Lock Control ® Remote Extension Dial
Lock 92
Remote Wake-up Call 308
Revision History 367
Ring 140
Ring Tone Pattern Selection 275
Ringing Line Preference 173
Room Status Control 276
Route Selection, Automatic (ARS) 16
Document Version 2009-12
S
T
T.38 protocol 259
T1 Line Service 302
TAFAS ® Trunk Answer From Any Station 303
Tenant Service 304
Tenant-to-Tenant Call Block 305
Terminate 104
Terminated Hunting 154
TIE Line 215
Time Service 309
Timed Reminder 308
Toll Restriction (TRS) 313
Tone, Call Waiting 50
Tone, Confirmation 59
Tone, Dial 67
Tones/Ring Tones 360
Transfer Recall 46
Transfer, Call 45
Transfer, One-touch 47
TRAP Implementation 291
TRS ® Toll Restriction 313
TRS Level 315
TRS Override by System Speed Dialing 315
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) 303
Feature Manual
373
Index
Trunk Group 122
Trunk Group Access 55
Two-way Recording into the VPS
334
U
UCD ® Uniform Call Distribution 140
Unattended Conference 58
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) 140
Upgrading the Software 322
V
Verification Code Entry 324
Verification Code Personal Identification Number
(PIN) 324
VIP Call 153
Virtual Locations 348
Virtual PS 325
Voice Mail (VM) Group 124, 327
Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration 330
Voice Mail DTMF Integration 337
Voice Mail, Centralized 237
Voice Message, Simplified (SVM) 294
VoIP ® Voice over Internet Protocol Network 256
VPS Data Control by the PBX 335
W
Wake-up Call, Remote 308
Walking COS 346
Walking COS—DISA 79
Walking Extension 347
Walking Extension, Enhanced 348
Walking Station ® Walking Extension
Whisper OHCA 349
Wireless XDP Parallel Mode 350
Wrap-up 142
347
X
XDP ® EXtra Device Port
XDP, Digital 198
XDP, Wireless 350
374
Feature Manual
96
Document Version 2009-12
Notes
Document Version 2009-12
Feature Manual
375
3DQDVRQLF7HOHSKRQH6\VWHPV
See More
Panasonic Manuals
www.voicesonic.com
Phone 877-289-2829
Copyright:
This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal
use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic
System Networks Co., Ltd.
© Panasonic System Networks Co., Ltd. 2009
PSQX4746XA KK0908GJ2129 (v0.005)
">